c-class...c-class operator's manual order no. p205 0070 13 part no. 205 584 15 05 edition b...

C-ClassOperator's Manual

Order no. P205 0070 13 Part no. 205 584 15 05 Edition B 2016

É2055841505QËÍ2055841505

C-Clas

s Ope

rator'

s Man

ual

Your Operator's Manuals

Digitally - in the vehicleGet to grips with the content of the Digital Operator's Manual in the multimedia system fitted in your vehicle (under the "Vehicle" menu item).

Printed manual - in the vehicleIn addition to the vehicle Operator's Manual, the complete additional operating instructions for your multimedia system are also available from your Mercedes-Benz Service Center.

Digitally - via the InternetYou will find the Operator's Manual on your Mercedes-Benz homepage.

Digitally - as an AppThe Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free in the Apple App Store and on Google Play.

Apple® iOS AndroidTM

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-

tooth SIG Inc.RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-

istered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-

son Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks

of Apple Inc.RBurmester® is a registered trademark of

Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-

tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM Radio Inc.RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-

uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-

tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in successionindicate an instruction with severalsteps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you where you can findmore information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on the nextpage.

Dis‐play

This text indicates a message on themultifunction display/multimedia dis-play.

~ This symbol tells you that you can findfurther information in the Digital Oper-ator's Manual.

As at 08.04.2015

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-cle before driving. For your own safety and alonger vehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this manual. Ignoring themcould result in damage to the vehicle or personalinjury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.This Operator's Manual provides information onthe most important functions of your vehicle.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right tointroduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:RDigital Operator's ManualRPrinted Operator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.Your Operator's Manual:

Digital form inside the vehicleThe Digital Operator's Manual providescomprehensive and specifically adaptedinformation on your vehicle's equipmentand multimedia system. It contains infor-mative animations, individual languagesettings and an intuitive search function.Booklet inside the vehicleIn addition to this manual and the afore-mentioned digital media, you also have theoption to obtain a comprehensive printedversion of the Supplement for your multi-

media system from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Digital form via the InternetTheOperator'sManual on the Internet pro-vides easy access to all informationregarding your vehicle andmultimedia sys-tem. It also provides helpful animations,interesting background information and awide array of search options.Digital form as an AppUsing the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, youcan view all the information on your vehicleandmultimedia system via mobile Internetor download it independently of networkaccess. Available for smartphones or tab-lets.

Apple® iOS

Android™Please note that theMercedes-Benz Guides Appmay not yet be available in your country.The technical documentation team atDaimler AGwishes you safe and pleasantmotor-ing.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2055841505 É2055841505QËÍ

Index ....................................................... 3

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 25

Introduction ......................................... 27

At a glance ........................................... 35

Safety ................................................... 44

Opening and closing ........................... 81

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 104

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 118

Climate control ................................. 129

Driving and parking .......................... 145

On-board computer and displays .... 235

Multimedia system ........................... 298

Stowage and features ...................... 308

Maintenance and care ...................... 330

Breakdown assistance ..................... 342

Wheels and tires ............................... 360

Technical data ................................... 386

2 Contents

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 19812 V socket

see Socket (12 V)360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 339Display in the multimedia system .. 212Function/notes ............................. 210

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 256Function/notes ................................ 68Important safety notes .................... 68Warning lamp ................................. 289

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 61

Activating media modeGeneral notes ................................ 306

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 133Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 248Display message ............................ 276

Active Lane Keeping AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 248Display message ............................ 275Function/information .................... 222

Active Parking AssistCanceling ....................................... 206Detecting parking spaces .............. 203Display message ............................ 276Exiting a parking space .................. 205Function/notes ............................. 202Important safety notes .................. 202Parking .......................................... 204

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 76Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 72

Adaptive Damping SystemFunction/notes ............................. 197

Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 197Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 268Function/notes ............................. 120Switching on/off ........................... 121

Additional speedometer ................... 251Additives (engine oil) ........................ 392Address book

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

Adjusting the volumeMultimedia system ........................ 299

Air bagsDeployment ..................................... 58Display message ............................ 265Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 52Important safety notes .................... 51Introduction ..................................... 51Knee bag .......................................... 53Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 54PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 47Side impact air bag .......................... 53Window curtain air bag .................... 54

Air ventsImportant safety notes .................. 143Rear ............................................... 144Setting ........................................... 143Setting the center air vents ........... 144Setting the side air vents ............... 144

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AIRMATICDisplay message ............................ 274Function/notes ............................. 196

AIRPANELCleaning instructions ..................... 339

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 79Switching off (ATA) .......................... 79Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 79

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Index 3

AMGAdaptive sport suspension sys-tem ................................................ 197Performance Seat .......................... 108

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 252AMG sports exhaust system ............ 152Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Armrest

Stowage compartment .................. 309Ashtray ............................................... 318Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 246Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 247ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 334Driving abroad ............................... 335Hiding a service message .............. 334Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 334Service message ............................ 333Special service requirements ......... 334

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 79Function ........................................... 79Switching off the alarm .................... 79

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 248Display message ............................ 274Function/notes ............................. 214

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 267see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 335Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 151Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 150Automatic headlamp mode .............. 118

Automatic transmissionAccelerator pedal position ............. 158Changing gear ............................... 158DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 156Display message ............................ 282Double-clutch function .................. 158Drive program ................................ 159Drive program display .................... 157Driving tips .................................... 158DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 154Emergency running mode .............. 164Engaging drive position .................. 157Engaging neutral ............................ 156Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 156Engaging reverse gear ................... 156Engaging the park position ............ 156Gliding mode ................................. 159Kickdown ....................................... 159Manual shifting .............................. 161Oil temperature (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 252Overview ........................................ 155Problem (malfunction) ................... 164Pulling away ................................... 149Rocking the vehicle free ................ 159Starting the engine ........................ 148Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 161Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 157Transmission positions .................. 158

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 164

BBack button ....................................... 299Backup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 124Bag hook ............................................ 313BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 68BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist(Brake Assist PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist)

Function/notes ................................ 69Important safety notes .................... 69

Battery (high-voltage)see High-voltage battery

4 Index

Battery (SmartKey)Checking .......................................... 84Important safety notes .................... 84Replacing ......................................... 84

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 350Display message ............................ 269Important safety notes .................. 347Jump starting ................................. 352

Beltsee Seat belts

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 248Display message ............................ 276Notes/function .............................. 216see Active Blind Spot Assist

Bluetooth®Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 306Searching for a mobile phone ........ 306see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298Telephony ...................................... 305

Box (trunk) ......................................... 314Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 261Notes ............................................. 392

Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake pedalPedal resistance/pedal travel .......... 45

BrakesABS .................................................. 68Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72BAS .................................................. 68BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 69Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 392Display message ............................ 256EBD .................................................. 76High-performance brake system .... 183Hill start assist ............................... 150HOLD function ............................... 194Important safety notes .................. 182

Maintenance .................................. 183Parking brake ................................ 178RBS warning lamp .......................... 288Recuperative Brake System ............. 45Riding tips ...................................... 182Warning lamp ................................. 288

BreakdownWhere will I find...? ........................ 342see Flat tiresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 35Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 236

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 28

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Calling up the climate control barMultimedia system ........................ 302

Calling up the climate controlmenu

Multimedia system ........................ 302Car

see VehicleCare

360° camera ................................. 339AIRPANEL ...................................... 339Car wash ........................................ 335Carpets .......................................... 341Display ........................................... 340Exhaust pipe .................................. 340Exterior lights ................................ 338Gear or selector lever .................... 340General notes ................................ 335Interior ........................................... 340Matte finish ................................... 337Paint .............................................. 337Plastic trim .................................... 340Power washer ................................ 336Rear view camera .......................... 339Roof lining ...................................... 341Seat belt ........................................ 341Seat cover ..................................... 341Sensors ......................................... 339

Index 5

Steering wheel ............................... 340Trim pieces .................................... 340Washing by hand ........................... 336Wheels ........................................... 338Windows ........................................ 338Wiper blades .................................. 338Wooden trim .................................. 340

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 313CD


CD player (on-board computer) ........ 244Center console

Lower section ............................ 40, 41Upper section .................................. 39

Central lockingLocking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 81

Changing bulbsHigh-beam headlamps ................... 124Low-beam headlamps .................... 123Opening and closing the side trimpanels ............................................ 124Reversing lamps ............................ 124Turn signals (front) ......................... 124Turn signals (rear) .......................... 124

Changing the media source ............. 243Charge-air pressure (on-boardcomputer, Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) .................................................... 252Charging

see Charging the high-voltage bat-tery (important safety notes)

Charging cableConnecting .................................... 173Controls ......................................... 171Important safety notes .................. 171Indicator lamp ................................ 172Removing ....................................... 173Storing ........................................... 171Warming up ................................... 170

Charging the high-voltage battery(important safety notes) ................... 168Child

Restraint system .............................. 63Child seat

Forward-facing restraint system ...... 66

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 64On the front-passenger seat ............ 65Rearward-facing restraint system .... 65Top Tether ....................................... 64

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 66Rear doors ....................................... 67

ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 62

Cigarette lighter ................................ 319Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 339Climate control

3-zone automatic control panel ..... 131Control panel for automatic cli-mate control (1 zone) .................... 130Control panel for dual-zone auto-matic climate control ..................... 130Controlling automatically ............... 133Cooling with air dehumidification .. 133Cooling with air dehumidification(multimedia system) ...................... 303Defrosting the windows ................. 136Defrosting the windshield .............. 135ECO start/stop function (3-zoneautomatic climate control) ............. 132General notes ................................ 129Immediate pre-entry climate con-trol ................................................. 143Indicator lamp ................................ 133Ionization ....................................... 140Ionization (multimedia system) ...... 303Notes on using the automatic cli-mate control .................................. 132Overview ........................................ 302Overview of systems ...................... 129Perfume atomizer .......................... 138Perfume atomizer (multimediasystem) .......................................... 303Pre-entry climate control (via key)(multimedia system) ...................... 303Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time ............................... 142Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time (multimedia sys-tem) ............................................... 303Pre-entry climate control via key ... 141

6 Index

Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 137Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 133Rear control panel ......................... 131Refrigerant ..................................... 393Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 394Setting the air distribution ............. 134Setting the air vents ...................... 143Setting the airflow ......................... 135Setting the climate mode ............... 134Setting the climate mode (multi-media system) ............................... 303Setting the temperature ................ 134Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 137Switching on/off ........................... 132Switching residual heat on/off ...... 137Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 136Switching the synchronizationfunction on and off ........................ 135Synchronization function (multi-media system) ............................... 304

Climate control settingsMultimedia system ........................ 302

Climate control systemClimate control (3-zone automaticclimate control) ............................. 132

CockpitOverview .......................................... 35

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 247Display message ............................ 261Operation/notes .............................. 70

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 340

Combination switch .......................... 119Connecting a USB device


Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 240Controller ........................................... 299Convenience box ............................... 314Convenience closing feature .............. 96

Convenience opening feature ............ 96Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 333Display message ............................ 268Displaying the temperature (on-board computer) ............................ 246Filling capacity ............................... 393Important safety notes .................. 392Temperature display in the instru-ment cluster .................................. 236Warning lamp ................................. 293

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 34Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 267Function/notes ............................. 120

Crosswind Assist ................................. 76Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 185Deactivating ................................... 186Display message ............................ 279Driving system ............................... 185Function/notes ............................. 185General notes ................................ 185Important safety notes .................. 185Setting a speed .............................. 186Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 185Storing the current speed or call-ing up the last stored speed .......... 186

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 316Important safety notes .................. 316Rear compartment ......................... 317

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 32Customer Relations Department ....... 32

DData

see Technical dataData carrier

Selecting ........................................ 244Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 267Function/notes ............................. 118

Index 7

Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 250

Declarations of conformity ................. 31Diagnostics connection ...................... 31Digital Operator's Manual

Help ................................................. 25Introduction ..................................... 25

Digital speedometer ......................... 241DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 156Display

see Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Display messageHybrid drive system ....................... 272

Display messagesASSYST PLUS ................................ 333Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 255Driving systems ............................. 274Engine ............................................ 268General notes ................................ 255Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 255Introduction ................................... 255Lights ............................................. 267Safety systems .............................. 256SmartKey ....................................... 285Tires ............................................... 280Vehicle ........................................... 282

Distance recorder ............................. 239Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 295Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 71DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 188Activation conditions ..................... 188Cruise control lever ....................... 188Deactivating ................................... 191Display message ............................ 277Displays in the instrument cluster .. 191Driving tips .................................... 192Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 189Function/notes ............................. 186Important safety notes .................. 187Setting a speed .............................. 190Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 190Stopping ........................................ 189

with Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilot ............................................... 192

DoorsAutomatic locking (switch) ............... 89Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 81Control panel ................................... 43Display message ............................ 284Emergency locking ........................... 89Emergency unlocking ....................... 89Important safety notes .................... 87Opening (from inside) ...................... 88

Drinking and driving ......................... 180Drive program

Automatic transmission ................. 159SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 253

Drive programsDisplay (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 157

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 335

Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 219Driving on flooded roads .................. 184Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 68ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 76Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 68BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 69COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 70Distance warning function ............... 71EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 76ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 73Important safety information ........... 68Overview .......................................... 67PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 77Recuperative Brake System ............. 45STEER CONTROL ............................. 78

Driving systemRACE START (Mercedes-AMGvehicles) ........................................ 195

8 Index

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 210Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 219Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 222Active Parking Assist ..................... 202AIRMATIC ...................................... 196AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 197ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 214Blind Spot Assist ............................ 216Cruise control ................................ 185Display message ............................ 274DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 186DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 192Driving Assistance Plus package ... 219HOLD function ............................... 194Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 218Lane Tracking package .................. 216PARKTRONIC ................................. 199Rear view camera .......................... 206Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 215

Driving tipsAMG ceramic brakes ..................... 183Automatic transmission ................. 158Brakes ........................................... 182Break-in period .............................. 145DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 192Downhill gradient ........................... 182Drinking and driving ....................... 180Driving in winter ............................. 184Driving on flooded roads ................ 184Driving on wet roads ...................... 184Exhaust check ............................... 180Fuel ................................................ 180General .......................................... 179Hydroplaning ................................. 184Icy road surfaces ........................... 184Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 182Snow chains .................................. 363Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 182The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 145Wet road surface ........................... 182

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 244see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

DYNAMIC SELECT switchAutomatic transmission ................. 154Climate control (dual-zone auto-matic climate control) .................... 132PLUG-IN HYBRID operation ............ 229

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ............................. 112EASY-EXIT feature

Function/notes ............................. 112EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 314EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 258Function/notes ................................ 76

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 180On-board computer ....................... 240

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 151Automatic engine switch-off .......... 150Deactivating/activating ................. 151General information ....................... 150Important safety notes .................. 150Introduction ................................... 150

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 61

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 89Trunk ............................................... 94Vehicle ............................................. 89

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 58

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 28

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 293Display message ............................ 268ECO start/stop function ................ 150Engine number ............................... 388Irregular running ............................ 153Jump-starting ................................. 352Starting (important safety notes) ... 148

Index 9

Starting problems .......................... 153Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 148Starting via smartphone ................ 149Starting with the Start/Stop but-ton ................................................. 148Switching off .................................. 177Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 357

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 153

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 332Additives ........................................ 392Checking the oil level ..................... 331Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 332Display message ............................ 270Filling capacity ............................... 391General notes ................................ 391Notes about oil grades ................... 391Notes on oil level/consumption .... 331Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 252

Entering an addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 253Characteristics ................................. 73Crosswind Assist ............................. 76Deactivating/activating (buttonin Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 74Deactivating/activating (exceptMercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 74Deactivating/activating (on-board computer, exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 247Display message ............................ 256Function/notes ................................ 73General notes .................................. 73Important safety information ........... 73Trailer stabilization ........................... 76Warning lamp ................................. 290

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 73Exhaust

see Exhaust pipe

Exhaust check ................................... 180Exhaust pipe

Cleaning ......................................... 340Exhaustive discharging (high-volt-age battery) ....................................... 349Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 338see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 113Dipping (automatic) ....................... 114Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 114Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 114Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 114Setting ........................................... 114Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 116Storing the parking position .......... 115

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 309

FFavorites

Overview ........................................ 301Features ............................................. 316Filler cap

see RefuelingFlat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting thespare wheel ................................... 379MOExtended tires .......................... 343Preparing the vehicle ..................... 343TIREFIT kit ...................................... 344

Floormats ........................................... 329Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 386Two-way radio ................................ 386

FuelAdditives ........................................ 390Consumption statistics .................. 240Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 240Displaying the range ...................... 240Driving tips .................................... 180Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 390Fuel gauge ....................................... 36Grade (gasoline) ............................ 389Important safety notes .................. 389

10 Index

Problem (malfunction) ................... 168Refueling ........................................ 164Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 389

Fuel filler flapOpening ......................................... 165

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 240

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 389Problem (malfunction) ................... 168

FusesAllocation chart ..................... 357, 359Before changing ............................. 357Dashboard fuse box ....................... 357Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 358Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 358Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 359Important safety notes .................. 357

GG-Meter (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 252Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 329General notes ................................ 326Important safety notes .................. 327Opening/closing the garage door .. 329Problems when programming ........ 328Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 327Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 328

Gear indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 252Genuine parts ...................................... 27Glove box ........................................... 309Google™ Local Search


HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 92

Handwriting recognitionSwitching text reader functionon/off ............................................ 301Touchpad ....................................... 300

Hazard warning lamps ...................... 120Head restraints

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 107Adjusting (manually) ...................... 107Adjusting (rear) .............................. 107Adjusting the fore-and-aft posi-tion manually ................................. 107General notes ................................ 106Important safety notes .................. 106Installing/removing (rear) .............. 107

Head-up displayAdjusting the brightness ................ 250Displays and operating .................. 238Function/notes ............................. 238Important safety notes .................. 238Selecting displays .......................... 249Setting the position ....................... 250Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 116

HeadlampsCleaning system (notes) ................ 393Fogging up ..................................... 121see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 119High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 120Changing bulbs .............................. 124Display message ............................ 267Switching on/off ........................... 119

High-voltage batteryBattery care ................................... 170Charging (charging station) ............ 174Charging (mains socket) ................ 171Charging (wallbox) ......................... 173Charging cable warming ................ 170Cruise range .................................. 170Energy consumption ...................... 170General notes .................................. 45Method of operation ...................... 169Outside temperatures .................... 170Overvoltage protection .................. 170

Index 11

Problems with the charging proc-ess ................................................. 175Terms of use .................................. 170Vehicle fire ....................................... 45

Hill start assist .................................. 150HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 195Activation conditions ..................... 194Deactivating ................................... 195Display message ............................ 277Function/notes ............................. 194General notes ................................ 194

Home addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

HoodClosing ........................................... 331Display message ............................ 284Important safety notes .................. 330Opening ......................................... 330

Horn ...................................................... 35HUD

see Head-up displayHybrid drive system

Automatic switch off ........................ 44Danger of electric shock .................. 44Display message ............................ 272General notes .................................. 44High-voltage battery ........................ 45Important safety notes .................... 44Manual switch off ............................ 44Opening the hood ............................ 45Warning lamp ................................. 288

Hybrid vehiclesImportant safety notes .................... 44

Hydroplaning ..................................... 184

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 79Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS .............................................. 295

Indicator lampssee Warning and indicator lamps

Indicatorssee Turn signals

Insect protection on the radiator .... 331Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 36Warning and indicator lamps ........... 36

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 235Interior lighting ................................. 121

Control ........................................... 122Overview ........................................ 121Reading lamp ................................. 121

iPod®see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

JJack

Using ............................................. 381Jump starting (engine) ...................... 352

KKey positions

SmartKey ....................................... 146Start/Stop button .......................... 146

KEYLESS-GOConvenience closing feature ............ 97Deactivation ..................................... 82Locking ............................................ 82Removing the Start/Stop button ... 147Start function ................................... 83Unlocking ......................................... 82

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 159Manual gearshifting ....................... 163

Knee bag .............................................. 53

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 219Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 248Display message ............................ 275Function/information .................... 218see Active Lane Keeping Assist

12 Index

Lane Tracking package ..................... 216Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 253LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 64License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 267Light function, active

Display message ............................ 267Light sensor (display message) ....... 267Lights

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 120Automatic headlamp mode ............ 118Cornering light function ................. 120Fogged up headlamps .................... 121General notes ................................ 118Hazard warning lamps ................... 120High beam flasher .......................... 119High-beam headlamps ................... 119Light switch ................................... 118Low-beam headlamps .................... 119Parking lamps ................................ 119Rear fog lamp ................................ 119Setting exterior lighting ................. 118Standing lamps .............................. 119Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 250Turn signals ................................... 119see Interior lighting

Loading guidelines ............................ 308Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 89Emergency locking ........................... 89From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 88

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Low-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 123Display message ............................ 267Switching on/off ........................... 119

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 108

MM+S tires ............................................ 362Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 337Maximum charge current

Setting (charging cable) ................. 172Setting (on-board computer) .......... 248

mbraceCall priority .................................... 323Display message ............................ 261Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 323Downloading routes ....................... 326Emergency call .............................. 320General notes ................................ 320Geo fencing ................................... 326Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 325MB info call button ........................ 322Remote fault diagnosis .................. 325Remote vehicle locking .................. 324Roadside Assistance button .......... 321Search & Send ............................... 323Self-test ......................................... 320Speed alert .................................... 326System .......................................... 320Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 326Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 324

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 83General notes .................................. 83Inserting .......................................... 83Locking vehicle ................................ 89Removing ......................................... 83Unlocking the driver's door .............. 89

Memory card (audio) ......................... 244Memory function

Seats, steering wheel, exteriormirrors ........................................... 116

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive360°camera .................................. 210Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 219Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 222Active Parking Assist ..................... 202ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 214Blind Spot Assist ............................ 216

Index 13

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 186DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 192General notes ................................ 185Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 218PARKTRONIC ................................. 199PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 60PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 61Rear view camera .......................... 206Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 215

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 255Messages

see Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Mirror turn signalCleaning ......................................... 339

Mirrorssee Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneConnecting (Bluetooth® inter-face) .............................................. 305Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 306Frequencies ................................... 386Installation ..................................... 386Menu (on-board computer) ............ 245Transmission output (maximum) .... 386

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 83MOExtended tires .............................. 343Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 384Mounting a new wheel ................... 383Preparing the vehicle ..................... 380Raising the vehicle ......................... 381Removing a wheel .......................... 383Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 380

MP3Operation ....................................... 244see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 237Permanent display ......................... 251

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 236Overview .......................................... 38

Multimedia systemSwitching on and off ...................... 299

Music filessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 241see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 145

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 54Faults ............................................... 58Operation ......................................... 54System self-test ............................... 56

Occupant safetyAir bags ........................................... 51Automaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 61Children in the vehicle ..................... 62Important safety notes .................... 46Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 46Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 54PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 47Pets in the vehicle ........................... 67PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 60PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 61Restraint system warning lamp ........ 46Seat belt .......................................... 48

14 Index

OCSConditions ....................................... 54Faults ............................................... 58Operation ......................................... 54System self-test ............................... 56

Odometer ........................................... 239Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 252Assistance graphic menu ............... 246Assistance menu ........................... 247Display messages .......................... 255Displaying a service message ........ 334DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 191Factory settings ............................. 252G-Meter ......................................... 252Head-up display ............................. 238HYBRID menu ................................ 248Important safety notes .................. 235Instrument cluster menu ............... 251Lights menu ................................... 250Media menu ................................... 243Menu overview .............................. 239Message memory .......................... 255Navigation menu ............................ 241Operation ....................................... 236RACETIMER ................................... 253Radio menu ................................... 243Service menu ................................. 246Settings menu ............................... 247Standard display ............................ 239Telephone menu ............................ 245Trip menu ...................................... 239Video DVD operation ..................... 244

Online access to the vehicleData protection .............................. 176Functions ....................................... 176General information ....................... 176Internet .......................................... 176

Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 124Opening the fuel filler flap

(PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) ............ 166Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 31Important safety notes .................... 30

Operating systemsee On-board computer

OperationDigital Operator's Manual ................ 25

Operator's ManualOverview .......................................... 28Vehicle equipment ........................... 28

Outside temperature display ........... 236Overhead control panel ...................... 42Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 67

PPaddle shifters

see Steering wheel paddle shiftersPaint code number ............................ 387Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 337Panic alarm .......................................... 46Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Important safety notes .................... 98Operating ....................................... 100Operating the roller sunblinds forthe sliding sunroof ......................... 101Problem (malfunction) ................... 103Rain closing feature ....................... 101Reversing feature ............................. 99

Parking ............................................... 177Important safety notes .................. 177Parking brake ................................ 178Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 115Rear view camera .......................... 206Switching off the engine ................ 177see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidsee 360° camerasee Active Parking Assistsee Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONICsee Rear view camera

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 258Electric parking brake .................... 178Warning lamp ................................. 292

Index 15

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 119

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 201Driving system ............................... 199Function/notes ............................. 199Important safety notes .................. 199Problem (malfunction) ................... 202Range of the sensors ..................... 199Warning display ............................. 200

PASSENGER AIR BAGDisplay message ............................ 265Indicator lamps ................................ 47Problems (malfunction) .................. 265

Perfume atomizerOperating ....................................... 138Problem (malfunction) ................... 140Setting the perfume intensity(multimedia system) ...................... 303Vial ................................................ 138

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 67Phone book


Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 340PLUG-IN HYBRID operating

Electrical energy generated ........... 228PLUG-IN HYBRID operation

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) ....................... 232Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) ....................... 231Charge level of the high-voltagebattery ........................................... 227Displaying the total range andelectric range ................................. 228Driving tips .................................... 230DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 229ECO start/stop function ................ 231Electric motor (power display) ....... 225Electrical energy generated(Audio 20) ...................................... 228Electrical energy generated(COMAND) ..................................... 228Energy flow display ........................ 227Fuel consumption .......................... 228Fuel consumption (Audio 20) ......... 228

Fuel consumption (COMAND) ........ 228General notes ................................ 224Haptic accelerator pedal ................ 230High-voltage battery (condition ofcharge) .......................................... 227HYBRID menu ................................ 248Important safety notes .................. 225Instrument cluster (power dis-play) ............................................... 225Noiseless start ............................... 228Operating (on-board computer) ..... 227Operating mode ............................. 226Overrun mode ................................ 232Parking .......................................... 232Power display (electric motor) ....... 225Problems with SRS (supplementalrestraint system) ............................ 234Problems with the combustionengine ............................................ 233Problems with the hybrid drivesystem ........................................... 234Problems with the RecuperativeBrake System ................................ 233Pulling away ................................... 228READY display ............................... 228Recuperative Brake System ........... 225Resetting the values (Audio 20) ..... 228Resetting the values (COMAND) .... 228Route-based operating strategy ..... 232Shifting manually ........................... 229Starting .......................................... 228When the vehicle is stationary ....... 230

Power washers .................................. 336Power windows

see Side windowsPre-entry climate control (viaSmartKey)

Problems (malfunctions) ................ 142Pre-entry climate control at depar-ture time

General notes ................................ 142Pre-entry climate control at time ofdeparture

Setting departure time ................... 143Pre-entry climate control via key

General notes ................................ 141

16 Index

Pre-entry climate control viaSmartKey

Activating/deactivating ................. 141PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 262Operation ......................................... 60

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 247Display message ............................ 262Function/notes ................................ 77Important safety notes .................... 77Warning lamp ................................. 295

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS)

Operation ......................................... 61Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 79Immobilizer ...................................... 79

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 27

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 149General notes ................................ 149Hill start assist ............................... 150

QQR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 32

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31Quick access for audio and tele-phone

Changing the station/musictrack .............................................. 301

RRACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) .................................................... 195RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 253Radiator cover ................................... 331Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 243Radio mode


Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 31Rain closing feature (panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel) .. 101RBS (Recuperative Brake System)

Warning lamp ................................. 288Reading lamp ..................................... 121Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 144Setting the airflow ......................... 135Setting the temperature ................ 134

Rear fog lampDisplay message ............................ 267Switching on/off ........................... 119

Rear lampssee Lights

Rear seat (folding the backrest for-wards/back) ...................................... 311Rear seats

Display message ............................ 284Folding the backrest forwards/back ............................................... 311

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 339Display in the multimedia system .. 207Function/notes ............................. 206Switching on/off ........................... 207

Rear window blind ............................ 318Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 137Switching on/off ........................... 136

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 113Dipping (automatic) ....................... 114

Recuperative Brake SystemDriving safety systems ..................... 45Important safety notes .................... 45

Reflective safety jacket .................... 342Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 393Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 36Important safety notes .................. 164Refueling process .......................... 165

Index 17

Refueling process (PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles) ........................... 165see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 326Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 327

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 122Overview of bulb types .................. 123Removing/replacing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 123

Reporting safety defects .................... 32Rescue card ......................................... 32Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 271Warning lamp ................................. 293

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 137Restraint system

Display message ............................ 263Introduction ..................................... 46Warning lamp ................................. 292Warning lamp (function) ................... 46

Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof ................ 99Roller sunblinds ............................. 101Side windows ................................... 95Sliding sunroof ................................. 99Trunk lid ........................................... 90

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 267Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 29Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel .................................. 101Rear side windows ......................... 317Rear window .................................. 318

Roof carrier ........................................ 315Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 341Roof load (maximum) ........................ 394Route guidance


SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 62Hybrid drive system ......................... 44see Occupant safetysee Operating safety

Safety notesHybrid vehicles ................................ 44

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SD memory cardEjecting .......................................... 307Inserting ........................................ 307Inserting/removing ........................ 307see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298Selecting ........................................ 244

Search & Sendsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 51Adjusting the height ......................... 50center rear-compartment seat ......... 50Cleaning ......................................... 341Correct usage .................................. 49Fastening ......................................... 50Important safety guidelines ............. 48Introduction ..................................... 48Releasing ......................................... 50Warning lamp ................................. 287Warning lamp (function) ................... 51

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ................... 106Adjusting (Performance Seat) ........ 108Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 108Adjusting the head restraint .......... 106Calling up a stored setting (mem-ory function) .................................. 117Cleaning the cover ......................... 341Correct driver's seat position ........ 104Important safety notes .................. 104Seat heating .................................. 108Seat heating problem .................... 110

18 Index

Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 116Switching seat heating on/off ....... 108Switching seat ventilation on/off .................................................. 109

Securing a loadsee Securing cargo

Securing cargo .................................. 313Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 340see Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 339Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 246Service message

see ASSYST PLUSService products

Brake fluid ..................................... 392Coolant (engine) ............................ 392Engine oil ....................................... 391Fuel ................................................ 388Important safety notes .................. 388Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 393Washer fluid ................................... 393

Setting the charge current (on-board computer) ............................... 248Setting the date/time format


Setting the departure time (on-board computer) ............................... 249Setting the language


Setting the timesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 252On-board computer ....................... 247

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 253Side impact air bag ............................. 53Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 267Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 338

Convenience closing feature ............ 96Convenience opening feature .......... 96Important safety information ........... 94Opening/closing .............................. 95Problem (malfunction) ..................... 98Resetting ......................................... 97Reversing feature ............................. 95

SIRIUS servicessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

Ski and snowboard bag .................... 310Sliding sunroof

Opening/closing .............................. 99Resetting ....................................... 100see Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 84Changing the programming ............. 83Checking the battery ....................... 84Convenience closing feature ............ 96Convenience opening feature .......... 96Display message ............................ 285Door central locking/unlocking ....... 81Important safety notes .................... 81KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 83Loss ................................................. 86Mechanical key ................................ 83Overview .......................................... 81Positions (ignition lock) ................. 146Problem (malfunction) ..................... 86Starting the engine ........................ 148

SmartphoneStarting the engine ........................ 149

SMSsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

Snow chains ...................................... 363Socket (12 V)

Center console .............................. 319General notes ................................ 319Rear compartment ......................... 319

SoundSwitching on/off ........................... 299

Special seat belt retractor .................. 62Specialist workshop ............................ 31Speed, controlling

see Cruise control

Index 19

SpeedometerActivating/deactivating the addi-tional speedometer ........................ 251Digital ............................................ 241In the Instrument cluster ................. 36Segments ...................................... 235Selecting the display unit ............... 251

SPORT handling modeDeactivating/activating(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 74Warning lamp ................................. 292

Sports exhaust systemsee AMG sports exhaust system

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 267Switching on/off ........................... 119

Start/Stop buttonStarting the engine ........................ 148

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 148STEER CONTROL .................................. 78Steering

Display message ............................ 285Warning lamps ............................... 297

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(DISTRONIC PLUS)

Display message ............................ 279Steering assistant STEER CON-TROL

see STEER CONTROLSteering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 111Adjusting (manually) ...................... 110Button overview ............................... 38Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 236Cleaning ......................................... 340EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 112Important safety notes .................. 110Steering wheel heating .................. 111Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 116

Steering wheel heatingProblem (malfunction) ................... 112Switching on/off ........................... 111

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 161Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 253

Stowage areas ................................... 308Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 309Center console .............................. 309Cup holders ................................... 316Door ............................................... 310Eyeglasses compartment ............... 309Glove box ....................................... 309Important safety information ......... 308Map pockets .................................. 310Rear ............................................... 310Stowage net ................................... 310see Stowage areas

Stowage net ....................................... 310Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 315Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 362Sun visor ............................................ 317Suspension setting

AIRMATIC ...................................... 197AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 197

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 137Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 307

TTachometer ........................................ 236Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 267see Lights

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 36

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 388Information .................................... 386Tires/wheels ................................. 384Vehicle data ................................... 394

TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 245Authorizing a mobile phone (con-necting) ......................................... 306Connecting a mobile phone (gen-eral information) ............................ 305

20 Index

Display message ............................ 285Introduction ................................... 245Menu (on-board computer) ............ 245Number from the phone book ........ 245Redialing ........................................ 246Rejecting/ending a call ................. 245see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298Switching between mobilephones ........................................... 306

TemperatureCoolant (display in the instrumentcluster) .......................................... 236Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 246Engine oil (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 252Outside temperature ...................... 236Setting (climate control) ................ 134Transmission oil (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 252

Through-loading feature ................... 311Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 253Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 367Checking manually ........................ 366Display message ............................ 280Maximum ....................................... 366Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 346Notes ............................................. 365Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 346Recommended ............................... 363

Tire pressure loss warning systemGeneral notes ................................ 366Important safety notes .................. 366Restarting ...................................... 367

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 369Function/notes ............................. 367General notes ................................ 367Important safety notes .................. 368Restarting ...................................... 369Warning lamp ................................. 296Warning message .......................... 369

TIREFIT kit .......................................... 344Storage location ............................ 343Tire pressure not reached .............. 346Tire pressure reached .................... 346

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 379Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 377Bar (definition) ............................... 377Changing a wheel .......................... 379Characteristics .............................. 377Checking ........................................ 361Curb weight (definition) ................. 378Definition of terms ......................... 377Direction of rotation ...................... 380Display message ............................ 280Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 379DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 377DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 377GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 378GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 378GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 378Important safety notes .................. 360Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 378Information on driving .................... 360Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 378Labeling (overview) ........................ 374Load bearing index (definition) ...... 379Load index ..................................... 376Load index (definition) ................... 378Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 378Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 378Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 378Maximum tire load ......................... 376Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 378MOExtended tires .......................... 362Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 379PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 379Replacing ....................................... 379Service life ..................................... 361

Index 21

Sidewall (definition) ....................... 379Snow chains .................................. 363Speed rating (definition) ................ 378Storing ........................................... 380Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 377Summer tires in winter .................. 362Temperature .................................. 374TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 379Tire bead (definition) ...................... 379Tire pressure (definition) ................ 379Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 378Tire size (data) ............................... 384Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 374Tire tread ....................................... 361Tire tread (definition) ..................... 379Total load limit (definition) ............. 379Traction ......................................... 373Traction (definition) ....................... 379Tread wear ..................................... 373Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 373Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 378Wear indicator (definition) ............. 379Wheel and tire combination ........... 384Wheel rim (definition) .................... 378see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 64Touchpad

Changing the station/musictrack .............................................. 301Character suggestions ................... 300Deleting characters ....................... 300Entering a space ............................ 300Entering characters ....................... 300Gesture control .............................. 300Handwriting recognition ................ 300Operating the touchpad ................. 300Overview ........................................ 300Quick access for Audio .................. 301Switching ....................................... 300Switching input line ....................... 300

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 357Important safety notes .................. 354

Towing a trailerESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 76

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 354Installing the towing eye ................ 355Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 356Removing the towing eye ............... 355Transporting the vehicle ................ 356With both axles on the ground ....... 356With the rear axle raised ................ 355

Towing eye ......................................... 343Traffic reports


Traffic Sign AssistDisplay message ............................ 277Function/notes ............................. 215Important safety notes .................. 215Instrument cluster display ............. 216

Transfer case ..................................... 164Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransmission position display ......... 157Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 157Transporting the vehicle .................. 356Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 340Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 240Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 239Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 241

TrunkImportant safety notes .................... 89Locking separately ........................... 94Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ...................................... 93Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................... 91Opening/closing (from outside,HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 92Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ............................................ 90

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 283

22 Index

Obstacle recognition ........................ 90Opening dimensions ...................... 394Opening/closing .............................. 89

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 394Turn signals

Changing bulbs (front) ................... 124Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 124Display message ............................ 267Switching on/off ........................... 119

Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 386Installation ..................................... 386Transmission output (maximum) .... 386

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 89From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 88

USB devicesConnecting to the Media Inter-face ............................................... 307

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 317Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 32Data acquisition ............................... 32Display message ............................ 282Equipment ....................................... 28Individual settings .......................... 247Limited Warranty ............................. 32Loading .......................................... 370Locking (in an emergency) ............... 89Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 81Lowering ........................................ 384Maintenance .................................... 29Operating safety .............................. 30Parking .......................................... 177Parking for a long period ................ 179Pulling away ................................... 149Raising ........................................... 381Reporting problems ......................... 32Securing from rolling away ............ 380Towing away .................................. 354

Transporting .................................. 356Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 89Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 81Vehicle data ................................... 394

Vehicle dataRoof load (maximum) ..................... 394Trunk load (maximum) ................... 394

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 394Vehicle emergency locking ................ 89Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 387Vehicle level

AIRMATIC ...................................... 197Display message ............................ 275

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 343Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 244see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 298

VINSeat ............................................... 388Type plate ...................................... 387

Voice Control Systemsee Separate operating instructions

WWarning

Stickers ........................................... 44Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 289Brakes ........................................... 288Check Engine ................................. 293Coolant .......................................... 293Distance warning ........................... 295ESP® .............................................. 290ESP® OFF ....................................... 291Fuel tank ........................................ 293General notes ................................ 286Hybrid drive system ....................... 288Overview .......................................... 36Parking brake ................................ 292PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 47RBS (Recuperative Brake Sys-tem) ............................................... 288Reserve fuel ................................... 293Restraint system ............................ 292

Index 23

Seat belt ........................................ 287SPORT handling mode ................... 292Steering ......................................... 297Tire pressure monitor .................... 296

Warranty .............................................. 28Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 285Wheel and tire combinations

Tires ............................................... 384Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 384Wheel chock ...................................... 380Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 379Checking ........................................ 361Cleaning ......................................... 338Important safety notes .................. 360Information on driving .................... 360Interchanging/changing ................ 379Mounting a new wheel ................... 383Mounting a wheel .......................... 380Removing a wheel .......................... 383Snow chains .................................. 363Storing ........................................... 380Tightening torque ........................... 384Wheel size/tire size ....................... 384

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 264Operation ......................................... 54

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 135

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 333Important safety notes .................. 393

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 128Replacing the wiper blades ............ 126Switching on/off ........................... 125

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 362Slippery road surfaces ................... 184Snow chains .................................. 363

Winter operationRadiator cover ............................... 331Summer tires ................................. 362

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 362

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 338Important safety notes .................. 126Replacing ....................................... 126Replacing (windshield) ................... 126

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 340Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

24 Index

Introduction

The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-mation about the safe operation of your vehicle.The Digital Operator's Manual additionallydescribes further functions and equipmentinstalled in your vehicle. The functions of thevehicle and multimedia system are described inthe Digital Operator's Manual. You can call uptheDigital Operator'sManual via themultimediasystem.

i You will not incur any costs when calling upthe Digital Operator's Manual. The DigitalOperator's Manual works without connectingto the Internet.

There are three ways to access the topics of theDigital Operator's Manual:RVisual searchThe visual search allows you to explore yourvehicle "virtually". Starting from either thevehicle exterior view or interior view, you canaccess many of the different topics coveredby the Digital Operator's Manual. To accessthe vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-cle interior" view.RKeyword searchThe keyword search allows you to search for akeyword by entering characters. Furtherinformation can be found in the Digital Oper-ator's Manual in the "Audio 20" or "COMAND"section under the "Character entry (teleph-ony)" keyword.RContentsYou can select individual sections in the con-tents.

i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-ted for safety reasons while driving.

Operation

Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-ualX Press theØ button in the center console.The overview relating to the vehicle appears.

X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item byturning3 or pressing7 the controller.

X Confirm7 the message about the warningand safety notes.The basic menu for the Digital Operator'sManual appears.

Operating the Digital Operator's Man-ual

General notesPlease observe the information about the oper-ation of the controller (Y page 299).

Content pagesThe content pages can be accessed bymeans ofa visual search, a keyword search or using thecontents.

X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn3the controller.

X To display in full-screen or animation: slide8 the controller to the left:.

X To select information texts or save book-marks: slide9 the controller to theright;.

X To select a link: slide6 the controllerdownwards=.

X To exit a content page: select the%symbol?.

Digital Operator's Manual 25

X To call up the basic menu of the DigitalOperator's Manual: selectÞ symbolA.

X To switch functions to the multimediasystem using the buttons on the centerconsole: press the$,%,Õ orØbutton.The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-ator's Manual remains open in the back-ground.

26 Digital Operator's Manual

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

H Environmental noteHave a defective high-voltage battery dis-posed of in an environmentally-responsiblemanner. Contact a qualified specialist work-shop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor this purpose.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions require youto dispose of materials, first try to regenerate orre-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-tal rules and regulations when disposing ofmaterials. In this way you will help to protect theenvironment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter console

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 27

Introductio

n

Z

Do not install accessories such as audio sys-tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairsor welding. You could impair the operatingefficiency of the restraint systems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels aswell as accessories relevant to safety whichhave not been approved byMercedes-Benz. Thiscould lead to malfunctions in safety-relevantsystems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories thathave been specifically approved for your vehi-cle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintaina supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. In addition,strategically located parts delivery centers pro-vide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benzparts (Y page 387).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmenti ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.

Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-let are important documents and should be keptin the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe implied warranty for your vehicle applies inaccordance with the warranty terms and condi-tions in the Service and Warranty Informationbooklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordance with the following warranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Islandand Vermont Emission Control System War-rantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessorieswarranties. These are available at any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a reason-able number of repair attempts Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or servicefacilities fail to fix one or more substantialdefects or malfunctions in the vehicle that arecovered by its express warranty.

28 Service and vehicle operationIntroductio

n

During the period of 18 months from originaldelivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on theodometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or moreof the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction

results in a condition that is likely to causedeath or serious bodily injury if the vehicle isdriven, that defect or malfunction has beensubject to repair two ormore times, and youhave directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,LLC in writing of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunctionof a less serious nature than category (1)has been subject to repair four or moretimes and you have directly notifiedMercedes-Benz in writing of the need for itsrepair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describes allthe necessary maintenance work which shouldbe done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Bookletwith you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The serviceadvisor will record every service for you in theService and Warranty Booklet.

Breakdown assistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram offers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)

For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Programbrochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"section in the Service and Warranty booklet(Canada). You will find both in your vehicle lit-erature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, please sendus the "Notification of Address Change" in theService andGuarantee booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-ing you in a timelymanner should the need arise.If you sell yourMercedes, please leave the entireliterature in the vehicle so that it is available tothe next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please send usthe "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in theService andGuarantee booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconverter may not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic converter.Rthe fuelmay have a considerably lower octanerating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine dam-age.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available fordelivery in Europe through our European Deliv-ery Program. For details, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or write to one of thefollowing addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery Department

Service and vehicle operation 29

Introductio

n

Z

One Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-

tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriage orparts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the undercar-riage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the strain they are designedto.If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody paneling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaustsystem, they can catch fire.In such situations, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engine andan electric motor. The voltage supply for oper-ating the vehicle electrically is provided by thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system.

G DANGERThe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident and

30 Operating safetyIntroductio

n

the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

The components of the vehicle's high-voltageelectrical system are marked with yellow warn-ing stickers. The cables of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system are orange in color.Vehicles with an electric motor generate muchless driving noise than vehicles with internalcombustion engines. As a result, your vehiclemay not be heard by other road users in certainsituations. This can happen, for example, whenyou are parking and your vehicle is not seen byother road users. This requires you to adopt aparticularly anticipatory driving style, as it isnecessary to allow for the possibility that otherroad users may behave erratically.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the two following two conditions: 1)These devices may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and 2) These devices must accept anyinterference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation. Changesor modifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) These devices maynot cause interference, and (2) These devicesmust accept any interference, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intended forthe connection of diagnostic equipment at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect the

operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equipmenton the diagnostics connection is used, thestarter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-mation being reset, for example. This may leadto the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements ofthe next emissions test during the main inspec-tion.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-fied specialist workshop. It has the necessaryspecialist knowledge, tools and qualifications tocorrectly carry out the work required on yourvehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-evant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.Always have the following work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic componentsRwork on the hybrid drive system

Operating safety 31

Introductio

n

Z

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when drivingyour vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe vehicle technical dataRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotorvehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-isfaction, please discuss the problem again witha Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one ofthe following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed-eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Act of1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-istrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual aboutthe proper operation of your vehicle as well asabout possible vehicle damage. Damage toyour vehicle that arises from culpable contra-ventions against these instructions is not cov-ered either by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-ranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-cue card for your vehicle. The current rescuecard contains the most important informationabout your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. therouting of the electric cables.You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storageA wide range of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.

32 Data stored in the vehicleIntroductio

n

These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:RVehicle's operating stateRIncidentsRMalfunctionsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.These include, for example:Roperating conditions of system components,e.g. fluid levelsRthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of itsindividual components, e.g. number of wheelrevolutions/speed, deceleration in move-ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedalpositionRmalfunctions and defects in important systemcomponents, e.g. lights, brakesRvehicle reactions and operating conditions inspecial driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-ment, intervention of stability control sys-temsRambient conditions, e.g. outside temperatureThis data is of an exclusively technical natureand can be used to:Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-tions and defectsRanalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimize vehicle functionThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-mation can be read from the event datamemoryand malfunction data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarrantiesRquality assuranceThe vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-vice network (including the manufacturer) usingspecial diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-mation is obtained from it, if required.After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-mation is deleted from the malfunction memoryor is continually overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations are con-ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-

tion with other information (if necessary, underconsultation with an authorized expert), couldbe traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions that have been con-tractually agreed upon with the customer allowcertain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-cle as well. The additional functions include, forexample, vehicle location in case of an emer-gency.

COMAND/mbraceIf the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle'soperation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-uations, and the location of the vehicle may becompiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-tem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator'sManual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-tions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). The main purpose ofan EDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle's systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:RHow various systems in your vehicle wereoperatingRWhether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastenedRHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRHow fast the vehicle was traveling.

Data stored in the vehicle 33

Introductio

n

Z

These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which acci-dents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g. name, gender, age and acci-dent location) are recorded. However, other par-ties, such as law enforcement could combineEDR data with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crash investi-gation.Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is neededto read data that is recorded by the EDR, andspecial equipment is required. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessing thevehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the CrashData Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extractdata from the EDR is commercially available,Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expresslydisclaims any and all liability arising from theextraction of this information by unauthorizedMercedes-Benz personnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or, ifthe vehicle is leased, without the consent of thelessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by law enforce-ment; by federal, state or local government; inconnectionwith or arising out of litigation involv-ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint SystemModule. Tamperingwith, alter-ing, modifying or removing the EDR componentmay result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-tem Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, thefederal regulation governs. As of February 2013,13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-sourcesoftware used in your vehicle and its electroniccomponents is available on the following web-site:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

34 Information on copyrightIntroductio

n

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shift-ers 161

; Combination switch 119

= Horn

? Instrument cluster 36

A DIRECT SELECT lever 156

B Climate control systems 129

C Overhead control panel 42

D Control panel for multimediasystem and vehicle functions 39

E Ignition lock 146Start/Stop button 146

F Adjusts the steering wheel 110

G Cruise control lever 185

Function Page

H Electric parking brake 178

I Diagnostics connection 31

J Opens the hood 330

K Light switch 118

L Control panel for:Activating Steering Assist 192Switching on Active LaneKeeping Assist 222Deactivating PARKTRONIC 199Switching on the 360° cam-era 210Switching on the head-updisplay 238Vehicles without a driverassistance system: map/coin holder

Cockpit 35

Ataglance

Instrument cluster

Function Page

: SpeedometerSpeedometer segments 235

; å ESP® OFF 290

= ÷ ESP® 290

? · Distance warning 295

A Ð Power steering 297

B #! Turn signals 119

C Multifunction display 237

D ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 292

E ! ABS 289

F ; Check Engine 293

G Tachometer 236

H Electric parking brake (red) 292F USA only! Canada only

I Brakes (red) 288$ USA onlyJ Canada only

J M SPORT handling modein Mercedes-AMG vehicles 292

Function Page

K ? Coolant 293

L Coolant temperature display 236

M é RBS (RecuperativeBrake System) 288

N J This lamp has no func-tion

O 6 Restraint system 46

P ü Seat belt 287

Q K High-beam headlamps 119

R L Low-beam headlamps 119

S 8 Reserve fuel level withfuel filler flap location indica-tor (right) 293

T Fuel level indicator

U T Parking lamps, licenseplate lamps and instrumentcluster lighting 119

V R Rear fog lamp 119

W h Tire pressure monitor 296

36 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

i You can find further information on theinstrument cluster in PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-cles in the Digital Operator's Manual under"PLUG-IN HYBRID operation".

Instrument cluster 37

Ataglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 237

; Multimedia system display

= ~ Rejects or ends a call6Makes or accepts a callFurther telephone functions 245WX Adjusts volume8 Muteó Switches on voice-operated control navigationor the Voice Control System

Function Page

? ò Opens the menu list9: Selects a menua Confirms the selection% BackOperating the on-board com-puter 236ñ Switches off voice-operated control navigationor the Voice Control System

i In vehicles with multimedia systemCOMAND you can find further information:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the DVD changer or single DVD drive inthe Digital Operator's ManualRon the Voice Control System in the sepa-rate operating instructions

i In vehicleswithmultimedia systemAudio 20you can find further information:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the voice-operated control of the navi-gation in the manufacturer's operatinginstructions

38 Multifunction steering wheelAt

aglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: Climate control systems 129

; £ Hazard warning lamps 120

= Ø Vehicle functions/system settings button (seethe separate operatinginstructions)

? % Telephone button (seethe separate operatinginstructions)

A PASSENGER AIR BAG indica-tor lamp 47ATA indicator lamp 79

B Analog clock (not availableon all equipment levels)

Function Page

C Õ Media button (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

D $ Radio button (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

E Ø Navigation button (seethe separate operatinginstructions)

F þ Inserts or ejects a CDor DVD (see the separateoperating instructions)

Center console 39

Ataglance

Center console, lower section

Function Page

: Stowage compartment 308Ashtray 318Cigarette lighter 319Socket 319Cup holder 316

; Adjusts the volume/mute(see the separate operatinginstructions)

= Switches multimedia systemon or off (see separate oper-ating instructions)

? u Rear window roller sun-blind 318

A Touchpad (see the separateoperating instructions)

B Stowage compartment 308

Function Page

C è ECO start/stop func-tion (vehicles without PLUG-IN HYBRID operation) 150Selects the operating mode(PLUG-IN HYBRID operation) 226

D É Sets the vehicle level 196

E DYNAMIC SELECT switch 154

F Back button (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

G Multimedia system control-ler (see the separate operat-ing instructions)

H g Switches to the favor-ites button (see the separateoperating instructions)

40 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Function Page

: Ashtray 318Cigarette lighter 319Socket 319Cup holder 316

; Adjusts or mutes the volume(see the separate operatinginstructions)

= Adjusts the volume of theAMG sports exhaust system 152

? è ECO start/stop func-tion 150

A Touchpad (see the separateoperating instructions)

B Stowage compartment 308

C Activates/deactivates ESP® 74Activates/deactivatesSPORT handling mode 74

Function Page

D AMG adaptive sport suspen-sion system (suspension set-ting) 197

E Manual gearshifting (perma-nent setting) 161

F DYNAMIC SELECT switch(selects the drive program) 154

G Back button (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

H Multimedia system control-ler (see the separate operat-ing instructions)

I g Switches to the favor-ites button (see the separateoperating instructions)

Center console 41

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-handreading lamp on/off 121

; |Switches the automaticinterior lighting controlon/off 122

= G SOS button (mbracesystem) 320

? c Switches the front inte-rior lighting on/off 122

A u Switches the rear inte-rior lighting on/off 122

B p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 121

C ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 322

D Eyeglasses compartment 309

Function Page

E 3 Opens/closes the pan-orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 100Opens/closes the roller sun-blinds 101

F Rear-view mirror 113

G Buttons for the garage dooropener 327

H Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System; see the sep-arate operating instructions

I F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace system) 321

42 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steeringcolumn 116

; Adjusts the seats electrically 106

= c Seat heating 108

? s Seat ventilation 109

A Opens the door 88

B %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 88

C W Opens/closes the rearleft side window 94

D W Opens/closes the leftside window 94

Function Page

E 7Zª\Adjusts and folds the exteriormirrors in/out electrically 113

F WOpens/closes the rightside window 94

G W Opens/closes the rearright side window 94

H nOverride feature for thecontrols in the rear compart-ment 67

I p Opens/closes thetrunk lid 93

Door control panel 43

Ataglance

Hybrid vehicles

General notesHybrid technology combines a fuel efficientinternal combustion engine with a powerfulelectric motor.


Danger of electric shock

G DANGERThe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident andthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

When towing a vehicle after an accident, be sureto observe the following sections:RTransporting the vehicle (Y page 356)RTowing the vehicle with the rear axle raised(Y page 355)RTowing a vehicle with both axles on theground (Y page 356)

Read the safety instructions on towing and tow-starting (Y page 354).

All components of the hybrid drive system aremarked with yellow warning stickers that warnyou of the danger of high voltage. The cables ofthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system areorange in color.The ignition must be switched off when carryingout general tasks, such as changing bulbs orchecking the coolant level.

Automatic switching off of the hybriddrive systemIf components of the restraint system are acti-vated during an accident, the hybrid drive sys-tem is automatically deactivated.The hybrid drive system is not activated whenthe vehicle is started if:Ran electrical short circuit is detected in thehybrid drive systemRan electrical connection in the hybrid drivesystem is disconnected

This ensures that you do not come into contactwith high voltage.

Manual switching off of the hybrid drivesystemThe hybrid drive system can be deactivatedmanually using the high voltage switch-offdevice.

! To prevent damage to the hybrid drive sys-tem please observe the following instruc-tions:Ronly deactivate the hybrid drive systemmanually in the following situations.Rwork on the hybrid drive system may onlybe carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop, even when it has been deactivatedmanually.

Deactivate the hybrid system manually if:Rthe6 restraint systemwarning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up after an accidentRthe vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after anaccident, and the restraint system compo-nents were not activatedRthe vehicle is badly damaged and has to betowed or transported

44 Hybrid vehiclesSafety

X If possible, move the vehicle out of thedanger zone: shift the transmission into posi-tion N.

X Release the electric parking brake.X Roll the vehicle to a safe place and park itsafely.Get assistance from others if necessary.

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-ing. There is therefore a risk of being locked outif the vehicle is being pushed or tested on adynamometer.X Switch the ignition off.X Shift the transmission to position P.Depress the electric parking brake(Y page 178).Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 380).

X To use the high-voltage switch-off device:open the hood.

X Press release clip: in the direction of thearrow and pull it out.

X Pull the high voltage switch-off device;apart until it engages in the stop position.

If the hybrid drive system has been deactivateddue to reasons mentioned above, have itchecked at a qualified specialist workshopbefore reactivation.

High-voltage battery

G WARNINGIn the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed acritical value. In this case flammable gasescapes through a ventilation valve on the

underbody. The gas can ignite. There is a riskof injury.Leave the danger zone immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance, whilstobserving legal requirements.

G WARNINGIf the housing of the high-voltage battery hasbeen damaged, electrolyte and gases mayleak out. These are poisonous and caustic.There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes offwith water and seek medical attentionstraight away.

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: charging the high-voltage battery (Y page 168).

Engine compartmentBefore opening the hood:X Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch the ignition off.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-functionor KEYLESS‑GOX Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock.

X Observe the warning notes on the risk of elec-tric shock (Y page 44).

X Observe the warning notices about the hood(Y page 330).

RBS driving safety system (Recupera-tive Brake System)The Recuperative Brake System supports youwhen braking with an electronically-controlledbrake boost mode and enables the recovery ofkinetic energy (recuperation).Further information about the RecuperativeBrake System (Y page 225).

Hybrid vehicles 45

Safety

Z

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed.

X To deactivate: press! button: again.orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-functionor KEYLESS‑GOX Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts ofthe vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.Furthermore, the restraint system may alsoreduce the forces exerted on the vehicle occu-pants when an accident occurs.The restraint system includes:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systemThe components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can only offerthe intended level of protection if all vehicleoccupants:Rare correctly wearing their seat belts.(Y page 49)Radjust their seat and head restraint properly(Y page 104).

The driver is also responsible for ensuring thatthe steering wheel has been correctly posi-tioned. Observe the information relating to thecorrect driver's seat position (Y page 104).Always ensure the air bag can inflate properly ifdeployed (Y page 51).An air bag supplements a correctly fastenedseat belt. As an additional safety device, the airbag increases the level of protection for vehicleoccupants in the event of an accident. For exam-ple, if the protection already provided by a cor-rectly fastened seat belt will suffice, the air bagsare not deployed. Furthermore, only the air bagsthat would increase the degree of protectionafforded to the vehicle occupants in the event ofan accident are deployed. Seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objectspenetrating the vehicle from the outside.Information on restraint system operation canbe found under "Triggering of Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 58).See “Children in the vehicle” for information onchildren traveling with you as well as vehiclerestraint systems (Y page 62).


G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails. USA only: for further information con-tact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on and at

46 Occupant safetySafety

regular intervals while the engine is running.Therefore, malfunctions can be detected ingood time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-nents of the restraint system are in operationalreadiness.Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraintsystem warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switchedonRdoes not go out after a few seconds with theengine runningRlights up again while the engine is runningAll vehicles, except hybrid vehicles:

G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

Hybrid vehicles:

G DANGERIf the restraint system is malfunctioning, indi-vidual restraint system components may betriggered unintentionally or might not be trig-gered at all in the event of an accident with ahigh rate of vehicle deceleration. This couldaffect Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for example. The vehicle's high-voltageelectrical systemmay also not be deactivatedas intended in the event of an accident. Youcould suffer an electric shock if you touch thedamaged components of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop. Immediately switch off the ignitionand remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock after an accident.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp: andPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp; arepart of the Occupant Classification System(OCS).The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in theevent of an accident, all deployment criteriaare met, the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It willthen not be deployed in the event of an acci-dent.

Depending on the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag musteither be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-lowing points. You must make sure of this bothbefore and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on the instal-led child restraint system, and the age andsize of the child. Therefore, be sure to observethe notes on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 54) and on "Chil-dren in the vehicle" (Y page 62). There youwill also find instructions on rearward andforward-facing child restraint systems on thefront-passenger seat.RAll other persons: depending on the classi-fication of the person in the front-passenger

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-bled or deactivated (Y page 54). Be sure toobserve the notes on "Seatbelts“ (Y page 48) and "Air bags"(Y page 51). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionA correctly fastened seat belt is the most effec-tive means of restraining the movement of vehi-cle occupants in the event of an accident or thevehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk ofvehicle occupants coming into contact withparts of the vehicle interior or being thrown fromthe vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps tokeep the vehicle occupants in the best positionin relation to the air bag.The seat belt system consists of:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for the frontseat belts and the outer seat belts in the rearcompartmentRSeat belt force limiters for the front seat beltsand the outer seat belts in the rear

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or suddenly fromthe belt outlet, the inertia reel locks. The beltstrap cannot be pulled out further.Emergency Tensioning Devices tighten the seatbelts in an accident, pulling them close againstthe occupant's body. They do not, however, pullvehicle occupants back towards the backrest.Emergency Tensioning Devices do not correctan incorrect seat position or incorrectly wornseat belts.When triggered, the seat belt force limiterreduces the force exerted by the seat belt on thevehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seats aresynchronized with the front air bags, whichabsorb part of the deceleration force. Thismakes it possible to reduce the forces to whichvehicle occupants are subjected during an acci-dent.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle ofthe front-passenger seat. This may otherwiselead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten-sioning Device in the event of an accident,which will then need to be replaced.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEvenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicleoccupants should correctly fasten their seatbelts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional suitable restraint system. If the seatbelt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, forexample, in an accident, during braking or an


abrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-cle. The child restraint systemmust be appro-priate to the age, weight and size of the childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 62) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 54)

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger orfail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.AMG Performance seat: this seat is designedfor the standard three-point seat belt. If youinstall anothermulti-point seat belt, e.g. sport orracing seat belts, the restraint system cannotprovide the best level of protection.

G WARNINGIf you feed seat belts through the opening inthe seat backrest, the seat backrest may bedamaged or may even break in the event of anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Only use the standard three-point seat belt.Never modify the seat belt system.

Proper use of the seat beltsPay attention to the safety notes about the seatbelt (Y page 48).All vehicle occupants must fasten the seat beltcorrectly before setting off. Make sure that alloccupants are wearing their seat belts correctlyfor the entire journey.When fastening the seat belt, make sure that:RThe seat belt tongue is inserted into the beltbuckle that belongs to the seat.RThe seat belt is tightened across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.RThe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces produced in theevent of an accident be evenly distributedacross the belt.RThe shoulder section of the belt must alwaysbe routed across the center of the shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt should notcome into contact with your neck and mustnot be routed under the arm. Where possible,adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.RThe lap belt must be taut and as low as pos-sible over your lap.The lap belt must always pass across your hipjoints and never across your stomach orabdomen. Pregnant women must take partic-ular care. If necessary, the lap belt can bepushed down across the hip joints and pulledtight using the shoulder section.RThe seat belt is not routed over sharp, pointedor fragile objects.

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

If these items are on or in your clothing, e.g.eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., stow these itemsin a more suitable location.ROnly one person should use each seat belt atany one time.On no account should babies or childrentravel sitting on the lap of another vehicleoccupant. During an accident, they could becrushed between the occupant and seat belt.RObjects are not secured with a seat belt if theseat belt is being used by one of the vehicle’soccupants.Also make sure that there are no objects, e.g.cushions, between the occupant and the seat.

Seat belts are solely intended for the protectionand restraint of the vehicle occupants. Tosecure objects, luggage or loads, alwaysobserve the "Loading guidelines" (Y page 308).

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 48) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 49).If the center rear seat belt is being used, alsoobserve the information about the seat belt forthe center rear seat (Y page 50).

Basic illustration

X Adjust the seat (Y page 104).The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-tical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outletand engage belt tongue; into beltbuckle:.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightened auto-matically, see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 51).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the center of the shoul-der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.The belt outlet will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt outlet release= and slidebelt outlet downwards.

X Let go of belt outlet release= in the desiredposition and make sure that the belt outletengages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be found under"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 62).

Seat belt for the center rear seatIf the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded downand back up again, the rear center seat belt maylock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out.X To release the rear center seat belt: pullthe seat belt out approximately 1 in (25 mm)at the belt outlet on the backrest and thenrelease it again.The seat belt is retracted and released.

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will betrapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.This could damage the door, the door trimpanel and the seat belt. Damaged seat beltscan no longer fulfill their protective functionand must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.


X Press the release button in the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the beltback.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This func-tion adjusts the driver's and front-passengerseat belt to the upper body of the occupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle andRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certainretraction force if any slack is detected betweenthe vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do nothold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-ing.You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on andoff using the multimedia system. Information onactivating and deactivating the seat-belt adjust-ment function can be found in the Digital Oper-ator's Manual or in the separate operatinginstructions for the multimedia system.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-pants must wear their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there may bea warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt hasalready been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time theengine is started. If the front doors are closedand the driver or front-passenger seat belt hasnot been fastened, the 7 seat belt warninglamp lights up again after the six seconds. Assoon as the driver's and front-passenger seatbelts are fastened or a front door is openedagain, the7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after theengine is started, an additional warning tone willsound. The warning tone switches off after sixseconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-tened.If the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h)and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt isnot fastened, a warning tone sounds again. Thewarning tone sounds with increasing intensityfor a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver

or front passenger have fastened their seatbelts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the beltwarning automatically reactivates.

i For more information on the 7 seat beltwarning lamp, see "Warning and indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts"(Y page 287).

Air bags

IntroductionThe air bag installation point is identified by thelabel AIR BAG.An air bag supplements a correctly fastenedseat belt. However, it is not intended as a sub-stitute for the seat belt. Air bags provide addi-tional protection in the event of an accident.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. Thevarious air bag systems work independently ofeach other (Y page 58).There is, however, no system available todaythat can completely rule out injury or death.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.


G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in an almost upright position. The center ofthe head restraint must support the head atabout eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passenger seatsas far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against thedoor or side window. Youmay otherwise be inthe deployment area of the air bags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in frontof the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-board, for example. Your feet may otherwisebe in the deployment area of the air bag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannotbe worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitablechild restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installed onthe rear seats.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatwhen the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 47).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 54) and on "Children in thevehicle" (Y page 62) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationand operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may preventan air bag from functioning correctly. Beforestarting your journey and to avoid risks resultingfrom the speed of the air bag as it deploys, makesure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.

Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploymentarea of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are inthe pockets of your clothing. Store suchobjects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags


Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer-ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag;deploys in front of and above the glove box.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for the occu-pants in the front seats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGERAIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you aboutthe status of the front-passenger air bag(Y page 47).The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensorreadings, detects that the front-passengerseat is occupied (Y page 54). ThePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit(Y page 54)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steeringcolumn. The driver's knee bag is alwaysdeployed along with the driver's front air bag.The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh,knee and lower leg protection for the occupantin the driver's seat.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System

(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outer bol-ster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. However, it doesnot protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impact airbag is deployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passengerside (front) deploys under the following condi-tions:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckleof the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the side impact air bag on the front-passengerside deploys if an appropriate accident situationoccurs. In this case, deployment is independentof whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integrated intothe side of the roof frame and deployed in thearea from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest or arms.In the event of a side impact, the window curtainair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 58).

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.Depending on that result, the front-passengerfront air bag is either enabled or deactivated.The system does not disable:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

PrerequisitesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with their backagainst the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible

If the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-tion, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat, besure to observe the correct positioning of thechild restraint system. Never place objectsunder or behind the child restraint system, e.g.cushions. Fully retract the seat cushion length.The entire base of the child restraint systemmust always rest on the seat cushion of thefront-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint systemmust lie asflat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat.The child restraint system must not touch theroof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampThe indicator lamps inform you whether thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated orenabled.X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, orturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.The system carries out self-diagnostics.


The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGERAIR BAGON indicator lampsmust light up simul-taneously for approximately six seconds.The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in theevent of an accident, all deployment criteriaare met, the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It willthen not be deployed in the event of an acci-dent.

If the status of the front-passenger front air bagchangeswhile the vehicle is inmotion, an air bagdisplaymessage appears in the instrument clus-ter (Y page 265). When the front-passengerseat is occupied, always pay attention to thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF indicator lamps. Be aware of the statusof the front-passenger front air bag both beforeand during the journey.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bagmay deploy in an accident. The child could bestruck by the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampremains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rear-ward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more informationon OCS under "Problems with the OccupantClassification System" (Y page 58).

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG ON is lit up

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Always move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible and fully retract the seatcushion length. Always make sure that theshoulder belt strap is correctly routed fromthe vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulderbelt guide on the child restraint system. Theshoulder belt strap must be routed forwardsand downwards from the vehicle belt sashguide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle beltsash guide and the front-passenger seataccordingly. Always observe the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

If OCS determines that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild of up to twelvemonths old, in a standardchild restraint system, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated.But even in the case of a twelve-month-oldchild, in a standard child restraint system, thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up perma-nently after the system self-test. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isactivated. The result of the classification isdependent on, among other factors, the childrestraint system and the child's stature. It isrecommended that you install the childrestraint system on a suitable rear seat.RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by aperson of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager orsmall adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAGON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up and remains lit after the systemself-test depending on the result of the clas-sification.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp lights up, move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible. Alternatively, aperson of smaller stature can sit on a rearseat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person of smaller statureshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of adult stature, thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure toobserve the notes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 62).When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6restraint systemwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated in thiscase and does not deploy during an accident.

Have the system checked by qualified techni-cians as soon as possible. Consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. The front-passengerseat should only be repaired at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or theseat cushion is damaged, have the necessaryrepair work carried out at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessories thathave been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bag willalso deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, thefront-passenger front air bag is either enabled ordeactivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps donot light up during the system self-test, thesystem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with high deceler-ation. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.


That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp displays the status of the front-passengerfront air bag (Y page 54).

For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-lems with the Occupant Classification System"(Y page 58).

Occupant safety 57

Safety

Z

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 56).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamplights up and remains lit,even though the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or a per-son of a stature corre-sponding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-rect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the personon the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 54).

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up and/ordoes not stay on.The front-passenger seatis:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child up totwelve months old in achild restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the childseat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests onthe seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seatbelt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passengerseat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the childrestraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the childrestraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-ingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto theseat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/orthe PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not installa child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rearseat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags


G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.

Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-


tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of anypassengers to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the air bagscontinue to perform their protective function forthe vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig-ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardoussituations. This procedure is reversible.If the Emergency Tensioning Devices or air bagsare deployed, you will hear a bang and a smallamount of powder may also be released. The6 restraint systemwarning lampwill light up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-ing. The powder released is generally not haz-ardous to health, it could however cause short-termbreathing difficulties in peoplewith asthmaor other respiratory problems. If it is safe to doso, you should leave the vehicle immediately oropen a window in order to prevent breathingdifficulties.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regardfor the environment. Check with your local gov-ernment’s disposal guidelines. California resi-dents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, the restraintsystem control unit evaluates important physi-cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RDurationRDirectionRIntensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices in the event of a fron-tal or rear-end collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational. You can find further informationunder "Restraint system warning lamp"(Y page 46)Rthe belt tongue is inserted into the buckle onthe respective front seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rearcompartment are triggered independently of thelock status of the seat belts.If the restraint systemcontrol unit detects a highaccident severity, additional components of therestraint system are deployed independently ofone another in certain frontal collision situa-tions:RFront air bags and driver's knee bagRWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-mines that it can offer additional protection tothat provided by the seat belt

Depending on the person occupying the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger air bag isactivated or deactivated. The front-passengerfront air bag can only be deployed in an accidentif the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp islit. Observe the information on the PASSENGERAIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 47).Your vehicle has dual-stage front air bags. Dur-ing the first deployment stage, the front air bagfills with propellant gaswhich reduces the risk ofinjury. The second stage is then triggered withinmilliseconds, filling the front air bag with themaximum amount of propellant gas.The deployment thresholds for the EmergencyTensioning Devices and air bags are calculatedon the basis of the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration occurring at various points in the vehi-cle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The

Occupant safety 59

Safety

Z

air bag must be deployed on time, at the start ofthe collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelerationand the direction of the force are essentiallydetermined by:Rdistribution of the force during the impactRcollision angleRdeformation characteristics of the vehicleRcharacteristics of the object with which thevehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measuredafter the collision has occurred do not play adecisive role in the deployment of an air bag, nordo they provide an indication of air bag deploy-ment.The vehiclemay be considerably deformedwith-out an air bag being deployed. This is the case ifonly relatively easily deformable parts havebeen hit and a high rate of deceleration has notbeen reached. Conversely, an air bag may bedeployed even though the vehicle suffers onlyminor deformation. This is the case if, for exam-ple, very rigid vehicle parts such as the longitu-dinal body members are hit in an accident andthe rate of deceleration is sufficient.If the restraint systemcontrol unit detects a sideimpact or that the vehicle is rolling over, the rel-evant restraint system components aredeployed independently of one another depend-ing on the anticipated type of accident.RSide impact air bags on the side of the colli-sion, regardless of Emergency TensioningDevice and use of the seat belt on the driver'sside and the outer seats on the second rowThe side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the followingconditions:- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue has engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat.

RWindow curtain air bag on the side of the col-lision, regardless of seat belt use andwhetherfront-passenger seat is occupiedRFront Emergency Tensioning Devices, if thesystem determines that they can offer addi-tional protection for the vehicle occupants inthis situationRRear Emergency Tensioning Devices in cer-tain situations if the vehicle rolls overRWindow curtain air bags on the driver's andfront-passenger sides in certain rollover sit-

uations if the system determines that theycan offer additional protection to that provi-ded by the seat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The various air bag systems work independ-ently of each other.How the air bag system works is determinedby the severity of the accident detected,especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, and the apparent type of accident:Rfrontal collisionRside impactRrollover

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

IntroductionPRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to pro-tect occupants in certain hazardous situations.

Important safety notes! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats. There is a dangerthat the seats and/or objects could be dam-aged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with thePRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of personalinjuries occurring as a result of an accident can-not be eliminated. Always adapt your drivingstyle to suit the prevailing road and weatherconditions and maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activatedRin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-steers or oversteers severelyRvehicles with the Driving Assistance package:when a driver assistance system intervenespowerfully or the radar sensor systemdetectsan imminent danger of collision in certain sit-uations


PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and thesliding sunroof are closed.Rvehicles with the memory function for thefront-passenger seat: the front-passengerseat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable posi-tion.

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the beltpre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®can then be reversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightlywhen the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. You willfind information on the convenience functionunder "Belt adjustment" (Y page 51).

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-pant protection system PLUS)

IntroductionPRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-endcollision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehicle occupants.

Important safety notesThe intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannotprevent an imminent collision.The driver is not warned about the interventionof PRE-SAFE® PLUS.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehi-cle is backing up.When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-ing space with assistance from Active ParkingAssist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply thebrakes.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-tions if the radar sensor system detects animminent head-on or rear-end collision.PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rif the radar sensor system detects that ahead-on collision is imminent, the seat beltsare pre-tensioned.Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent:- the brake pressure is increased if the driverapplies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is can-celed:Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when agear is engagedRif the risk of a collision passes or is no longerdetectedRif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention topull away

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, the original settings arerestored.

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending on thetype and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRvehicles with a memory function: the electri-cally adjustable steering wheel is raisedRthe engine is switched off and the fuel supplyis cut offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergencycallRvehicles with the hybrid drive system: thehybrid system and the high-voltage electricalsystem are deactivated

Occupant safety 61

Safety

Z

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installa child restraint system on a rear seat. Childrenare generally better protected there.If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.The child restraint system must be appropri-ate to the age, weight and size of the childRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in this section in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 54)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-

dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 48) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 49).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where athree-point seat belt can be properly fastenedwithout a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver'sseat belt, are equipped with a special seat beltretractor. When activated, the special seat beltretractor ensures that the seat belt cannotslacken once the child seat is secured.

62 Children in the vehicleSafety

Installing a child restraint system:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-let.

X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seat beltretractor is enabled.

X Push the child restraint system down so thatthe seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing the child restraint system and deac-tivating the special seat belt retractor:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Press the release button of the seat beltbuckle and guide the seat belt tongue backtowards the belt sash guide.The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system is

always resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-lines" (Y page 308).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systems of child restraint systemsare:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchoragesIf it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the

Children in the vehicle 63

Safety

Z

information on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 54). There you will alsofind information on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag.All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-responds to the standards can be found on aninstruction label on the child restraint system.This confirmation can also be found in the instal-lation instructions that are included with thechild restraint system.Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-lation and operating instructions for the childrestraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engagedcorrectly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat belt couldotherwise be damaged.

Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust therear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISOFIX)securing rings: for the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system are accessible.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystemon both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings:.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems are installed on the left and right of therear seats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may alsobe used and can be installed using the vehicle'sseat belt system. Install the child seat accordingto the manufacturer's instructions.

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system secured witha LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.If the child restraint system is equipped with aTop Tether belt, this should always be used.


G WARNINGIf the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection. As a result, child restraint systemscannot perform their intended protectivefunction. Rear seat backrests that are notlocked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.


in the event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-fication indicator.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in the multifunctiondisplay in the instrument cluster. Awarning tonealso sounds.

Top Tether anchorages

Top Tether anchorage points= are installed inthe rear compartment behind the outer headrestraints on the parcel shelf.X Move head restraint: upwards.X Fold up cover; of Top Tether anchorage=.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystem with Top Tether. Always comply withthe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether beltA under headrestraint: between the two head restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook? of Top Tether beltA into Top Tether anchorage=.Make sure that Top Tether beltA is not twis-ted.

X Tension Top Tether beltA. Always complywith the child restraint system manufactur-er's installation instructions when doing so.

X Fold down cover; of Top Tether anchorage=.

X Move head restraint: back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 106). Make surethat you do not interfere with the correct rout-ing of Top Tether beltA.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installthe child restraint system on a rear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 54).You can thus avoid the risks that could arise asa result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is permanently lit (Y page 47) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated.

Children in the vehicle 65

Safety

Z

Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Fullyretract the seat cushion length. The entire baseof the child restraint systemmust always rest onthe seat cushion of the front-passenger seat.The backrest of the child restraint system mustlie as flat as possible against the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. The child restraint systemmust not touch the roof or be subjected to a loadby the head restraint. Adjust the angle of theseat backrest and the head restraint positionaccordingly. Always make sure that the shoul-der belt strap is correctly routed from the vehi-cle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on thechild restraint system. The shoulder belt strapmust be routed forwards and downwards fromthe vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust thevehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seataccordingly.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Child-proof locks


G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:Rthe rear doors (Y page 67)Rthe rear side windows (Y page 67)



G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.


Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door securedwith a child-proof lock cannot be opened frominside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,the door can be opened from the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof lock leverup in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks arework-ing properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

X To activate/deactivate: press button;.If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of the rearside windows is disabled. Operation is onlypossible using the switches in the driver'sdoor. If indicator lamp: is off, operation ispossible using the switches in the rear com-partment.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 68)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 68)RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (BrakeAssistSystemPLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist)(Y page 69)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 70)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 73)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 76)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 76)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 77)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 78)

Driving safety systems 67

Safety

Z

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Driving safety systems aremerely aids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for maintaining the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time, and for staying in lane. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions andmaintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described only workas effectively as possible when there is ade-quate contact between the tires and the roadsurface. Pay particular attention to the informa-tion regarding tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires"section (Y page 360).In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.Only in this way will the driving safety systemsdescribed in this section work as effectively aspossible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a way thatthe wheels do not lock when you brake. Thisallows you to continue steering the vehiclewhenbraking.The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when youonly brake gently.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-

tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 289) and dis-play messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 256).

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indicationof hazardous road conditions, and functions as areminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situations.If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BASautomatically boosts the braking force, thusshortening the stopping distance.


G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

68 Driving safety systemsSafety

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

General informationBAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of acollision with a vehicle or a pedestrian andreduce the effects of such a collision. If BASPLUS detects a danger of collision, you areassisted when braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notesin the "Driving safety systems" section(Y page 68).

BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with theDriving Assistance package.For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system and the camera systemmust be operational.With the help of a sensor system and a camerasystem, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of timeRthat cross the path of your vehicleIn addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typicalcharacteristics such as the body contours andposture of a person standing upright.If the radar sensor system or the camera systemis malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions arerestricted or no longer available. The brake sys-tem is still available with complete brake boost-ing effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" sec-tion“ (Y page 69).


G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo-ple, this is especially the case if they are mov-ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in thesecases. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbike


Safety

Z

Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different lineRvehicles quickly move into the radar sensorsystem detection range

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sunbeing low in the skyRdarknessRor if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speed under 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BASPLUS is activated. The increase in brake pres-sure will be carried out at the last possiblemoment.When driving at a speed above 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises thebrake pressure to a value adapted to the trafficsituation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-ardous situations with vehicles in front within aspeed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and155 mph (250 km/h).

At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicleRobstacles crossing your path, which move inthe detection range of the sensors and arerecognized by them

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak-ing force, preventative passenger protectionmeasures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simulta-neously (Y page 60).

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-tion as usual again, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.Ryou depress the accelerator pedalRyou activate kickdown.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS consistsof a distance warning function with an autono-mous braking function and adaptive BrakeAssist.COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS can helpyou to minimize the risk of a front-end collisionwith a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects ofsuch a collision.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSdetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbewarned visually and acoustically. If you do notreact to the visual and audible collision warning,autonomous braking can be initiated in criticalsituations. If you apply the brake yourself in acritical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.


Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different lineRthe vehicle is new or after a service on theCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS sys-temObserve the important safety notes in the"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 145).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.

Switching on/offThe COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isautomatically active after switching on the igni-tion.You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com-puter (Y page 247). When deactivated, the dis-tance warning function and the autonomousbraking function are also deactivated.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, theæ symbol appears in theassistance graphics display.

Distance warning function

General informationThe distance warning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision with avehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such acollision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbe warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 68).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionStarting at a speed of approximately 4 mph(7 km/h), the distance warning function warnsyou if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound, andthe· distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the system to display a warning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obstacles


Safety

Z

that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-ded period of time.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), the distance warning function canalso react to stationary obstacles, such as stop-ped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distance warn-ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with theautonomous braking function.The autonomous braking function:Rgives the driver more time to react to criticaldriving situationsRcan help the driver to avoid an accident orRreduces the effects of an accidentVehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: theautonomous braking function is available in thefollowing speed ranges:R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objectsR4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationaryobjects

Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the autono-mous braking function is available in the follow-ing speed ranges:R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for movingobjectsR4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationaryobjects

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-tion to intervene.If the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously (Y page 60).

Adaptive Brake Assist

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-tance warning signal can detect obstacles thatare in the path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.

If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a collision. Ifyou apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive BrakeAssist will automatically increase the brakingforce to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speeds above4mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technologyto assess the traffic situation.Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable ofreacting to moving objects that have alreadybeen detected as such at least once over theperiod of observation.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-tionary obstacles.If Adaptive Brake Assist demands particularlyhigh braking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activatedsimultaneously (Y page 60).X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 68).

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.


G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause Brake Assist to intervene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to amalfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with full brakeboosting effect and BAS.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.power transmission between the tires and theroad surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating fromthe direction desired by the driver, one or morewheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. Theengine output is also modified to keep the vehi-cle on the desired course within physical limits.ESP® assists the driver when pulling away onwet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilizethe vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 68).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicleswith 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on one

side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-red to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.


G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

When towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised, observe the notes on ESP®(Y page 355).If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upcontinuously, ESP® is deactivated.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up contin-uously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunc-tion.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 290) and display messages which maybe shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 256).Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the÷ ESP®warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions.


Safety

Z

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehicle stopsmoving. The engine starts automatically whenthe driver wants to pull away again. ESP®remains in its previously selected status. Exam-ple: if ESP® was deactivated before the enginewas switched off, ESP® remains deactivatedwhen the engine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptMercedes‑AMG vehicles)


You can select between the following statusesof ESP:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle ifthe vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts tospin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-board computer (Y page 247).ESP® deactivated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

ESP® activated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in theinstrument cluster flashes. In such situations,ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cuttingaction for better traction on loose surfaces.RTraction control is still activated.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longeravailable; nor is it activated if you brake firmlywith assistance from ESP®.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-venes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it isalso not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Deactivating/activating ESP®(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)


You can select between the following states ofESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-dents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-uations described in the following.



! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.

In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon specially designated roads when the vehi-cle's own oversteering and understeeringcharacteristics are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified and expe-rienced driver.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle ifthe vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts tospin.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode: brieflypress button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The

SPORT handling mode message appears inthe multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

X To deactivate ESP®: press button: untilthe å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster.The ÷ OFF message appears in the multi-function display.

X To activate ESP®: briefly press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ONmessage appears in themultifunction display.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han-dling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and one ormore wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP®only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to a limi-ted degree.RTraction control is still activated.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cuttingaction for better traction on loose surfaces.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in theinstrument cluster does not flash. In such situa-tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cuttingaction for better traction on loose surfaces.RTraction control is still activated.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longeravailable; nor is it activated if you brake firmlywith assistance from ESP®.


Safety

Z

RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-venes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it isalso not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

ESP® trailer stabilization

General informationESP® trailer stabilization is not available inMercedes-AMG vehicles.If your vehicle/trailer combination begins toswerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP®slows the vehicle down by braking and limitingthe engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-bination has stabilized.

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilizethe vehicle/trailer combination by depressingthe brake firmly.ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speedsof about 65 km/h.ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP®is deactivated or disabled because of amalfunc-tion.

Crosswind Assist

General informationStrong crosswinds can cause your vehicle todeviate from a straight course. The crosswinddriving assistance function integrated in ESP®noticeably reduces these impairments.

ESP® intervenes automatically according to thedirection and intensity of the crosswinds affect-ing your vehicle.ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking to assistyou in keeping the vehicle in the lane.Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speedsabove 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straightahead or cornering gently.

Important safety notesCrosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is deac-tivated or disabled because of a malfunction.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pressureon the rear wheels to improve driving stabilitywhile braking.


G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 289) as well as displaymessages (Y page 258).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety andoffers increased braking comfort. In addition tothe braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also hasthe HOLD function (Y page 194) and hill startassist (Y page 150).


PRE-SAFE® Brake

General informationPRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize therisk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or apedestrian, and reduce the effects of such acollision. If PRE-SAFE®Brake has detected a riskof collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically as well as by automatic braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notesin the "Driving safety systems" section(Y page 68).

PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance Plus package.For PRE-SAFE®Brake to assist youwhen driving,the radar sensor system and the camera systemmust be switched on and be operational.With the help of the radar sensor system and thecamera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detectobstacles that are in front of your vehicle for anextended period of time.In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians usingtypical characteristics such as the body con-tours and posture of a person standing upright.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" section(Y page 77).


G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-cle by a partial application of the brakes if adanger of collision is detected. There may bea collision unless you brake yourself. Evenafter subsequent full application of the brakesa collision cannot always be avoided, partic-ularly when approaching at too high a speed.There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes,the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the fullbraking pressure.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify objects and complex traffic conditions.In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify people, especially if they are moving. Inthese cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot inter-vene. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you.

In order to maintain the appropriate distance tothe vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.


Safety

Z

Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sunbeing low in the skyRdarknessRor if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti-vate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board com-puter (Y page 247).If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in themultifunction dis-play.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),this function warns you if you rapidly approach avehicle in front. An intermittent warning tonewill then sound and the· distance warninglamp will light up in the instrument cluster.

X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seatbelts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is between approximately4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

i If there is an increased risk of a collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 60).

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking, upto the point of full brake application. Automaticemergency braking is not performed until imme-diately prior to an imminent accident.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is endedautomatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steering wheelin the direction required for vehicle stabilization.


This steering assistance is provided in particularif:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on awet or slippery road surface when you brake.Rthe vehicle starts to skid.


No steering support is provided from STEERCONTROL, if:RESP® is deactivatedRESP® is malfunctioning.Rthe lighting is faulty.If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assistedfurther by the electrical power steering.

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate with the SmartKey: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition offand open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyonecan start the engine if a valid SmartKey has beenleft inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated whenyou start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be started(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-tem is not operational. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey orKEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm systemis armed after approximately 10 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-Key or KEYLESS-GO.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hoodX To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:press the% or& button on the Smart-Key.The alarm is switched off.

orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-functionor KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-ton from the ignition lock (Y page 146).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-cle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you closethe open door that triggered it, for example.

Protection against theft 79

Safety

Z

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-tem automatically notifies the CustomerAssistance Center. This is done either by textmessage or data connection.The emergency call system sends a messageor establishes a data connection providedthat:Ryou have subscribed to thembrace service.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

80 Protection against theftSafety

SmartKey


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-netic fields. Otherwise, the remote controlfunction could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.

VehicleswithKEYLESS-GO start function: donot keep the SmartKey on the parcel shelf or inthe trunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not bedetected, e.g. when starting the engine usingthe Start/Stop button.A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhile drivingRwhen the external door handles are touchedRduring convenience closing

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To open/close the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the% button.If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks thefollowing components:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlocking andthree times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated via themultimedia system (see the Digital Operator'sManual).

SmartKey 81

Openingandclosing

Z

You will receive visual and acoustic locking con-firmation if all components were able to belocked.When the locator lighting is activated via themultimedia system, it lights up when it is darkafter the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey(see the Digital Operator's Manual).

X To open the trunk lid automatically fromoutside the vehicle: press and hold theFbutton until the trunk lid opens.

X To open the trunk lid automatically fromoutside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca-ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle,press theF button on the SmartKey.When the trunk lid closes you can thenrelease the button.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-Key in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry theSmartKey with you. You can combine the func-tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by usingKEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the& button on the SmartKey.The driver's door and the door at which the han-dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle. When locking orunlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distancebetween the SmartKey and the correspondingdoor handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).A brief radio connection between the vehicleand the key determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the vehicle.This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhile drivingRwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESSRwhen the external door handles are touchedRduring convenience closing

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface:or;.Make sure that you do not touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an extendedperiod.Further information on the convenience clos-ing feature (Y page 96).

X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle onthe trunk lid.

Deactivating and activatingIf you do not intend to use a key for an extendedperiod of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The SmartKey willthen use very little power, thereby conservingbattery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby.X To deactivate: press the& button on theSmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp of the SmartKeyflashes twice briefly and lights up once, thenKEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 84).

X To activate: press any button on the Smart-Key.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated featuresare available again.

82 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

KEYLESS-GO start function

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-Key in the vehicle.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the locking sys-tem. This means that only the driver's door andthe fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicleis unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travelon your own.X To change the setting: press and hold downthe% and& buttons simultaneouslyfor approximately six seconds until the bat-tery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 84).

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicleThe SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock: press the% button once.X To unlock centrally: press the% buttontwice.

X To lock: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed asfollows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the driver'sdoor.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surfaceof the door handle on the front-passengerdoor or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: press andhold the% and& buttons simultane-ously for approximately six seconds until thebattery check lamp flashes twice(Y page 84).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 79).If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-matically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of thearrow and at the same time remove mechan-ical key; from the SmartKey.

Further information:RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 89)RLocking the vehicle (Y page 89)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely into theSmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey 83

Openingandclosing

Z

SmartKey battery


G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thebatteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 84).If the SmartKey battery is checked within thesignal reception range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 83).

X Press mechanical key; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow until bat-tery compartment cover: opens. Do nothold battery compartment cover: closedwhile doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

84 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth todo so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartmentcover: into the housing first and then pressto close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the SmartKey(Y page 83).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons onthe vehicle.

SmartKey 85

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the SmartKey


You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingthe SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if necessary(Y page 84).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 82).


If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using themechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of theSmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-trol function:X Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

86 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing


The engine cannot bestarted using the Smart-Key.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 350).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 352).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using the Start/Stop button. The Smart-Key is in the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.


If this does not work:X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

Doors 87

Openingandclosing

Z

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only open therear doors from inside the vehicle if they are notsecured by the child-proof locks (Y page 67). Ifthe vehicle has been locked with the SmartKeyor with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from theinside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 79).

X To unlock and open a front door: pull doorhandle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and opens.

X To unlock a rear door: pull door handle;.Locking knob: pops up and the doorunlocks.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle;again.The door opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock and unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. The switches are on the driver’sdoor.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.When the front-passenger door is closed, thevehicle is locked.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be lockedor unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from theinside if the vehicle has been locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.The doors can be opened from the inside. Youcan only open the rear doors from inside thevehicle if they are not secured by the child-prooflocks (Y page 67).If the vehicle has been lockedwith the SmartKeyor with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from theinside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 79).When a locked door is opened from inside thevehicle, the previous unlocking process will beacknowledged if the vehicle:Rhas been locked with the locking button forthe central locking orRhas been locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the inside isunlocked.

88 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button: forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-ing.You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

i You can also activate and deactivate theautomatic locking function via COMAND orAudio 20 (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Unlocking/locking driver's door withmechanical keyi If youwant to centrally lock the vehicle usingthe mechanical key, begin by pressing thelocking button for the interior locking mech-anism while the driver's door is open. Thenlock the driver's door using the mechanicalkey.

X Insert the mechanical key into opening: inthe protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle.X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical keyas straight as possible away from the vehicleuntil it releases.

X Release the door handle.

X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position1.

X To lock: turn themechanical key clockwise asfar as it will go to position1.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 79).

Trunk


G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,

Trunk 89

Openingandclosing

Z

especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 394).You can limit the opening angle of the trunk lid inCOMAND or Audio 20 (see the Digital Opera-tor's Manual).Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.You should preferably place luggage or loads inthe trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 308).

Obstruction recognitionwith trunk lidreversing featureVehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-ture:The trunk lid is equipped with automaticobstruction detectionwith a reversing feature. Ifa solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lidwhen automatically opening, this procedure isstopped. If a solid object blocks or restricts thetrunk lid when automatically closing, the trunklid opens again automatically. The automaticobstruction detection with reversing feature isonly an aid. It is not a substitute for your atten-tiveness when opening and closing the trunk lid.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door orRpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid, orRpull on the trunk lid handle

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:It is also possible to stop the closing process byperforming a kicking movement under the rearbumper.

Opening and closing manually

Opening

X Press theF button on the SmartKey.orX Pull handle:.The trunk lid opens.

90 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Closing

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess: andpush it closed.

X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the&button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO(Y page 82).

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside


G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid.Rpull the trunk lid handle

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if the

trunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.



The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 394).

Opening automaticallyYou can open the trunk lid automatically usingthe SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid.X Press and hold theF button on the Smart-Key until the trunk lid opens.

orX If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lidhandle and let it go again immediately.

Closing automatically

: Closing button; Locking buttonX Press closing button: in the trunk lid.

Trunk 91

Openingandclosing

Z

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-ture and KEYLESS-GO: when the driver's dooris closed you can simultaneously close the trunklid and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO keymust be in the rear detection range of the vehi-cle.X Press locking button; in the trunk lid.If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey outsidethe vehicle, the trunk lid closes. The vehicle islocked.

If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk,the trunk lid opens again after it is closed.If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out-side the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed.If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunkbefore the closing procedure starts, the trunk lidremains open.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS


G WARNINGThe vehicle's exhaust systemmay be very hot.You could burn yourself by touching theexhaust system if you use HANDS-FREEACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Alwaysensure that you only make the kicking move-ment within the detection range of sensors.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detectionrange of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-tional opening of the trunk:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft(3 m) away from the vehicle.

General notesWith KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS,you can open or close the trunk lid or stop theprocedure without using your hands. This is use-ful if you have your hands full. To do this, makea kickingmovement under the bumperwith yourfoot.

Observe the following points:RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the reardetection range of the vehicle.RWhen making the kicking movement, makesure that you are standing firmly on theground and that there is sufficient clearanceto the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwiselose your balance e.g. on ice.

RAlways ensure that you only make the kickingmovement within the detection range of sen-sors:.RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from therear area while doing so.RDo not come into contact with the bumperwhile making the kicking movement. Other-wise, the sensors may not function correctly.RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not functionwhen the engine is started.RDirt caused by road salt around sensors:may restrict functionality.Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros-thetic leg may restrict functionality.RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec-tion range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREEACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lidcould thus be opened or closed unintention-ally, for example, if you:- sit on the edge of the trunk.- set something down or lift something upbehind the vehicle.

- polish the rear of the vehicle.Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about yourperson in these situations or in situations sim-ilar to these. This will prevent the uninten-tional opening/closing of the trunk.

92 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Operation

X To open/close: kick into sensor detectionrange: under the bumper with your foot.A warning tonewill soundwhile the trunk lid isopening or closing.

X If the trunk lid does not open/close afterseveral attempts: wait at least ten secondsand then using your foot kick under thebumper again.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for toolong, the trunk lid does not open or close.Repeat the leg movement more quickly if thisoccurs.To stop the opening or closing procedure:Rkick with your leg in the sensor detectionrange: under the bumper orRpress the closing button on the trunk lid, orRpull the handle on the outside of the trunk lidorRpress theF button on the SmartKeyIf the trunk lid closing procedure has been stop-ped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe trunk lid will open

If the trunk lid opening procedure has beenstopped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe trunk lid will close

Opening/closing automatically frominside


G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid.Rpull the trunk lid handle



The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 394).

Trunk 93

Openingandclosing

Z

Opening and closing

X To open: pull remote operating switch: forthe trunk lid until the trunk lid opens.

X To close: press and hold remote operatingswitch: for the trunk lid until the trunk lid iscompletely closed.

When the vehicle is stationary, you can close thetrunk lid from the driver's seat.When the vehicleis also unlocked, you can also open the trunk lidfrom inside.

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remainslocked and cannot be opened.

Activating the function to lock the trunk sepa-rately:X Close the trunk lid.X Open the glove box.X Push the switch to position:.If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunkremains locked.i You can also lock the glove box(Y page 309).

Deactivating the function to lock the trunk sep-arately:X Open the glove box.X Push the switch to position;.If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunkwill also be unlocked.

Trunk emergency releaseYou can unlock the trunk lid from the inside withthe emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk lidemergency release when the vehicle is station-ary or while driving.The trunk lid emergency release does not unlockthe trunk lid if the battery is disconnected ordischarged.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is openedRemergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Side windows


G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-

94 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts a side window from travelingupwards during the automatic closing process,the sidewindowopens again automatically. Dur-ing themanual closing process, the side windowonly opens again automatically after the corre-sponding switch is released. The automaticreversing feature is only an aid and is no substi-tute for your attention when closing a side win-dow.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRwhile resettingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. If

someone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are located onthe driver's door. There is also a switch on eachdoor for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door take prece-dence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open manually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull the correspondingswitch and hold it.

X To close fully: pull the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press the switch beyond the point ofresistance and release, automatic operation isstarted in the corresponding direction. You canstop automatic operation by pressing/pullingthe switch again.You can continue to operate the side windowsafter you switch off the engine or remove theSmartKey. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.

Side windows 95

Openingandclosing

Z

The side windows cannot be operated from therear when the override feature for the side win-dows is activated (Y page 67).Information on opening and closing the rollersunblinds on the rear side windows(Y page 317).

Convenience opening

General notesIf the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehi-cle, the convenience opening function is availa-ble.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GOstart function: you can ventilate the vehiclebefore you start driving.To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out thefollowing functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroof or the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel and the rollersunblindRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver'sseat

The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-able when the vehicle is unlocked.

Convenience openingX Press and hold the% button on the Smart-Key until the side windows and the slidingsunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired position.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the% button once moreuntil the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel reaches the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening: releasethe% button.

Convenience closing feature


G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GOstart function: if the SmartKey is in close prox-imity to the vehicle, the convenience closingfunction is available.When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-ously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close the rollersunblinds.Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:Rthe side window (Y page 95)Rthe sliding sunroof or the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel (Y page 99)

Using the SmartKeyX Press and hold the& button until the sidewindows and the sliding sunroof or the pano-rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel arefully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel are closed.

X Vehicles with panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel: press and hold the&button once more until the roller sunblinds ofthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing: releasethe& button.

96 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Using KEYLESS-GOThe driver's door and the door at which the han-dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle. The gap betweenthe SmartKey and the corresponding door han-dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and thesliding sunroof or the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.Make sure you only touch recessed sensorsurface:.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel are closed.

X Vehicles with panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel: touch recessed sensorsurface: on the door handle again until theroller sunblinds of the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing: releaserecessed sensor surface: on the door han-dle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 95).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch onthe door control panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 95).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the respective side window remains closedafter the button is released, then it has beenset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat thesteps above.

Side windows 97

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.


A side window cannot beclosed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannot beclosed and you cannotsee the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side windows are closed without the automatic reversing fea-ture.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notesYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel. In this section, the term "sliding sun-roof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

98 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions mayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could bedamaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged ifwater enters the vehicle interior.

Resonance noises can occur in addition to theusual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof isopen. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side windowslightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.Only for vehicles with panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel:

G WARNINGAt high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-matically lowers slightly at the rear. This couldtrap you or other persons. There is a risk ofinjury. Make sure that nobody reaches intothe sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst thevehicle is in motion.If somebody becomes trapped, immediatelypull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid-ing sunroof lifts during opening.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel. In this section, the term "sliding sun-roof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof.The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts the sliding sunroof during the closingprocess, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-matically. The automatic reversing feature isonly an aid and is no substitute for your attentionwhen closing the sliding roof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during theautomatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation is star-ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop

Sliding sunroof 99

Openingandclosing

Z

automatic operation by pressing or pullingagain.When opening and raising the roof, automaticoperation is only available if the sliding sunroofis in the closed position.The sun protection cover automatically opensalong with the sliding sunroof. You can open orclose the sun protection cover manually whenthe sliding sunroof is raised or closed.You can continue to operate the sliding sunroofafter switching off the engine or removing theSmartKey from the ignition lock. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until the driv-er's or front-passenger door is opened.

Resetting! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be openedor closed fully after resetting, contact a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not movesmoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear(Y page 99).

X Keep the3 switch pressed for anothersecond.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fullyopened and closed again (Y page 99).

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.

Operating the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel

Opening and closing

: To raise; To open= To close/lowerThe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelcan only be operated when the roller sunblind isopen.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation is star-ted in the corresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by pressing or pullingagain.If the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is raised at the rear, it automatically low-ers slightly at higher speeds. The noise level inthe vehicle interior is reduced as a result. At lowspeeds it raises again automatically.You can also temporarily deactivate automaticlowering. To do so, press the3 switch. Thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel rai-ses again automatically.You can continue to operate the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel after you switch offthe engine or remove the SmartKey. This func-tion remains active for five minutes or until youopen a front door.When a roof carrier is mounted the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot beopened. The panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel can still be raised to allow ventilationof the vehicle interior. If the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a


eningandclosing

roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, thesunroof will lower slightly but remain raised atthe rear.

Rain-closing featureThe raised panorama roofwith power tilt/slidingpanel automatically lowers when driving if itstarts to rain. The sliding sunroof is lowereddepending on:Rthe road speed andRthe intensity of the rainYou can manually cancel the automatic closingprocedure. Press or pull the3 switch in anydirection.To raise the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel again, press the3 switch in direc-tion:.The rain-closing feature is then deactivated untilyou:Rpress or pull the3 switch in any directionorRturn the SmartKey to another position in theignition lock (Y page 146)

Operating the roller sunblinds for thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel


G WARNINGParts of the body could become trappedbetween the roller sunblind and frame or slid-ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-ing. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing, make sure that nobody parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-blind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only be

opened and closed when the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel is closed.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts a roller sunblind during the closingprocess, the roller sunblind opens again auto-matically. However, the automatic reversingfeature is only an aid and does not relieve you ofthe responsibility of paying attention when clos-ing the roller sunblinds.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react in par-ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingers. This means that the reversing featurecannot prevent someone being trapped inthese situations. There is a risk of injury.When closing the roller sunblind, make surethat no body parts are in the sweep area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during theautomatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Opening and closing the roller sun-blinds

: To open; To open= To closeYou can only close the roller sunblinds when thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel isclosed.

Sliding sunroof 101

Openingandclosing

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press the3 switch in direction:.Both roller sunblinds open, then the pano-rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel israised.

X Pull the3 switch in direction;.The sunblinds open.

X Pull the3 switch in direction=.The roller sunblinds closewhen the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation is star-ted in the corresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by pressing or pullingagain.

Resetting the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel or the frontroller sunblind! If the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel and the roller sunblinds cannot be fullyopened or closed after resetting, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel or the roller sunblinds if the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel or the frontroller sunblind does not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the point ofresistance in the direction of arrow: untilthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an additionalsecond.

X Pull the3 switch several times in thedirection of arrow: until the roller sunblindsare closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an additionalsecond.

X Make sure that the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds canbe fully opened and closed again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps aboveagain.


eningandclosing

Problems with the sliding sunroofYour vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel. In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof variants.

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Partsof the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing processThe closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact aqualified specialist workshop.


The sliding sunroof orpanorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panelcannot be closed andyou cannot see thecause.

If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel isobstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again to thepoint of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel is closed.The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel isclosed with more force.

If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel isobstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again to thepoint of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel is closed.The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel isclosed without the automatic reversing feature.

Sliding sunroof 103

Openingandclosing

Z

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

Observe the following when adjusting steeringwheel:, seat belt; and driver's seat=:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag aspossible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seatcushion.Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and youcan depress the pedals properly.Rthe back of your head is supported at eye levelby the center of the head restraint.Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the instrumentcluster clearly.

Ryou should have a good overview of trafficconditions.Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the bodyand is routed across the center of your shoul-der and across your hips in the pelvic area.

Further related subjects:R

RElectrical seat adjustment (Y page 106)RAdjusting the steering wheel mechanically(Y page 110) or electrically (Y page 111).RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 50).RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exteriormirrors (Y page 113).RYou can store the seat, steering wheel, exte-rior mirror and head-up display settings withthe memory function (Y page 116).

Seats


G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 51) and "Children in the Vehicle"(Y page 62).

G WARNINGIf the driver's seat is not engaged, it couldmove unexpectedly while the vehicle is inmotion. This could cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

104 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Always make sure that the driver's seat isengaged before starting the vehicle.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. This

poses an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seat heat-ing should also not be used to dry the seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.Do not place sharp objects on the seatcushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Theseats should only be occupied by passen-gers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating materi-als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.

i The rear-compartment head restraints canbe removed (Y page 107).Vehicles without the through-loading feature:the head restraints cannot be removed fromthe rear compartment seats.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

i Related topic:RRear bench seat through-loading feature(Y page 311)

Seats 105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the seats electrically

Electrically adjustable seats with mem-ory function

: Head restraint height; Backrest angle= Seat height? Seat cushion lengthA Seat cushion angleB Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

i Further related subjects:RYou can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 116).RIf PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a betterposition if it was previously in an unfavora-ble position (Y page 60).

Vehicles with AMG Performance Seat: theheight of the head restraints cannot be adjus-ted.

Electrically adjustable seats withoutmemory function

: Backrest angle; Seat height= Seat cushion length? Seat cushion angleA Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

Adjusting the head restraints



G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

General notesPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 104).Do not rotate the head restraints of the front andrear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust theheight and angle of the head restraints to thecorrect position.


gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the head restraint heightmanually

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: in the direc-tion of the arrow and push the head restraintdown to the desired position.

Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-aft position manually

With this function you can adjust the distancebetween the head restraint and the back of theseat occupant's head.X To move forwards: pull the head restraintforwards in the direction of the arrow until itengages in the desired position.

X Tomove backwards: press and hold releasebutton:.

X Push the head restraint back.X Release the release button once the headrestraint is in the desired position.

X Ensure that the head restraint has engagedproperly.

Adjusting the height of the headrestraints electricallyX To adjust the head restraint height: slidethe switch for head restraint adjustment(Ypage106) up or down in the direction of thearrow.

Vehicles with AMG Performance Seat: theheight of the head restraints cannot be adjus-ted.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, pressrelease catch:.

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Installing and removing rear headrestraintsX Release the rear seat backrest and fold itslightly forwards (Y page 311).

X To remove: pull the head restraint up to thestop.

X Press release catch: and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint so thatthe notches on the bar are on the left whenviewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hear itengage in position.

X Fold back the rear seat backrest until itengages.

Seats 107

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: Raises the backrest contour; Softens the backrest contour= Lowers the backrest contour? Hardens the backrest contourYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimum sup-port for your back.

Adjusting the AMG Performance SeatTo adjust the contour of the seat and forimproved lateral support, you can individuallyadjust the front seats.

Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cush-ionX To narrow: press button:.X To broaden: press button;.Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat back-restX To narrow: press button=.X To broaden: press button?.

Seat heating and seat ventilation

Switching the seat heating on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-cate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches off approx-imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 146).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

i If drive program E (Y page 159) is selected,the power of the seat heating is reduced.


gwheelandmirrors

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selected.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 146).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and the slid-ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening"feature (Y page 96). The seat ventilation ofthe driver's seat automatically switches to thehighest level.

i When the vehicle is stationary, the fanspeed can be reduced automatically. Thisreduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

Seats 109

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation


Seat heating or seat ven-tilation has beenswitched off prematurelyor cannot be switchedon.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seatventilation can be switched back on manually.

Steering wheel



G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no key in the igni-tion lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel man-ually

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever: down completely.The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-tion.

X Push release lever: up completely.The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked. Whendoing so, try to push the steering wheel up ordown or try to move it in the fore-and-aftdirection.

110 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the steering wheel electri-cally

: To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment)

; To adjust the steering wheel height

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 112)RStoring settings (Y page 116)ROperating the on-board computer(Y page 236).

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-tion of arrow: or;.Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch offthe ignition and open the driver's door, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.

Steering wheel 111

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the steering wheel heating


The steering wheel heat-ing has switched off pre-maturely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature


G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.Move the steering wheel adjustment lever ifthere is a risk of entrapment by the steeringwheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

Press one of the memory function position but-tons. The adjustment process is stopped. Thisfunction is only available on vehicles with mem-ory function.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting inand out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia sys-tem (see the separate operating instructions).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards when you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's door;the SmartKeymust be in position 0 or 1 in theignition lock (Y page 146)Ropen the driver's door when the ignition isswitched off

i The steering wheel only tilts upwards if thedriving position is stored after the steeringcolumn adjustment has been adjusted(Y page 116).

The most recent driving position of the steeringwheel is stored if:Rthe ignition is switched offRthe setting is storedwith thememory function(Y page 116).

i The steering wheel only moves upwards if ithas not already reached the upper steeringlimiter.

112 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selectedposition when:Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert theSmartKey into the ignition lockRyou close the driver's door when the ignitionis switched onRyou press the Start/Stop button once on vehi-cles with KEYLESS-GO

i The steering wheel only returns to the lastset position if the driving position is storedafter the seat or steering column has beenadjusted (Y page 116).

The most recent driving position of the steeringwheel is stored if:Rthe ignition is switched offRthe setting is storedwith thememory function(Y page 116).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-gered in an accident, the steering column willmove upwards when the driver's door is openedor the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle andrescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is onlyoperational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature isactivated in themultimedia system (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glaremode: flick anti-glare lever: for-wards or back.

Exterior mirrors



G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Mirrors 113

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 146).

X Press button; for the right-hand exteriormirror or button= for the left-hand exteriormirror.The indicator lamp lights up in the button thathas been pressed.The indicator lamp goes out again after sometime. You can adjust the selectedmirror usingadjustment button: as long as the indicatorlamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button: up, down, or tothe left or right until you have adjusted theexterior mirror to the correct position. Youshould have a good overview of traffic condi-tions.

The convex exteriormirrors provide a larger fieldof vision.After the engine has been started, the exteriormirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-dow defroster is switched on and the outsidetemperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically


X Briefly press:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-rior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must bereset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise notfold in when you select the Automatic MirrorFolding function in the multimedia system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 146).

X Briefly press:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyWhen the Automatic Mirror Folding func-tion is activated in the multimedia system (seethe separate operating instructions):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automaticallyagain as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically folding exte-rior mirrors: move the exterior mirror intothe correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exteriormirrors: press and hold button: until youhear a click and then the mirror engaging inposition (Y page 114).The mirror housing is engaged again and youcan adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 113).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.

114 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror onthe driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions are met simul-taneously:Rthe ignition is switched onRincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-sor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior lightingis switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Storing the parking positionYou can position the front-passenger side exte-rior mirror in such a way that you can see therear wheel on that side as soon as you engagereverse gear. You can store this position.

Using reverse gear

: Memory button M; Adjustment button= Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror? Button for the driver's side exterior mirrorX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X Press button= for the exterior mirror on thefront-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button; to adjust the exte-rior mirror to a position that allows you to seethe rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to another posi-tion, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position.

Using the memory buttonYou can store the parking position of the exte-rior mirror on the front-passenger side usingmemory buttonM:. The reverse gearmust notbe engaged.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X Press button= for the exterior mirror on thefront-passenger side.

X Use adjustment button; to adjust the exte-rior mirror to a position that allows you to seethe rear wheel and the curb.

X Press memory button M: and one of thearrows on adjustment button; within threeseconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

Mirrors 115

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat thesteps.

X After successfully storing, reset the drivingposition of the exterior mirror.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button=.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger sidemoves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you have disengagedreverse gearRif you press button? for the exterior mirroron the driver's side

Memory function


G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The memory function can be used at any time,e.g. even when the key is not in the ignition lock.

Storing settingsWith the memory function, you can store up tothree different settings, e.g. for three differentpeople.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrorson the driver's and front-passenger sidesRposition of the head-up display

X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 106).X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel(Y page 111) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 113).

X Press memory button M and one of the stor-age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected presetposition. A tone sounds when the settingshave been completed.

116 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the corresponding storageposition button 1, 2 or 3 until:RseatRsteering wheelRexterior mirrorsRhead-up displayare in the stored position.i If you release the storage position button,the seat, steering wheel and mirror settingfunctions stop immediately. The adjustmentof the head-up display is still carried out.

Memory function 117

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Exterior lighting

General notesIf you wish to drive during the daytime withoutlights, switch off the daytime running lampsfunction in the on-board computer(Y page 250).

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using the:Rlight switchRcombination switch (Y page 119)Ron-board computer (Y page 250)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlampmode, controlled

by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to theÃ position.The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0 in the ignition lock

Automatic headlamp modeÃ is the favored light switch setting. The lightsetting is automatically selected according tothe brightness of the ambient light (exception:poor visibility due to weather conditions such asfog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position1 in the ignition lock: theparking lamps are switched on or off auto-matically depending on the brightness of theambient light.RWith the engine running (USA only): if youhave switched on the Daytime RunningLights function in the on-board computer,the daytime running lamps or the parkinglamps and low-beam headlamps are switchedon or off automatically depending on thebrightness of the ambient light.RWith the engine running (Canada only):depending on the ambient light, the daytimerunning lamps or the parking and low-beamheadlamps are switched on or off automati-cally.

X To switch on the automatic headlamps:turn the light switch to theÃ position.

G WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-ing at all times.Canada only:The daytime running lamps improve the visibilityof your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-ning lamps function is required by law in Can-ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever from adrive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after threeminutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the

118 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

light switch to the T position, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to theL position, themanual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve the visibilityof your vehicle during the day. To do this, thedaytime running lamps function must beswitched on using the on-board computer(Y page 250).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to the T or L position, the manualsettings take precedence over the daytime run-ning lamps.

Low-beam headlampsEven if the light sensor does not detect that it isdark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-lamps switch onwhen the ignition is switched onand the light switch is set to the L position.This is a particularly useful function in the eventof rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-tion 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L position.The green L indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thickfog. Please take note of the country-specificregulations for the use of rear fog lamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 orstart the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L orÃposition.

X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessively dis-charged, the parking lamps or standing lampsare automatically switched off to enable thenext engine start. Always park your vehiclesafely and sufficiently lit according to legalstandards. Avoid the continuous use of theT parking lamps for several hours. If pos-sible, switch on theX right or theW leftstanding lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch to theT position.The green T indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey should not be in the ignition lock orit should be in position 0.

X Turn the light switch to the W (left-handside of the vehicle) or X ((right-hand sideof the vehicle) position.

Combination switch

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, left

Exterior lighting 119

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the direction ofarrow; or?.

X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:turn the light switch to L orÃ.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theÃ position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched onwhen it is dark andthe engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:move the combination switch back to its nor-mal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch, onlythe turn signal lamp on the correspondingside of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:press button:.

The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Cornering light functionThe cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better visi-bility in tight bends, for example. It can only beactivated when the low-beam headlamps areswitched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turnthe steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off after nomore than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notesYou can use this function to set the headlampsto change between low beam and high beamautomatically. The system recognizes vehicleswith their lights on, either approaching from theopposite direction or traveling in front of yourvehicle, and consequently switches the head-lamps from high beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beamheadlamp range depending on the distance tothe other vehicle. Once the system no longerdetects any other vehicles, it reactivates thehigh-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead control panel.


G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late. Inthis or similar situations, the automatic high-

120 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

beam headlamps will not be deactivated oractivated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive HighbeamAssist is only an aid. You areresponsible for adjusting the vehicle's lightingto the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-ditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles can berestricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunctiondisplay lights up if it is dark and the light sen-sor activates the low-beam headlamps.If you are driving at speeds above 25 km/h:If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between the vehi-cle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other roadusers have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16mph (25 km/h) or other road usershave been detected or the roads are ade-quately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-

cator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off: move the combination switchback to its normal position or move the lightswitch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality of theheadlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

: p To switch the left-hand front readinglamp on/off

; | To switch the automatic interior light-ing control on/off

= c To switch the front interior lighting on/off

? u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off

A p To switch the right-hand front readinglamp on/off

Interior lighting 121


Z

Control panel in the grab handle (rearcompartment)

: Reading lamp; p To switch the reading lamp on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept when the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.The color, brightness and display lighting for theambient lighting are set using the multimediasystem (see the separate operating instruc-tions).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on/off: press the | button.When the automatic interior lighting control isactivated, the button is flush with the over-head control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switches on ifyou:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted viathe multimedia system (see the separate oper-ating instructions).

Replacing bulbs


G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if itsglass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designedfor that purpose. Only install spare bulbs of thesame type and the specified voltage.Marks on the glass tube reduce the service lifeof the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube withyour bare hands. If necessary, clean the glasstube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub itoff with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.Do not allow bulbs to come into contact withliquids.Only replace the bulbs listed (Y page 123).Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourselfreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consult aqualified specialist workshop.Headlamps and lights are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times. Havethe headlamp setting checked regularly.Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front andrear light clusters of your vehicle are equippedwith LED light bulbs. Do not replace the bulbsyourself. Contact a qualified specialist work-shop which has the necessary specialist knowl-edge and tools to carry out the work required.

122 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

Overview of bulb typesYou can replace the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Vehicles with halogen headlamps: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W= Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W

Tail lamp (halogen headlamps): Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W; Backup lamp: W 16 W

Replacing front bulbs (vehicles withhalogen headlamps)

Removing and installing the cover in thefront wheel housing

You must remove the cover of the front wheelhousing before you can change the front turnsignal lamp.X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheels inwards.X Turn rotary knob: 180° outwards until itstops using a suitable object.Cover; is released.

X Fold cover; upwards.X To install: insert cover; into the left, rightand two lower catches.

X Turn rotary knob: 180° inwards until itstops using a suitable object.Cover; is locked.

Low-beam headlamps

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise andremove it.

Replacing bulbs 123


Z

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull out.

X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; and turn it clockwise.X Press on housing cover: and turn it to theright.

High-beam headlamps

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull out.

X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; and turn it clockwise.X Press on housing cover: and turn it clock-wise.

Turn signal

X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing(Y page 123).

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise,unlock it and pull out.

X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; and turn it clockwise.X Press on housing cover: turn clockwise andlock.

X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing(Y page 123).

Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim pan-els

Example: right-hand side panelingYou must open the side paneling in the trunkbefore you can replace the bulbs in the taillamps.X To open: release right or left side paneling:at the top and fold it down in the direction ofthe arrow.

X To close: insert side paneling:.

Tail lampsX Switch off the lights.X Open the trunk.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 124).

124 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Pull out the plug.X Turn fender nut: 90° counter-clockwiseand remove the bulb holder.

X Turn signal;: press the bulb into the bulbholder gently, turn it counter-clockwise andremove it from the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder and turn itclockwise.

X Backup lamp=: remove the bulb from thebulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.X Re-install bulb holder.X Turn fender nut: 90° clockwise.X Insert the connector.X Close the side trim panel (Y page 124).

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperon/off! Do not operate the windshield wipers whenthe windshield is dry, as this could damagethe wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-lected on thewindshield can scratch the glass

if wiping takes place when the windshield isdry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, always usewasher fluid when operating the windshieldwipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on thewindshield after the vehicle has been washedin an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-dues may be the reason for this. Clean thewindshield using washer fluid after washingthe vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due tooptical influences and the windshield becom-ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.This could then damage the windshield wiperblades or scratch the windshield.For this reason, you should always switch offthe windshield wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set

to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe

î To wipe with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä orÅ position, the appropriatewiping frequencyis automatically set according to the intensity ofthe rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor ismore sensitive than in the Ä position, caus-ing the windshield wiper to wipe more fre-quently.

Windshield wipers 125


Z

If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield willno longer be wiped properly. This could preventyou from observing the traffic conditions.

Replacing the wiper blades


G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper armhas been folded away from the windshield/rear window.Never fold a windshield wiper arm without awiper blade back onto the windshield/rearwindow.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you release thewiper arm without a wiper blade and it fallsonto the windshield/rear window, the wind-shield/rear window may be damaged by theforce of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, makesure that you touch only the wiper arm of thewiper.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Adjusting the wiper blades so that theyare verticalOn vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 146).

X Set the windshield wiper to position °.X When the wiper arms have reached the verti-cal position, turn the SmartKey to position 0and remove it from the ignition lock.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set thewindshield wiper to the° position.X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly untilthe windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms have reached the verti-cal position, press the Start/Stop button.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

Removing the wiper blades

X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. Withthe other hand, turn wiper blade in directionof arrow: away from the wiper arm as far asit will go.

X Slide catch; in the direction of arrow=until it engages in the removal position with anoticeable click.

X Remove the wiper blade in the direction ofarrow? away from the wiper arm.

126 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Installing the wiper blades

X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper armin the direction of arrow:.

X Slide catch; in the direction of arrow=until it engages in the locking position with anoticeable click.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

X Remove protective film: of the service indi-cator on the tip of the wiper blade.

If the color of the service indicator changes fromblack to yellow, the wiper blades should bereplaced.

i The duration of the color change variesdepending on the terms of use.

Windshield wipers 127


Z

Problems with the windshield wipers


The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wipermovement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock.

orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spray noz-zles no longer hits thecenter of the windshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.

128 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Overview of climate control systems

General notesObserve the settings recommended on the fol-lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fogup.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature andair humidity in the vehicle interior. The interiorfilter cleans the air, thus improving the interiorclimate.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis only available when the engine is running.Optimum climate control is only achieved withthe side windows and roof closed.If you start the engine using your smartphone,the last selected climate control setting is reac-tivated (Y page 149).The residual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switched off(Y page 137).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period duringwarm weather, e.g. using the convenienceopening feature (Y page 96). This will speedup the cooling process and the desired inte-rior temperature will be reached morequickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most parti-cles of dust and soot and completely filtersout pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutantsand odors. A clogged filter reduces theamount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.For this reason, you should always observethe interval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-let.

i It is possible that the blower may be activa-ted automatically 60minutes after the Smart-Key has been removed depending on variousfactors, e.g. the outside temperature. Thevehicle is then ventilated for 30minutes to drythe climate control system.

Overview of climate control systems 129

Climatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Example: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 134); Sets the air distribution (Y page 134)= Sets the airflow (Y page 135)

Switches off climate control (Y page 132)? Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 133)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 135)B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 302)

PLUG-IN HYBRID: switch! residual heat on/off (Y page 137)C Switches the rear window defroster on or off (Y page 136)D All vehicles except PLUG‑IN HYBRID: switch0 synchronization on/off (Y page 135)

PLUG-IN HYBRID: activate or deactivate the& "immediate pre-entry climate control"(Y page 143)

E Switches air-recirculation mode manually on or off (Y page 137)F Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 133)G Sets the temperature, right (Y page 134)

130 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

ExampleFront control panel

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 134); Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 134)= Sets the airflow (Y page 135)

Switches off climate control (Y page 132)? Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 133)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 135)B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 302)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 137)C Switches the rear window defroster on or off (Y page 136)D All vehicles except PLUG‑IN HYBRID (Canada only): switch¿ cooling with dehumidification

on/off (Y page 133)PLUG-IN HYBRID: activate or deactivate& "immediate pre-entry climate control"(Y page 143)

E Switches air-recirculation mode manually on or off (Y page 137)F Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 134)G Sets the temperature, right (Y page 134)

Rear control panelH Sets the temperature (Y page 134)I DisplayJ Sets the airflow (Y page 135)

Overview of climate control systems 131

Climatecontrol

Notes on using automatic climatecontrol

Optimum use of the automatic climatecontrolThe following contains notes and recommenda-tions on optimum use of the dual-zone or 3-zoneautomatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theÃrocker switch. The indicator lamp above theÃ rocker switch lights up. The "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function is not acti-vated automatically in automatic mode. Ifnecessary, activate this function(Y page 133).RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" functionbriefly until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ifthere are unpleasant outside odors or when ina tunnel. Thewindows could otherwise fog up,since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle inair-recirculation mode.RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate con-trol or PLUG-IN HYBRID: use the "residualheat" function if you want to heat or ventilatethe vehicle interior when the ignition isswitched off. The residual heat function canonly be activated or deactivated with the igni-tion switched off. The residual heat function isswitched off when the ignition is switched on.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch (exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles)You can choose between various drive programswith the DYNAMIC SELECT switch(Y page 154).If you have selected drive program E:Rthe cooling output is reduced when coolingRwhen heating, the electrical heater booster isdeactivated and heat output is reduced as aresultRthe rear window defroster running time isreduced

If you have selected drive program C, S or S+,the current climate settings are maintained.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the climatecontrol system only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require the full climate control output,you can switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button (Y page 151).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Activating/deactivating climate con-trol

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, the airsupply and air circulation are also switched off.The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch offclimate control only brieflySwitch on climate control primarily using theÃ rocker switch (Y page 133).

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 orhigher using theH rocker switch.

X To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 usingtheH rocker switch.

i 3-zone automatic climate control: when cli-mate control is switched off, "OFF" appears inthe rear-compartment display.

132 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will notbe cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up morequickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.For vehicles without a hybrid drive system, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is avail-ablewhen the engine is running. For hybrid vehicles, the "Coolingwith air dehumidification" functionis also available via the electric refrigerant compressor when the engine is not running. The air insidethe vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normaland not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Activating/deactivatingX Press the¿ rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up or goes out.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function


The indicator lamp overthe¿ rocker switchflashes three times orremains off. The coolingwith air dehumidificationfunction cannot be acti-vated via the multimediasystem any longer(Y page 303).

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automaticmode, the set temperature ismain-tained automatically at a constant level. Thesystemautomatically regulates the temperatureof the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-tribution.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis activated automatically in automatic mode.

Automatic controlX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X Set the desired temperature using thewrocker switch on the front control unit.

X To activate: press rocker switchÃ up ordown.The indicator lamp above theÃ rockerswitch lights up.

X To switch to manual operation: press theH rocker switch up or down.

orX Press the upper or lower section of the_rocker switch.The indicator lamp above theÃ rockerswitch goes out.

In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow orair distribution manually, the indicator lamp

Operating the climate control systems 133

Climatecontrol

above theÃ rocker switch goes out. Thefunction which has not been changed manually,however, continues to be controlled automati-cally. When the manually set function switchesback to automatic mode, the indicator lampabove theÃ rocker switch lights up again.

Adjusting the climate mode settingsThis function is only available with dual-zoneautomatic climate control on vehicles for Can-ada.In automatic mode you can select the followingairflow settings for the driver's and front-passenger areas:FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler settingMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-

free settingX To set: set the climate mode using the mul-timedia system (Y page 303).

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature for the driver's and front-passengerside can be set individually.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X To increase or reduce: press thewrocker switch up or down.Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate control

General notesYou can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswellas for the rear compartment.

Setting the temperature in the front com-partment using the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X To increase or reduce: press thewrocker switch up or down.

Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the temperature in the rear com-partment using the rear control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X To increase or reduce: press the upper orlower section of thew rocker switch onthe rear control panel (Y page 131).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).The set temperature appears on the rear-compartment display.

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side air

ventsO Directs air through the footwell air ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell ventsa Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents_ Directs air through the defroster, center,

side and footwell ventsb Directs air through the defroster, center

and side air ventsW Sets the air distribution to automatic

Setting3-zone automatic climate control: you can setthe air distribution separately for the driver'sand front-passenger side.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2(Y page 146).

X Press the_ rocker switch up or down.The various air distribution settings appear inthe multimedia system.


Setting the airflow

Adjusting the front-compartment air-flowX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X To increase or reduce: press theHrocker switch up or down.

Setting the rear compartment airflowusing the rear control panelIt is only possible to set the airflow using the rearcontrol panel on vehicles with 3-zone automaticclimate control. You can set the airflow sepa-rately for the front and rear compartment.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X To increase or reduce: press the upper orlower section of theK orI rockerswitch on the rear control panel.The selected airflow level appears in the reardisplay.

Activating or deactivating the syn-chronization function

General notesThe "Synchronization" function is only availablewith dual-zone automatic climate control and 3-zone automatic climate control.Climate control can be set centrally using thesynchronization function. The temperature set-ting is adopted for the front-passenger side. For3-zone automatic climate control, the tempera-ture setting is adopted for the front-passengerside and rear compartment.

Activating/deactivating

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Press the upper or lower section of the0rocker switch.The indicator lamp above the0 rockerswitch lights up or goes out.

The synchronization function deactivates if thesettings for the front-passenger side arechanged.

3-zone automatic climate controlX Activate or deactivate the "Synchronization"function using the multimedia system(Y page 304).

The synchronization function is deactivated:Rif the settings for the front-passenger side arechangedRif the settings for the rear compartment arechanged

Defrosting the windshield

General notesYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or frontside windows on the inside.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" functionas soon as the windshield is clear again.

Switching the "Windshield defrosting"function on or offX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X To activate: press the¬ rocker switch onthe front control unit up or down.The indicator lamp above the¬ rockerswitch lights up. The current climate controlsettings are deactivated.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield and frontside windowsRair-recirculation mode offi If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehumid-ification" function is activated. In this case,the indicator lamp above the¿ rockerswitch remains switched off.

X To switch off: press the¬ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the¬ rockerswitch goes out. The previously selected set-tings are restored. Air-recirculation moderemains deactivated.


Climatecontrol

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function with the¿ rocker switch.

X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.

X If thewindows continue to fog up, activate the"Windshield defrosting" function using the¬ rocker switch.i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.i If you clean the windows regularly, they donot fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off as soonas the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rearwindow defroster switches off automaticallyafter several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear windowdefroster may switch off.


X Press the¤ rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp above the¤ rockerswitch lights up or goes out.


Problems with the rear window defroster


The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defrostercan be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off

General notesYou can also temporarily deactivate the flow offresh air manually if unpleasant odors are enter-ing the vehicle from outside. The air alreadyinside the vehicle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-dows can fog up more quickly, in particular atlow temperatures. Only use air-recirculationmode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-ging up.


X To activate: press theg rocker switch upor down.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch lights up.

Air-recirculation mode switches on automati-cally:Rat high outside temperaturesRat high levels of pollution (3-zone automaticclimate control only)Rin a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation systemonly)

The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch is not lit when automatic air-recirculationmode is activated. Outside air is added afterabout 30 minutes.X To deactivate: press theg rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch goes out.

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-cally:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 41 ‡(5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notesThe residual heat function is only available with3-zone automatic climate control on vehicles forCanada.Once the engine is switched off, it is possible tomake use of the residual heat of the engine tocontinue heating or ventilating the front com-partment of the vehicle for approximately30 minutes. The heating or ventilation timedepends on the interior temperature that hasbeen set.

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock or remove it (Y page 146).

X To switch on: press the! rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the! rockerswitch lights up.

The blower will run at a low speed regardless ofthe airflow setting.If you activate the residual heat function at hightemperatures, only the ventilation will be acti-vated. The blower runs at medium speed.


Climatecontrol

X To switch off: press the! rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the! rockerswitch goes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Perfume atomizer

Operating the perfume atomizer

G WARNINGIf children open the vial, they could drink theperfume or it could come into contact withtheir eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do notleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consulta doctor. If perfume comes into contact withyour eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with cleanwater. If you continue to experience difficul-ties, consult a doctor.

H Environmental noteFull vials must not be dis-posed of with householdwaste. They must be collec-ted separately and recycledto protect the environment.

Dispose of full vials in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner and take them to aharmful substance collec-tion point.

: Vial lid; VialThe perfume atomizer helps to improve drivingcomfort.Via the multimedia system you can:Rswitch the perfume atomizer on or off(Y page 303)Rregulate the perfume intensity (Y page 303).The following conditions can affect your percep-tion of the perfume intensity:Roperating mode of the climate control systemRinterior temperatureRtime of year or dayRair humidityRphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fati-gue or hunger

The perfume atomizer can only be operatedwhen the climate control system is switched onand is only active when the glove box is closed.The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-fil-led vial. You can also choose from a variety offilled perfume vials and an empty vial which youcan fill yourself.If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe theseparate information sheet attached to the vial.

! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benzinterior perfumes, observe the manufactur-ers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.

Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it isempty. Dispose of the used vial after use.X To insert the perfume vial: open the glovebox (Y page 309).

X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far asit will go.

X To remove the perfume vial: pull out theperfume vial.


X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid ofthe empty perfume vial to refill it yourself.

X Refill the vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz.(15 ml) of the desired liquid perfume.

X Screw the lid back on to the vial.

! Only refill the vial when you are outside thevehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could dripinto the interior and contaminate it.

Always refill the empty refillable vial with thesame perfume. Otherwise, you might not ach-ieve optimum results from the perfume atom-izer.


Climatecontrol

Z

Problems with the perfume atomizer


The vehicle interior is notperfumed although theperfume atomizer is acti-vated.

The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it willgo.X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

The perfume vial is not filled sufficiently.X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.X Use a new pre-filled vial.X Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml)of the same perfume.

The perfume atomizer is faulty.X Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

IonizationIonization is used to purify the air in the vehicleinterior and attain an improved interior climate.The ionization of the interior air is odorless andcannot be perceived directly in the vehicle inte-rior.You can switch ionization on or off using themultimedia system (Y page 303).Ionization can only be operated when the auto-matic climate control is switched on. The side airvent on the driver's side must be open.


Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey

General notesThe "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" function is only available in PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles.Before getting in, the driver's seat area or the whole interior can be briefly warmed or ventilated inadvance with the air from the air vents being pre-cooled.The high-voltage battery must be sufficiently charged before "Pre-entry climate control via Smart-Key" can be activated.When the vehicle is pre-cooled, the following functions are activated if required:RClimate control systemRBlowerRSeat ventilationWhen the vehicle is pre-heated, the following functions are activated if required:RClimate control systemRBlowerRSeat heatingRSteering wheel heatingRExterior mirror heatingRRear window defrosterIf you have switched on the perfume atomizer or ionization using the multimedia system, these willbe activated together with pre-entry climate control.Activate the perfume atomizer (Y page 303).Activate ionization (Y page 303).

Activating or deactivating "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey"Before "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" can be activated, youmust activate the function viathe multimedia system (Y page 303).X To activate pre-entry climate control via SmartKey: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey orKEYLESS-GO.The climate control functions are activated for up to 5 minutes for pre-heating and pre-cooling.

To deactivate "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey": "Pre-entry climate control via Smart-Key" switches off automatically when the engine is started.The following functions remain active after the engine is started:RSeat heating (heating)RSeat ventilation (ventilation)RPerfume atomizerRIonizationAn activated "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" function can be deactivated using the rockerswitch (Y page 143).


Climatecontrol

Z

Problems with "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey"


"Pre-entry climate con-trol via SmartKey" can-not be switched on orhas switched itself off.

The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery is under the speci-fied minimum condition of charge.X Start the engine when the vehicle is at a standstill.The engine powers the electric motor. The electric motor operatesas a generator. The high-voltage battery is being charged.

Further information on charging the high-voltage battery via:Ra mains socket (Y page 171)Ra charging station (Y page 174)Ra wallbox (Y page 173)

"Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" has been started more thantwice with the engine switched off.X Switch on the engine and let it run for more than ten seconds.X Try again to switch on "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey".

Pre-entry climate control at time ofdeparture



General notesThe "Pre-entry climate control at departuretime" function is only available in PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles.You can use the "Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time" function to cool or heat thevehicle interior if the engine is not running.The "Pre-entry climate control at departuretime" function can be activated regardless ofwhether or not the vehicle is connected to anelectric power supply. The condition of charge ofthe high-voltage batterymust be higher than thespecified minimum condition of charge, how-ever.When the vehicle is connected to an electricpower supply, priority is given to charging thehigh-voltage battery to the specified minimum

charge. "Pre-entry climate control at departuretime" is only activated subsequently.The running time of the "Pre-entry climate con-trol at departure time" function may be reducedif:Rthe vehicle is not connected to an electricpower supply andRthe high-voltage battery is not fully chargedWith active "Pre-entry climate control at depar-ture time" the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery can be reduced, even if thecharge cable connector is connected.When the vehicle is cooled, the following func-tions are activated if required:RClimate control systemRBlowerRSeat ventilationWhen the vehicle is heated, the following func-tions are activated if required:RClimate control systemRBlowerRSeat heatingRSteering wheel heatingRExterior mirror heatingRRear window defrosterIf you have switched on the perfume atomizer orthe ionization using the multimedia system,these will be activated together with the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time".


Activate the perfume atomizer (Y page 303).Activate ionization (Y page 303).

Setting the departure timeYou can set the departure time using the on-board computer or via the online access to thevehicle. The activation of the "Pre-entry climatecontrol at departure time" function can be linkedto this departure time. Your vehicle will then becooled or heated until the desired temperatureis reached in time for the set departure time."Pre-entry climate control at departure time"willbe activated a maximum of 55 minutes beforedeparture. If the departure is delayed, the vehi-cle will be heated or cooled for another fiveminutes.X To set the departure time: set the departuretime using the on-board computer(Y page 249). Set the departure time via theonline access to the vehicle (Y page 176).

X To activate or deactivate "Pre-entry cli-mate control at departure time": activateor deactivate "Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time" via the multimedia system(Y page 303). Set the "Pre-entry climate con-trol at departure time" via the online access tothe vehicle (Y page 176).

When activating the "Pre-entry climate controlat departure time" function: you can selectwhether only the driver's area or also the front-passenger area should be heated or cooled.The "Pre-entry climate control at departuretime" function switches off automatically whenthe vehicle is started. The following functionsremain active:RSeat heatingRSeat ventilationRSteering wheel heatingRPerfume atomizerRIonizationSwitching off "Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time": the activated "Pre-entry cli-mate control at departure time" can be switchedoff using the rocker switch (Y page 143).

Activating or deactivating "Immediatepre-entry climate control" using therocker switchYou can activate "Immediate pre-entry climatecontrol" even if the vehicle interior is already at

the desired temperature. This means, for exam-ple, that the vehicle interior continues to becooled or heated if the journey is interrupted forup to 50minutes and the interior temperature iskept constant.

X To activate or deactivate "Immediate pre-entry climate control": press rockerswitch: up or down.The blue or red indicator lamp above therocker switch lights up or goes out.

The colors of the indicator lamps in rockerswitch: have the following meanings:Rblue: cooling activatedRred: heating activatedRyellow: departure time is preselected

Air vents


G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield andthe hood free of blockages, such as ice, snowor leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles inthe vehicle interior.

Air vents 143

Climatecontrol

Z

Setting the air vents

Example: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent, left= Control for left side air ventX To open or close: turn thumbwheel= to theleft or right as far as it will go.

X To adjust the air direction: hold side airvent; by thumbwheel= and move it up ordown or to the left or right.

144 Air ventsClimatecontrol

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and drivingsafety systems adjusts automatically while acertain distance is being driven after the vehiclehas been delivered or after repairs. Full systemeffectiveness is not reached until the end of thisteach-in procedure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with its per-formance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicleand engine speeds for the first 1000 miles(1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,during this period.RWhen changing gears manually, change up ingood time, before the tachometer needle rea-chesÔ of the way to the red area of the tach-ometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brakethe vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the point of resistance (kickdown).RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km), drive in drive program E.

Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMGvehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),drive in program C.

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and accelerate thevehicle to full speed.You should also observe these notes on break-ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train onyour vehicle have been replaced.

Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed.

Self-locking rear axle differential(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking dif-ferential on the rear axle.Change the oil to improve protection of the rearaxle differential:Rafter a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles(3,000 km)Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or 3 yearsThese oil changes prolong the service life of thedifferential. Have the oil change carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Driving



G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

Driving 145

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehiclestationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid highengine speeds and driving at full throttle untilthe engine has reached its operating temper-ature.Only shift the automatic transmission to thedesired drive position when the vehicle is sta-tionary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slippery roads.You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oiltemperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the max-imum engine speed is restricted in order toprotect the engine. To protect the engine andmaintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv-ing at full throttle when the engine is cold.

Observe the important safety notes for PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles (Y page 44).

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignitionlock even if it is not the correct SmartKey forthe vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.The engine cannot be started.

Vehicles with AIRPANEL: you can open theshutters in the radiator trim by turning theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Afterapproximately 120 seconds the shutters openautomatically. Further information on openingand cleaning the shutters (Y page 339).

Start/Stop button

General notesWhen you insert the Start/Stop button into theignition lock, the system needs approximatelytwo seconds recognition time. You can then usethe Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button several times insuccession corresponds to the different keypositions in the ignition lock. This is only thecase if you are not depressing the brake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example, whenstarting the engine.

146 DrivingDrivingandparking

To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartKey:Rthe Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock.Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 82).

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryouwill not be able to start the enginewith theStart/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the buttonon the front door (Y page 88), you can continueto start the engine with the Start/Stop button.The engine can be switched off while the vehicleis in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This functionoperates independently of the ECO start/stopautomatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. Further information on situations where anindicator lamp either fails to go out after starting

the engine or lights up while driving(Y page 288).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the SmartKeybeing removed from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You can nowactivate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stopbutton: twice.The ignition is switched on.

The ignition is switched off again if:Ryou do not start the engine from this positionwithin 15 minutesRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position

Removing the Start/Stop buttonYou can remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock and start the vehicle as normalusing the SmartKey.It is only possible to switch between Start/Stopbutton mode and SmartKey operation when thetransmission is in position P.X Remove Start/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-ton from the ignition lock when you leave thevehicle. You should, however, always take theSmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. Aslong as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop buttonRthe electrically powered equipment can beoperated

Driving 147

Drivingandparking

Z

Starting the engine


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator when start-ing the engine.

General notesThe catalytic converter is preheated for up to30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of theengine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P(Y page 156).The transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display shows P (Y page 157).

i You can start the engine in transmissionposition P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyTo start the engine using the SmartKey insteadof the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stopbutton out of the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the ignitionlock and release it as soon as the engine isrunning (Y page 146).

If the engine will not start:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Reinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lockafter a short waiting period.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).The indicator lamps in the instrument clusterlight up (Y page 286).

X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the ignitionlock (Ypage146) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

Starting procedure with the Start/StopbuttonThe Start/Stop button is only available on vehi-cles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO startfunction.The Start/Stop button can be used to start thevehiclemanually without inserting the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock. The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in the ignition lock and theSmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode forstarting the engine operates independently ofthe ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-tion.You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. Switch off the engine and alwaystake the SmartKey with you when leaving the


vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time.Pay attention to the important safety notes.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 146).The engine starts.

Starting procedure via smartphoneObserve the important safety notes on startingthe engine (Y page 148).You can also start your engine via your smart-phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, thepreviously selected climate control setting isactivated. In this way you can cool or heat theinterior of the vehicle before starting the jour-ney.Only start the engine via your smartphone if it issafe to start and run the engine where your vehi-cle is parked.Observe the legal stipulations in the area whereyour vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart-phone may be limited to certain countries orregions.You can execute amaximum of two consecutivestarting attempts via your smartphone. If youinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, youcan carry out two more starting attempts.Once you have started the engine, you canswitch the engine off via your smartphone at anytime.You can only start the engine via your smart-phone if:Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lockRpark position P is selectedRthe accelerator pedal is not depressedRthe anti-theft alarm system is not activatedRthe panic alarm is not activatedRthe hazard warning lamps are switched offRthe hood is closed.Rthe doors are closed and lockedRthe windows and sliding sunroof are closedAlso make sure that:Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filledRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

G WARNINGLimbs could be crushed or trapped if theengine is started unintentionally during ser-

vice or maintenance work. There is a risk ofinjury.Always secure the engine against uninten-tional starting before carrying out mainte-nance or repair work.

Make sure that the engine cannot be started viayour smartphone before carrying out mainte-nance or repairs. You can prevent an enginestart via your smartphone, for example, if you:Rswitch on the hazard warning lampsRdo not lock the doorsRopen the hood.

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pullingaway.The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulledaway. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature, see the Digital Operator's Manual.It is only possible to shift the transmission fromposition P to the desired position if you depressthe brake pedal. Only then is the parking lockreleased. If you do not depress the brake pedal,the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved butthe parking lock remains engaged.

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speedsafter a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-verter to reach its operating temperaturemore quickly.

Information on the automatic release of theelectric parking brake (Y page 178).

Driving 149

Drivingandparking

Z

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling away for-wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holdsthe vehicle for a short time after you haveremoved your foot from the brake pedal. Thisgives you enough time to move your foot fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and todepress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function (all vehiclesexcept PLUG‑IN HYBRID)

IntroductionThis section describes the ECO start/stop func-tion for all vehicles except PLUG-IN HYBRIDvehicles. Information on the ECO start/stopfunction on PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles(Y page 231).The ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stoppedunder certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when the driverwants to pull away again. The ECO start/stopfunction thereby helps you to reduce the fuelconsumption and emissions of your vehicle.


G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted

automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayThe ECO start/stop function is activated when-ever you start the engine using the SmartKey orthe Start/Stop button.If the engine has been switched off automati-cally by the ECO start/stop function, theèECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-play.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stopfunction is only available in drive program C.

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera-ture.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield is notfogged upwhen the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

All of the vehicle's systems remain active whenthe engine is stopped automatically.


The HOLD function can also be activated if theengine has been switched off automatically. It isthen not necessary to continue applying thebrakes during the automatic stop phase. Whenyou depress the accelerator pedal, the enginestarts automatically and the braking effect ofthe HOLD function is deactivated.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): automatic engine switch-off can takeplace a maximum of four times in a row (initialstop, then three subsequent stops).Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-secutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimi-ted.

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function bypressing the ECO buttonRyou switch to drive program S+ (all vehiclesexcept Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Ryou switch to drive program RACE(S‑MODEL),S+ orS (Mercedes-AMGvehicles)Ryou permanently activatemanual gearshifting(Y page 161) (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Rin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and theHOLD function is notactiveRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear RRyou move the transmission out of position PRyou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-er's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's condition of charge is too lowShifting the transmission to position P does notstart the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECOstart/stop function

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will thennot be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle stops.Selecting drive programS+ deactivates the ECOstart/stop function. If you press ECO button:,the ECO start/stop function is activated.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will then

Driving 151

Drivingandparking

Z

not be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle stops.The ECO start/stop function is deactivated, if:Ryou switch to drive program RACE(S‑MODEL), S+ or S (Y page 154)Ryou permanently activatemanual gearshifting(Y page 161)

If you have permanently activated manual gear-shifting and then press ECO button:, the ECOstart/stop function is activated.

AMG sports exhaust system(Mercedes AMG vehicles)You can choose between different AMG sportsexhaust system volumes using the position ofthe exhaust flap.Each time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, the quietest set-ting is activated.

Setting the volume:X Press button:.If you select the loudest setting, indicatorlamp lights up;.

You can also adjust the position of the exhaustflap using the:RDYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 154)Rmultimedia system


Problems with the engine


The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again:X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 148). Avoid excessively longand frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain thebattery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 352).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Try to start the engine again (Y page 148).If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not runningsmoothly and is misfir-ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converterand damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The coolant temperaturegauge shows a valueabove 248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is nolonger being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 333). Observe the warning notesas you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Driving 153

Drivingandparking

Z

DYNAMIC SELECT switch

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMGvehicles and PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-cles)Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change thedrive program. Depending on the drive programselected the following vehicle characteristicswill change:Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-ment)Rthe suspensionRthe steeringRthe availability of the ECO start/stop functionRthe climate control:

- the climate control settings- the rear window defroster operation period- the performance of the seat heating

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, drive programC isactivated. For further information about startingthe engine, see (Y page 148).

X Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch: forward orback until the desired drive program is selec-ted.The status icon of the selected drive programis shown in the multifunction display.In addition, the current drive programsettingsare displayed briefly in themultimedia systemdisplay.i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-tion is deactivated at the factory due to theavailable fuel grade. In this case, the ECOstart/stop function is not available in anydrive program, regardless of the display in themultimedia system display.

Available drive programs:

I Individual Individual settings

S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty drivingcharacteristics

S Sport Sporty driving characteris-tics

C Comfort Comfortable and economi-cal driving characteristics

E Economy Particularly economicaldriving characteristics

Additional information for drive programs(Y page 159).You can also change gear yourself using thesteering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-mation on the manual drive program(Y page 161).

PLUG‑IN HYBRIDInformation on the DYNAMIC SELECT switch onPLUG‑IN HYBRID vehicles (Y page 229).


General informationSelect the drive program using the DYNAMICSELECT switch.Available drive programs:

RACE(S‑MODEL)

Driving characteristics suit-able for the racetrack

S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty drivingcharacteristics

S Sport Sporty driving characteris-tics

C Comfort Comfortable and economi-cal driving characteristics


Depending on the drive program selected thefollowing vehicle characteristics will change:Rthe drive (engine management)Rthe transmission management

154 DYNAMIC SELECT switchDrivingandparking

RESP®Rthe suspensionRthe position of the exhaust flapRthe steeringRthe availability of the ECO start/stop functionRthe driver assistance systemsRthe availability of gliding modeFurther information for automatic drive programcharacteristics (Y page 159).Additionally, in drive program I you can config-ure the respective vehicle characteristics usingthe multimedia system. You can find informa-tion about this in the Digital Operator's Manual.Each time you start the engine with the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, drive programC isactivated. For further information about startingthe engine, see (Y page 148).

Selecting the drive program

X Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch: forward orback until the desired drive program is selec-ted.The status icon of the selected drive programis shown in the multifunction display.In addition, the current drive programsettingsare displayed briefly in themultimedia systemdisplay.

You can also change gear yourself using thesteering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-mation on the manual drive program(Y page 161).

Additional settings

: Position of the exhaust flap (Y page 152); ECO start/stop function (Y page 150)= ESP® (Y page 73)? Suspension (Y page 197)A Permanent activation ofmanual gearshifting

(Y page 161)When you press buttons: -A the corre-sponding setting is selected. The DYNAMICSELECT switch setting is overwritten.These settings will also be maintained if youchange with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch indrive program RACE (S-MODEL), S+, S or C.If you switch to drive program I, all stored char-acteristics will be accepted. This is also the caseif you have previously pressed one of buttons:-A.

Automatic transmission


G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.

Automatic transmission 155

Drivingandparking

Z

After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Observe the important safety notes for PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles (Y page 44).

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to itsoriginal position. The current transmission posi-tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmissionposition display in the multifunction display(Y page 157).

Engaging park position P! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicleis moving, do not shift the automatic trans-mission directly from D to R, from R to D ordirectly to P. The automatic transmissioncould otherwise be damaged.

X Push theDIRECTSELECT lever in the directionof arrow P.

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKeyand remove the SmartKeyRyou switch off the engine using the SmartKeyor using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door or front-passenger doorRthe driver's door is openedwhen the vehicle isstationary or driving at very low speed and thetransmission is in position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-mission shifts automatically to transmissionposition P if the HOLD function or DISTRONICPLUS is activated. Observe the information onthe HOLD function (Y page 195) and onDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 189).

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X If the transmission is in position D or N: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever up past the firstpoint of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever up past the first point of resistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-tion on the ECO start/stop function(Y page 150).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.

156 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to thefirst point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever up or down to the first point of resist-ance.

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-er's door or the front-passenger door or removethe SmartKey from the ignition, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.With the Start/Stop button: if you then openthe driver's door or the front-passenger door,the automatic transmission shifts to P automat-ically.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button:remove the Start-Stop button from the igni-tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX If the transmission is in position R or N: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever down past the firstpoint of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever down past the first point of resistance.

Transmission position and drive pro-gram displayThe current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear in the multifunction display.

: Status symbol drive program; Transmission position= GearThe arrows in the transmission position displayshowhowand intowhich transmission positionsyou can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.If the transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display is not working, you should pullaway carefully to check whether the desiredtransmission position is engaged. For this pur-pose, we recommend selecting transmissionpositionD and drive program E (drive programCin Mercedes-AMG vehicles) or S.


Drivingandparking

Z

Transmission positions

B Park positionThis prevents the vehicle from rollingaway when stopped.Only shift the transmission into posi-tion P when the vehicle is stationary(Y page 156). The parking lockshould not be used as a brake whenparking. Always apply the electronicparking brake in addition to the park-ing lock in order to secure the vehi-cle.Park position P is automaticallyengaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using theSmartKey and remove the Smart-KeyRyou switch off the engine using thekey or using the Start/Stop buttonand open the driver's door or front-passenger doorRthe driver's door is opened whenthe vehicle is stationary or drivingat very low speed and the trans-mission is in position D or R

If the vehicle electronics aremalfunc-tioning, the transmission may belocked in position P. Have the vehicleelectronics checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion R when the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brake pedal will allowyou tomove the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shiftthe transmission to position N if thevehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.on icy roads.If you switch the engine off with thetransmission in position R or D, theautomatic transmission shifts to Nautomatically.

! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmission changesgear automatically. All forward gearsare available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shiftingbehavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive programRthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

Double-clutch functionWhen shifting down, the double-clutch functionis active regardless of the currently selecteddrive program. The double-clutch function


reduces load change reactions and is conduciveto a sporty driving style. The sound generated bythe double-clutch function depends on the driveprogram selected.

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking the vehicle free by shifting back andforth between transmission positions D and Rcan help to free a vehicle that has become stuckin mud or snow.The vehicle's engine management restrictsswitching between transmission positions Dand R to speeds up to a maximum of 5 mph(9 km/h).To shift back and forth between transmissionpositions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECTlever up and down past the point of resistance.

Gliding mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Gliding mode is characterized by the following:Rthe combustion engine is disconnected fromthe drive train.Rthe engine speed corresponds to the idlingspeed.Rstatus icon C goes out and status icon: isdisplayed in the multifunction display(Y page 157).

In drive program C, you can deactivate and acti-vate gliding mode using the ECO button(Y page 151).

Gliding mode can be activated under the follow-ing conditions:Rthe speed is within a suitable range.Rthe course of the road is suitable, e.g. thereare no steep up or downhill gradients.Ryou are no longer depressing the acceleratorpedal.

Gliding mode is deactivated under the followingconditions:Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou depress the brake pedal.Ryou use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switchthe transmission position (Y page 156).Ryou switch to drive program RACE(S‑MODEL), S+ or S (Y page 154).Ryou activate manual gearshifting(Y page 161).Ryou leave the suitable speed range.

i If you have selected the "Comfort" settingfor the drive (engine management) in driveprogram I, you can also activate glidingmode.You can find information about this in the Dig-ital Operator's Manual.

Drive programs

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMGvehicles)

Drive program I (Individual)In drive program I the following properties of thedrive program can be selected:Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-ment)Rthe suspensionRthe steeringRthe availability of the ECO start/stop functionRthe climate control:Information about configuring drive program Iwith the multimedia system can be found in theDigital Operator's Manual.

i To permanently select the gears in driveprogram I using the steering wheel paddleshifters, select theM (manual) setting for thedrive.


Drivingandparking

Z

Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty drivingcharacteristics.Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.the fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiffspringing and damping settings (vehicles withAIRMATIC).Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.

Drive program S (Sport)Drive program S is characterized by the follow-ing:Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-istics.Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.the fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits hard springing anddamping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC).

Drive program C (Comfort)Drive program C is characterized by the follow-ing:Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economicalhandling characteristics.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless the accel-erator pedal is depressed fully.Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability,for example on slippery road surfaces.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.The vehicle is driven in the low engine speedrange and the wheels are less likely to spin.

Drive program E (Economy)Drive program E is characterized by the follow-ing:Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economicalhandling characteristics.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless the accel-erator pedal is depressed fully.Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability,for example on slippery road surfaces.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.The vehicle is driven in the low engine speedrange and the wheels are less likely to spin.Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnec-ted from the drive train. The vehicle useskinetic energy and consumes less fuel (over-run mode).Rthe performance of air-conditioning systemand heating are reduced.


Drive program RACE (S‑MODEL)The RACE drive program is characterized by thefollowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits driving characteristicssuitable for the racetrack.Rall vehicle systems are set for maximumsportiness.Rthe gearshift recommendation gives youinformation for slowly warming up the driveassemblies and for adopting a fuel-efficientdriving style (Y page 161). You can follow thegearshift recommendations at all times andshift gear accordingly using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. On the basis of thegearshift recommendation, using the steeringwheel paddle shifters, you can optimize thedrive train and engine operating mode at anytime.Rif you have selected a gear manually, this willbe maintained until the vehicle speed increa-ses or decreases dramatically.Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.the fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.


Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiffspringing and damping settings (vehicles withAIRMATIC).Rgliding mode is not available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.

Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty drivingcharacteristics.Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.the fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiffspringing and damping settings (vehicles withAIRMATIC).Rgliding mode is not available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.

Drive program S (Sport)Drive program S is characterized by the follow-ing:Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-istics.Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.the fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.Rthe suspension exhibits hard springing anddamping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC).Rgliding mode is not available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.

Drive program C (Comfort)Drive program C is characterized by the follow-ing:Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economicalhandling characteristics.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless the accel-erator pedal is depressed fully.Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability,for example on slippery road surfaces.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.

The vehicle is driven in the low engine speedrange and the wheels are less likely to spin.Rgliding mode is available.Rthe ECO start/stop function is available.

Drive program I (Individual)In drive program I the following properties of thedrive program can be selected:Rthe drive (engine management)Rthe transmission managementRESP® (Y page 73)Rthe suspensionRactivation of the exhaust flapInformation about configuring drive program Iwith the multimedia system can be found in theDigital Operator's Manual.

i To permanently select the gears in driveprogram I using the steering wheel paddles,select the M (manual) setting for the trans-mission.

Manual gear shifting

General notesYou can change gear yourself using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust bein position D.Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled, theautomatic transmission immediately shifts intothe next gear down or up, if permitted.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shift-ing, you have two options:Rtemporary settingRpermanent settingIf you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-function display will show the current gearinstead of transmission position D.If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gearswill be selected automatically.


Drivingandparking

Z

Temporary setting

X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever toposition D.

X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter: or;.Further information on activating manual gear-shifting on PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles(Y page 229).Temporary setting will be active for a certainamount of time. Under certain conditions theminimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in thecase of lateral acceleration, during an overrunphase or when driving on steep terrain.X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddleshifter; and hold it in place.

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position.

orX Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to changethe drive program.

Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMGvehicles)

X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever toposition D.

X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To deactivate: press button:.orX If position D (automatic transmission) isselected for the transmission in drive pro-gram I: shift to drive program I with theDYNAMIC SELECT switch.Indicator lamp; goes out.

Shifting gears! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatictransmission does not shift up automaticallyeven when the engine limiting speed for thecurrent gear is reached. When the engine lim-iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut toprevent the engine from overrevving. Alwaysmake sure that the engine speed does notreach the red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddleshifter;.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): if the maximum engine speed on thecurrently engaged gear is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatic trans-mission automatically shifts up in order toprevent engine damage.

X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddleshifter:.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-ing.


If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine damageby not shifting down.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; according togearshift recommendation: when shown inthe multifunction display of the instrumentcluster.

Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)! The automatic transmission does not shiftup automatically even when the engine limit-ing speed for the current gear is reached.When the engine limiting speed is reached,the fuel supply is cut to prevent the enginefrom overrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-function display.X When message: appears in the multifunc-tion display, pull on the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter.

KickdownX For maximum acceleration, depress theaccelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.

During kickdown, you cannot shift gears usingthe steering wheel paddle shifters.If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-mission shifts up to the next gear when themaximum engine speed is reached. This pre-vents the engine from overrevving.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is onlypossible in the temporary setting.


Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the transmission


The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission no lon-ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

Problems with PLUG-IN HYBRID operation (Y page 233).

Transfer caseThis section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-mitted to both axles.

! Performance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake systemor transfer case could otherwise be damaged.Contact a qualified specialist workshop for aperformance test.

! Since ESP® engages automatically, the igni-tion must be switched off (the SmartKey orStart/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1)if:Rthe electric parking brake is being testedon a brake dynamometerRthe vehicle is being towed with only oneaxle raised (not permitted for vehicles with4MATIC).

The brake system could otherwise be dam-aged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

Refueling


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

164 RefuelingDrivingandparking

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic chargecould build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection sys-tem could be blocked by particles from thefuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray outwhen the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized bythe Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap.

For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 388).

Refueling

General informationPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 164).PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles: pressure in the fueltank must be released before refueling.Except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if youunlock/lock the vehicle from the outside, thefuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow nextto the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-cle.

Preparing to refuelX Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Opening the fuel filler flap (exceptPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap

Refueling 165

Drivingandparking

Z

= Tire pressure table? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueledX Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in place andrefuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.Do not add anymore fuel after the pump stopsfilling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel mayleak out.

Opening the fuel filler flap (PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles)

X Pull switch:.Indicator lamp; flashes and the PleaseWait Depressurizing Tank messageappears in the multifunction display.If the fuel filler cap is open, indicator lamp;lights up.The Tank is Depressurized Ready forRefueling message appears in the multi-function display.Please be sure to observe the information onrefueling on the fuel filler flap.

There is a malfunction if:Rindicator lamp; first flashes and then goesoutRthe yellow engine diagnostics warning lamplights up

i From a speed of 2 km/h, the fuel filler capcan no longer be opened.

i The opening process for the fuel filler capmay take up to 15 minutes.

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueledX Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in place andrefuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.Do not add anymore fuel after the pump stopsfilling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel mayleak out.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.If you drive at speeds above 2 km/hwith the fuelfiller flap open, the Fuel Filler Flap Openmessage is shown in the multifunction display.Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-cle.

i For further information on warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see(Y page 293).

i If you are drivingwith the fuel filler cap open,the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. Amessage appears in the multifunction display(Y page 271).

166 RefuelingDrivingandparking

In addition, the; Check Engine warninglamp may light up (Y page 293).For further information on warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see(Y page 293).

Refueling 167

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank


Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.Risk of explosion or fire.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GOX Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as theSmartKey having been removed.

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannotbe opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 81).X PLUG-IN HYBRID Vehicles: depressurize the fuel tank(Y page 165).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 83).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Charging the high-voltage battery(PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)


G DANGERThe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident and

the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIn the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed acritical value. In this case flammable gasescapes through a ventilation valve on theunderbody. The gas can ignite. There is a riskof injury.Leave the danger zone immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance, whilstobserving legal requirements.

G DANGERIf you use incorrectly installed mains socketsor adapters, extension cables or similar toconnect the charging cable to amains socket,

168 Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)Drivingandparking

this could lead to fires or an electric shock.There is a risk of fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, observe thefollowing:ROnly connect the charging cable to mainssockets that:- are installed correctly and- have been approved by an electrical spe-cialist.

RFor safety reasons, only use the chargingcables supplied with the vehicle, or charg-ing cables which have been approved foruse with this vehicle.RNever use a damaged charging cable.RDo not use:

- Extension cables- Cable drums- Multiple socketsRDo not use a socket adapter to connect thecharging cable to the mains socket. Theonly exception is if the adapter has beentested and approved by the manufacturerfor charging the high-voltage battery in anelectric vehicle.RAlways observe the safety notes in thesocket adapter's operating instructions.

G DANGERConnecting the charging cable to the wallboxvia an incorrectly installed wallbox or adapter,extension cable or similar could cause a fire oran electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, observe thefollowing:ROnly connect the charging cable to a wall-box that:- is installed correctly and- has been approved by an electrical spe-cialist.

RFor safety reasons, only use chargingcables that have been tested and approvedby the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.

RNever use damaged charging cables.RDo not extend the charging cable.RDo not use an adapter.RAlways observe the safety notes in the wall-box's operating instructions.

The vehicle's high voltage electrical system isunder high voltage.RDo not tamper with the high-voltage compo-nents or the orange cables of the high-voltageelectrical system.RDo not touch high-voltage components or theorange cables of the high-voltage electricalsystem when a vehicle has been involved in acrash.RNever touch damaged components or thedamaged orange cables of the high-voltageelectrical system.RDo not remove the covers of the high-voltageelectrical system components that aremarked with a warning sticker.

General notes

Method of operationThe vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage bat-tery for driving. The high-voltage battery storesthe energy needed to operate the electric motorand releases it again.The electric motor uses energy that has beenstored in the high-voltage battery when pullingaway, accelerating and during the journey.In overrun mode, kinetic energy is converted bymeans of energy recuperation into electricalenergy and stored in the high-voltage battery.Information on overrun mode (Y page 232).The high-voltage battery can be charged as fol-lows:Rthrough energy recuperationwhile the vehicleis in motionRthrough the combustion engine while drivingin CHARGE operating mode (Y page 226)Rwith the relevant charging cable at an electri-cal outlet while the vehicle is stationaryRwith the relevant charging cable at a wallboxwhile the vehicle is stationaryRwith the relevant charging cable at a chargingstation while the vehicle is stationary

Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) 169

Drivingandparking

Z

The high-voltage battery can be charged in anominal voltage range from 100 V to 240 V.You can view the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery in the multifunction display. Youcan find information in "PLUG-IN HYBRID oper-ation", section "Menus and submenus" under"Energy flow display" (Y page 227).

High and low outside temperaturesLow outside temperaturesAt very low outside temperatures the maximumpower output of the high-voltage battery may bereduced. The high-voltage battery is then nolonger able to provide the normal electricalpower output.High outside temperaturesTo prevent damage to the high-voltage batterydue to very high outside temperatures, the max-imum power output of the high-voltage batteryis reduced by the vehicle.

Energy consumption and electricalrangeThe maximum electrical range is generallyreduced by:Rhigh and low outside temperaturesRoperating the climate control systemRswitching on consumersThe battery's physical characteristics are suchthat leaving the vehicle parked for long periodsat low outdoor temperatures without charging itcan lead to:Ra reduction in battery performanceRlonger charge times

Notes on battery careAvoid storing or transporting the vehicle atexcessively high or low temperatures over a longperiod.If you park the vehicle and leave it stationary forlong periods:Rcheck the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery more oftenRconnect the vehicle to a power supplyThis prevents self-discharge and damage to thehigh-voltage battery.

Terms of usePlease note the information on exceptions andlimitations in warranty documentation and inthe Maintenance Booklet.

Handling the charging cable and charg-ing cable controlsDo not leave the charging cable controls(Y page 171) hanging loose from an electricaloutlet. Otherwise, this could result in a poorcontact with the electrical outlet and malfunc-tions when charging the vehicle.To ensure that the brackets within the chargingcable controls are not subjected to incorrectloads, observe the following:RNever lift or carry the controls by the chargingcable connector or the mains plug.RTo transport the charging cable, the coiledpart can be:- wrapped around the controls or- secured to the housing of the controls

Heat generated by the charging cableand charging cable connectorPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 168).During the charging process, the charging cableand charging cable connector may heat up.The charging cable and charging cable connec-tor will only heat up within the permissible lim-iting values, provided that:Rthe power supply and the charging cable arenot damagedRthe instructions for handling the chargingcable and controls on the charging cable areobserved

If the charging cable or plug get too hot, have themains power supply checked.

Protection device against overvoltage! Overvoltage in the mains supply may dam-age the vehicle. For this reason, the vehicle isequipped with a protection device againstovervoltage in the mains supply. This devicemay be triggered during severe thunder-storms, for example, and may lead to the buil-ding's fuse being tripped and an interruptionin the power supply. These functions protectthe vehicle. After the building fuse is switched


on again, the charging process resumes auto-matically. Following an interruption in thepower supply or tripping of the building's fuse,it may take up to 10 minutes for charging toresume automatically.

Switch on the building protection system againafter it has been triggered. Otherwise, thecharging process cannot be continued.

General information about the chargingprocedurePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 168).The vehicle socket is located in the rear bumperon the right below the tail lamp.The charge socket flap and the vehicle are cen-trally locked or unlocked simultaneously.

Charging the high-voltage battery viathe electrical outlet

Charging cable for electrical outlets

Important safety notes! Only use the charging cable to charge thehigh-voltage battery. Do not use the chargingcable for other purposes. It may otherwise bedamaged.

A charging cable for connection to the electricaloutlet is included with the vehicle. Only use thecharging cable included with the vehicle orcharging cables that have been approved for thevehicle.

i If you use the supplied 12 A charging cableto charge a high-voltage battery:Rthe charge time increases considerablyRelectrical consumption increases consider-ably

Where possible, charge the high-voltage bat-tery at a charging station (Y page 174). Onlythen can certified electrical energy consump-tion levels be reached.

i The charging process can vary depending onthe power supply. Therefore, always observethe local information.

Information about charging from a wallbox(Y page 173).

Information on charging at a charging station(Y page 174).

Stowing the charging cableThe charging cable can be stowed in the bagsupplied in the trunk/cargo compartment of thevehicle and held in place with the Velcro fas-tener.

Controls on the charging cable

: Alternating current status indicator; Control/protection system indicator= Charge current indicator? Charge current setting buttonWhen displays: and; on the charging cablelight up, this means the following:

Display:

Lights upgreen

The external power supplyconnection is working prop-erly. The high-voltage batterycan be charged.

Flashes red A malfunction has beendetected in the externalpower supply. The high-volt-age battery is recharged assoon as the electricity signalregisters normal values.

Lights up red There is a malfunction. Thecharging cable must beremoved from the mainssocket and then reinserted.


Drivingandparking

Z

Display;

Lights upgreen

There are no malfunctions.The high-voltage battery canbe charged.

Lights up red An impermissible current isbeing supplied to the controlunit. The high-voltage batterycannot be charged.

i For information on problems relating to thecharging process, see (Y page 175).

Setting the maximum charge currentG WARNINGIf the charge current draw via a mains socketis too high during the charging process, theexternal electrical system may overheat.There is a risk of fire.Before beginning the charging process, checkthe maximum permissible charge currentlocally. Consult a qualified expert to do sowhere necessary.If necessary, adjust your vehicle's settings.

! An excessive charge current can blow a fuseor lead to overheating of the external powersupply. Check whether the external powersupply is compatible with the set charge cur-rent. If necessary, lower the set charge cur-rent or use another power socket.

You can set a limit for the values of the chargecurrent used in charging the high-voltage bat-tery. This acts as a means of preventing thepower supply from overloading. You can set thislimit by using the controls on the charging cableor in the on-board computer's menu. Only setthe maximum charge current in the on-boardcomputer menu if there are no charge currentsettings on the charging cable.The default standard value in the vehicle corre-sponds to the maximum charge current value.The default standard value on the charging cableis the minimum charge current setting. This cor-responds to the minimum available charge cur-rent from the power supply. The value on thecharging cable can be increased and is descri-bed in the following section.

i The value of the maximum setting and theadjustment value may vary depending on thecountry.

Before charging the high-voltage battery, checkthemaximumpermissible charge current for therelevant power socket.X To adjust the setting: press button?repeatedly until the desired setting is selec-ted in display=.RTwo LEDs are flashing: minimum settingRAll LEDs are flashing: maximum setting

If, after the charging process, the charging cableis:Rleft connected to the power socket, the cur-rently selected valueswill be used for the nextcharging process.Rremoved from the power socket, the valueswill be reset to the minimum setting for thenext charging process. You may then need toreset the values of the maximum charge cur-rent.

i If the vehicle requires more time than usualwhen charging, check the maximum chargecurrent settings using the controls on thecharging cable or in the on-board computer'smenu.

Indicator lamp on the vehicle socketWhen the indicator lamp on the vehicle socketlights up, this means the following:

Indicatorlamp

Flashesorange

The connection between thevehicle and the currentsource is being establishedbefore charging begins.

Flashesgreen

The high-voltage battery isbeing charged.

Flashes red A malfunction has occurredwhile charging.The indicator lamp goes outafter approximately90 seconds.


Indicatorlamp

Lights uporange

A charging break for the high-voltage battery is takingplace.The indicator lamp goes outafter approximately90 seconds.

Lights upgreen

The high-voltage battery isfully charged.The indicator lamp goes outafter approximately90 seconds.

i If the indicator lamp is off, lock or unlock thevehicle. The indicator lamp then displays thecurrent status of the charging process again.

Connecting the charging cable

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch the ignition off.X Press the charge socket flap in the directionof arrow:.The charge socket flap swings up.

X Press fastener; to the left.Socket cap= is open.

X Insert the power supply plug into the electri-cal outlet to the stop.

X Insert the charging cable connector into vehi-cle socket? to the stop.Indicator lampA first flashes orange andthen green.The high-voltage battery is being charged.

i If the charging cable is plugged in, you can-not start the engine or move the vehicle.

i Depending on the temperature, the fan andbattery cooling systemmay audibly switch onduring the charging process.

Removing the charging cableThe high-voltage battery is fully charged when:Rthe charge level display reaches 100% in themultifunction display (Y page 227)Rthe indicator lamp in the vehicle socket lightsup green after unlocking or locking the vehicle

X Unlock the vehicle.X Press and hold buttonB on the chargingcable connector and remove the chargingcable connector from the vehicle socket.

X Close socket cap=.X Close charge socket flap:.X Remove the mains plug from the mainssocket and safely stow away the chargingcable inside the vehicle (Y page 171).

Charging the high-voltage batteryfrom the wallbox

General notesIt is recommended that you charge your vehicleusing a wallbox or at a charging station.Only use charging cables that have been testedand approved by the manufacturer for chargingthe high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 168).


Drivingandparking

Z

Connecting the charging cable

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch the ignition off.X Press the charge socket flap in direction ofarrow:.The charge socket flap swings up.

X Press fastener; to the left.Socket cap= is open.

X Insert the charging cable connector into vehi-cle socket? to the stop.Indicator lampA first flashes orange andthen green.The high-voltage battery is being charged.

i If the charging cable is plugged in, you can-not start the engine or move the vehicle.

i Depending on the temperature, the fan andbattery cooling systemmay audibly switch onduring the charging process.

Removing the charging cableThe high-voltage battery is fully charged when:Rthe charge level display reaches 100% in themultifunction display (Y page 227)Rthe indicator lamp in the vehicle socket lightsup green after unlocking or locking the vehicle

X Unlock the vehicle.X Press and hold buttonB on the chargingcable connector and remove the chargingcable connector from the vehicle socket.

X Close socket cap=.X Close charge socket flap:.

Charging the high-voltage battery atthe charging stationBefore beginning the charging process at acharging station without communication capa-bilities, you must first activate the station, e.g.using an RFID card. Observe the on-site opera-tor instructions for the charging station.The connection for the vehicle at a charging sta-tion is identical to the connection on a wallbox(Y page 173).


Problems with the charging process


The charge socket flapcannot be opened.

The charge socket flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 81).If the key battery is discharged:X Unlock the driver's door using the mechanical key (Y page 83).orX Unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside (Y page 88).

The charge socket flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Lock the vehicle and unlock it again.If, after that, the opening mechanism is still jammed:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The high-voltage batteryis not being charged.

The indicator lamp on the vehicle socket does not light up or flashesred.A malfunction has occurred during the initialization of the chargingprocess or during charging.X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehicle socketand plug it back into the vehicle socket.

If the problem persists:X Use a different charging station.orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The high-voltage batteryis not charged during thecharging process whenconnected to a powersocket.

The electrical outlet is faulty.X Have the electrical outlet checked to test if it is functioning prop-erly.

orX Use a different electrical outlet.

The charging cable con-nector cannot beremoved from the vehi-cle socket.

The snap fastener on the charging cable connector is locked.X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector. Thesnap fastener on the vehicle socket is unlocked.

X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.If the snap fastener on the charging cable connector is locked:X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector and tryto release the lock.


Drivingandparking

Z

Online access to the vehicle

General information

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

i Operation of integrated information sys-tems and communications equipment inthe vehicle: you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.

You can call up remote query and remote con-figuration functions for your vehicle using onlineaccess to the vehicle. This is possible from anInternet-enabled computer, as well as manymodern smartphones.Please call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) toobtain the relevant Internet address.Online access to the vehicle is restricted to thecontractual periods of mbrace. Activatedaccess to the mbrace emergency call system isrequired for use.In order to be able to use online access to thevehicle, you must agree to the local terms ofuse.Further information on supported devices, avail-able languages and contractual periods can beobtained from any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.In order to be able to call up online access to thevehicle, the vehicle must be connected to theInternet (Y page 176).

Notes on data protectionRemember that online access to the vehicleoffers access to your data.

i Prevent unauthorized persons fromaccessing this data.

Every person who has access to the informa-tion stated can use the functions of the onlineaccess to the vehicle.

i Information when selling a vehicle orbuying a used vehicle:RIf you sell your vehicle, you are obliged todelete the vehicle from your personal areaon the online access to the vehicle.RIf you have bought a used vehicle, it is pos-sible that the previous owner still hasaccess to the online access to the vehicle.

Calling up functionsThe online access to the vehicle allows youaccess to your vehicle's information and func-tions using remote query and remote configu-ration.The following functions can be accessed:Rrequest the current condition of charge of thehigh-voltage batteryRprogram the departure time (Y page 249)Rset or activate the "Pre-entry climate controlat departure time" function (see the DigitalOperator's Manual)

Information on additional functions and operat-ing instructions can be found within the onlineaccess to the vehicle.

Connecting the vehicle to the Interneti This function is not available in all countriesand requires activated access to the mbraceemergency call system.

You can use the online access to the vehicle ifthe vehicle has a connection to the Internet via amobile phone network. The necessary data istransmitted by radio. The vehicle automaticallyrecognizes whether a connection to the Internetis possible or not. No presets are necessary.

i Restrictions in reception are possible if thevehicle is in an underground car park, forexample. Restrictionsmay also occur in areaswith poor mobile network coverage.


Parking


G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.


! Always secure the vehicle correctly againstrolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-etrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmissionmust be in positionP and theSmartKey must be removed from the ignitionlock.Rthe front wheels must be turned towards thecurb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at thefront axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at therear axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine


G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey toposition 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X With the Start/Stop button: press theStart/Stop button (Y page 146).The engine stops and all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.When the driver's door is closed, this corre-sponds to SmartKey position 1. When thedriver's door is open, this corresponds toSmartKey position 0: "SmartKey removed".

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-er's door or the front-passenger door or removethe SmartKey from the ignition, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.With the Start/Stop button: if you then openthe driver's door or the front-passenger door,the automatic transmission shifts to P automat-ically.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button:remove the Start-Stop button from the igni-tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.

Parking 177

Drivingandparking

Z

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off in an emergencywhile the vehicle is in motion by pressing andholding the Start/Stop button for three sec-onds. This function operates independently ofthe ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-offfunction.

Electric parking brake

General notes


The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction inthe system, it may not be possible to apply thereleased parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it rollingaway.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionP.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake if the on-board voltage is low orthere is a malfunction in the system. Contact aqualified specialist workshop.The electric parking brake performs a functiontest at regular intervals while the engine is

switched off. The sounds that can be heardwhilethis is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

X To apply: push handle:.When the electric parking brake is applied,the redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.The electric parking brake can also be appliedwhen the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clustergoes out.

The electric parking brake can only be released:Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 146) orRif the ignition was switched on using theStart/Stop button

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is automaticallyapplied when the transmission is in position Pand:Rthe engine is switched off orRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is opened.

To prevent the electric parking brake from beingautomatically applied, pull handle:.

178 ParkingDrivingandparking

The electric parking brake is also engaged auto-matically if:RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-tionaryRActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehiclestationary

In addition, at least one of the following condi-tions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched offRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is openedRthere is a system malfunctionRthe power supply is insufficientRthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy periodThe redF (USA only) or! (Canada only)indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goesout.The electric parking brake is not automaticallyengaged if the engine is switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.

Releasing automaticallyYour vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-matically released if all of the following condi-tions are met:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe seat belt has been fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lidmust be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission positionP or you have previously driven faster than2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the acceleratorpedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parkingbrake will be released and the vehicle will startto move.

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during an emer-gency by using the electric parking brake.X While driving, push handle: of the electricparking brake (Y page 178).The vehicle is braked as long as you keephandle: of the electric parking brakedepressed. The longer electric parking brakehandle: is depressed, the greater the brak-ing force.

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Please Release Parking Brake mes-sage appearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterflashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than sixweeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seekadvice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: observe the impor-tant safety notes for the high-voltage battery(Y page 349).

Driving tips

General driving tips


G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,

Driving tips 179

Drivingandparking

Z

for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the countryin which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-hibit the driver from using a mobile phone whiledriving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-free mode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers adistance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-ond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-ommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are not needed.X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-play.

Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving incold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-rain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control


Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance with themanufacturer's specifications. Always havework on the engine carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, workrelevant to safety or on safety-related systemsmust be carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.The engine settings must not be changed underany circumstances. Furthermore, all specificservice work must be carried out at regularintervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO displayThe ECO display shows you how economicalyour driving style is. The ECO display assists youin achieving the most economical driving style

180 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

for the selected settings and prevailing condi-tions. Your driving style can significantly influ-ence the vehicle's consumption.

: Acceleration; Coasting= Constant? Additional range achievedRange? is shownunder Bonus fr. Start andrepresents the additional range achieved sincethe beginning of the journey as a result of anadapted driving style.If the fuel level has dropped into the reserverange, the Reserve Fuel display message isshown instead of range? in the multifunctiondisplay. The8 warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster also lights up (Y page 293).

The ECO display consists of three sections, withan inner and outer area. The sections corre-spond to the following three categories:

: Acceleration (evaluation of all accel-eration processes):Rthe outer area fills up and the innerarea lights up green: moderateacceleration, especially at higherspeedsRthe outer area empties and theinner area is gray: sporty acceler-ation

; Coasting (evaluation of all decelera-tion processes):Rthe outer area fills up and the innerarea lights up green: anticipatorydriving, keeping your distance andearly release of the accelerator.The vehicle can coast without useof the brakes.Rthe outer area empties and theinner area is gray: frequent heavybraking

= Constant (continuous evaluationover the entire journey):Rthe outer area fills up and the innerarea lights up green: constantspeed and avoidance of unneces-sary acceleration and decelerationRthe outer area empties and theinner area is gray: fluctuations inspeed

The three inner areas display the current drivingstyle and light up green as a result of a particu-larly economical driving style. Depending on thedriving situation, up to two areas may light upsimultaneously.At the beginning of the journey, the three outerareas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-nomical driving. A higher level indicates a moreeconomical driving style. If the three outer areasare completely filled at the same time, the driverhas adopted the most economical driving stylefor the selected settings and prevailing condi-tions. The ECO display border lights up.The ECOdisplay does not indicate the actual fuelconsumption. The additionally achieved rangedisplayed under Bonus fr. Start does notindicate a fixed consumption reduction.

Driving tips 181

Drivingandparking

Z

In addition to driving style, the actual consump-tion is affected by other factors, such as:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.An economical driving style specially requiresdriving at moderate engine speeds.Achieving a higher value in the categories"Acceleration" and "Constant":Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on thehighway, only the outer area for "constant" willchange.The ECO display summarizes the driving stylefrom the start of the journey to its completion.Therefore, there are more marked changes inthe outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon-ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For moremarked changes, perform a manual rest(Y page 241).For further information on the ECO display, see(Y page 240).

Braking


G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting earlyto a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessive wearof the brakes.

When you take advantage of the engine brak-ing effect, a drivewheelmay not turn for sometime, e.g. on a slippery road surface. Thiscould cause damage to the drive train. Thistype of damage is not covered by theMercedes-Benz warranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Driveon for a short while. This allows the airflow tocool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayed reac-tion from the brakes when braking for the firsttime. This may also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehiclewashed, brake firmly while paying attention tothe traffic conditions. This will warm up thebrake discs, thereby drying them more quicklyand protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-due may form on the brake discs and brakepads. This can result in a significantly longerbraking distance.


RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply thebrakes occasionally while paying attention tothe traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster andRyou hear a warning tone while the engine isrunning

Observe additional warning messages in themultifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immediately.Consult a qualified specialist workshop toarrange this.

! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. Ifyou wish to operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop in advance. You could oth-erwise damage the drive train or the brakesystem.

! The ESP® system operates automatically.The engine and the ignition must therefore beswitched off (the SmartKey must be in posi-tion 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if theelectric parking brake is tested on a brakedynamometer.Braking triggered automatically by ESP® maycause severe damage to the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brakesystem must be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the functional-ity of your brakes at regular intervals.Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 68)and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 69).

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends only installing the following brake disksand brake pads/linings:Rbrake disks that have been approved byMercedes-BenzRbrake pads/linings that have been approvedbyMercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalentstandard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings cancompromise the safety of your vehicle.Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/linings on an axle at the same time. Alwaysinstall new brake pads/linings when replacingbrake disks.The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brakedisks to which the wheel assembly with rim andthreaded connection is matched.The use of brake disks other than thoseapproved by Mercedes-Benz can change thetrack width and is subject to approval, if appli-cable.Shock-type loads when handling the brakedisks, such as when changing wheels, can leadto a reduction in comfort when driving with light-weight brake disks. Avoid shock-type loads onthe lightweight brake disks, particularly on thebrake plate.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only usebrake fluid that has been specially approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brakefluid which has not been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of anequivalent quality could affect your vehicle'soperating safety.

High-performance and ceramic brakes(Mercedes AMG vehicles)The AMG brake systems are designed for heavyloads. This may lead to noise when braking. Thiswill depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such as tempera-ture and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brakesystem, such as the brake pads/linings or brakediscs, depends on the individual driving styleand operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-age that will be valid under all circumstances. An

Driving tips 183

Drivingandparking

Z

aggressive driving style will lead to high wear.You can obtain more information on this from aqualified specialist workshop.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving andbraking accordingly during this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wearwarning lamp in the instrument cluster and noteany brake status messages in the multifunctiondisplay. Especially for high performance driving,it is important to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depth onthe road surface, there is a danger of hydro-planing occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Ravoid sudden steering movements.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in frontor in the opposite direction createwaves. Thismay cause the maximum permissible waterdepth to be exceeded.Failure to observe these notes may result indamage to the engine, electrical systems andtransmission.

If you have to drive on stretches of road onwhichwater has collected, please bear in mind that:Rin the case of standing water, the water levelmay be no higher than the lower edge of thevehicle bodyRyou should drive no faster than at a walkingpace

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering andbraking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise con-trol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning device andis therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freezingpoint do not guarantee that the road surface isfree of ice. The roadmay still be icy, especially inwooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle couldskid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Alwaysadapt your driving style and drive at a speed tosuit the prevailing weather conditions.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.


For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 363).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 362).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-tion (Y page 362).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent DriveMercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno-vative driver assistance and safety systemswhich enhance comfort and support the driver incritical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi-nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-stone on the path towards autonomous driving.Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces allelements of active and passive safety in onewellthought out system – for the safety of the vehi-cle occupants and that of other road users.Further information on driving safety systems(Y page 67).

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant road speedfor you. It brakes automatically in order to avoidexceeding the set speed. Change into a lowergear in good time on long and steep downhillgradients. This is especially important if thevehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make useof the braking effect of the engine. This relievesthe load on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steadyspeed for a prolonged period. You can store anyroad speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-trol can neither reduce the risk of an accidentnor override the laws of physics. Cruise controlcannot take into account the road, traffic andweather conditions. Cruise control is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to the

vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time and for staying in your lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

i The speed indicated in the speedometermay differ slightly from the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: Activates or increases speed; Activates or reduces speed= Deactivates cruise control? Activates at the current speed/last stored

speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction display forfive seconds. In addition, theé symbolappears in the multifunction display.Speedometer with segments: when cruisecontrol is activated, the segments from thestored speed to the maximum permitted speedlight up.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you are driv-ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: ordown;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-matically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients by auto-matically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previously storedspeed.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press

the cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored afteryou have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruise con-trol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards=.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position N whiledriving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐trol Offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-matically helps you maintain the distance to thevehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detectedwith the aid of the radar sensor system.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so thatthe set speed is not exceeded.

186 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is especiallyimportant if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, youwill make use of the braking effect of the engine.This relieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating and wear-ing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk ofa collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent acollision without your intervention. An intermit-tent warning tone will then sound and the dis-tance warning lamp will light up in the instru-ment cluster. Brake immediately in order toincrease the distance to the vehicle in front ortake evasive action provided it is safe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of the respon-sible authorities. You can refer to the relevantchapter in the Operator's Manual if questionsare asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approved bythe FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Theradar sensor is intended for use in an auto-motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-ing, or altering of the device will void any war-ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Donot tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.


G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function isactivated, the vehicle brakes automatically incertain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONICPLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUScannot take into account the road, traffic andweather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-cles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehiclein front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedlyaccelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane oran exit laneRbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun-tries)Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the right (right-hand drivecountries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To activate at the current speed/last stored

speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up totwo minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe electric parking brake must be released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activated.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmustbe closed.

Switching onX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Suspendedmes-sage appears in themultifunction display. Theset distance to a slower-moving vehicle in


front will then not be maintained. You will bedriving at the speed you determine by theposition of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is20 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.


X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time itis activated, the current speed is stored. Oth-erwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to thepreviously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and drivingX If you want to pull away with DISTRONICPLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.


orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speedto that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle isdetected in front, your vehicle accelerates tothe set speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facingan unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle thenbrakes automatically.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUSoperates in the same way as cruise control.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. Inthis way, the distance you have selected ismain-tained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.However, the vehicle is only accelerated up tothe speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving stylewhen you have selected the S or S+ driving pro-gram (Y page 159). Acceleration behind thevehicle in front or to the set speed is then notice-ablymore dynamic. If you have selected theC orE driving program, the vehicle accelerates moregently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger ofcollision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted ifchanging lanes takes too long or if the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle in frontbecomes too small.

i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand-drive vehi-cles or the right lane on right-hand-drive vehi-cles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.

Driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 191).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it isstationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-tionary and you do not need to depress thebrake.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

i Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill ata sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance is setusing the control on the cruise control lever.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the trans-mission is shifted automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction occurs, the transmission mayalso shift into position P automatically.

Setting a speedX Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press

the cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down;, the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONICPLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished overtak-ing.

Setting a specified minimum distanceYou can set the specified minimum distance forDISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front,dependent on vehicle speed. You can see thisdistance in the multifunction display(Y page 191).

i Make sure that you maintain the minimumdistance to the vehicle in front as required bylaw. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in frontif necessary.

X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direction:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.


DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments between the speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed; light up.Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pluspackage: the segments likewise light up if avehicle in front is detected in the fast lane.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed inthe speedometer may differ slightly from thespeed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu (Y page 247) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistancegraphics display.X Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 246).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appearswhen the cruise control lever is actuated)

; Vehicle in front, if detected= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu (Y page 247) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistancegraphics display.X Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 246).

You will see the stored speed for about five sec-onds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryWhen you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you willsee the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the

Driving systems 191

Drivingandparking

Z

multifunction display for approximately five sec-onds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivatedif:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if thevehicle is automatically securedwith the elec-tric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towards youin order to pull away and the front-passengerdoor or one of the rear doors is openRthe vehicle is skiddingRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the DISTRONICPLUS Offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: theability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicleswhen cornering is limited. Your vehicle maybrake unexpectedly or late.RDriving on a different line: DISTRONIC PLUSmay not detect vehicles which are not drivingin the middle of their lane. The distance to thevehicle in front will be too short.ROther vehicles changing lane: DISTRONICPLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting inyet. The distance to this vehicle will be tooshort.RNarrow vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does notdetect the vehicle in front on the edge of theroad because of its narrow width. The dis-tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.RObstacles and stationary vehicles:DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an

obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.RCrossing vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUSmaymis-takenly detect vehicles that are crossing yourlane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at trafficlights with crossing traffic, for example, couldcause your vehicle to pull away unintention-ally.

In such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle inthe center of the driving lane by means of mod-erate steering interventions at speeds of0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).It monitors the area in front of your vehicle bymeans of multifunction camera:, at the top ofthe windshield.In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front,taking into account lane markings, e.g. whenfollowing vehicles in a traffic jam.At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h),Steering Assist focuses on clear lane markings(left and right), only focusing on the vehicle infront if clear lane markings are not present.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-vide any support if these conditions do not exist.DISTRONIC PLUSmust be active in order for thefunction to be available.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONICPLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilotcan neither reduce the risk of an accident nor


override the laws of physics. It cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-ing in your lane.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot does not detect road and trafficconditions. If you are following a vehicle which isdriving towards the edge of the road, your vehi-cle could come into contact with the curb orother road boundaries. Be particularly aware ofother road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directlynext to your vehicle.Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane orprojecting out into the lane are not detected.An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. afterintentionally driving over a lane marking, can becorrected at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep yourvehicle in lane. In some cases, the steeringintervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicleback to the lane. In such cases, you must steerthe vehicle yourself to ensure that it does notleave the lane.The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflections (e.g. when the road surfaceis wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the road

The system is switched to passive and no longerassists you by performing steering interventionsif:Ryou actively change laneRyou switch on the turn signalRtake your hands off the steering wheel or donot steer for a prolonged period of time

i Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are acti-vated again automatically after a lane changeis completed.

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-vide any support:Ron very sharp cornersRwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tirehas been detected and displayed

Pay attention also to the important safety notesfor DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 187).The steering interventions are carried out with alimited steering moment. The system requiresthe driver to keep his hands on the steeringwheel and to steer himself.If you do not steer yourself or if you take yourhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedperiod of time, the systemwill first alert youwitha visual warning. A steering wheel symbolappears in the multifunction display. If you havestill not started to steer and have not taken holdof the steering wheel after five seconds at thelatest, a warning tone also sounds to remind youto take control of the vehicle. Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive.DISTRONIC PLUS remains active.

Activating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilot

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The DTR+:Steering Assist. On message appears in

Driving systems 193

Drivingandparking

Z

the multifunction display. Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot are activated.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activa-ted but is not ready for a steering intervention,steering wheel symbol: appears in gray. If thesystem provides you with support by means ofsteering interventions, symbol: is shown ingreen.

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilotX Press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. The DTR+:Steering Assist. Offmessage appears inthe multifunction display. Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot are deactivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or notavailable, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aredeactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.


G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.


Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 195).

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if all of thefollowing conditions are fulfilled:Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt isfastened.Rthe electric parking brake is released.Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.


Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditions aremet.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: appears in the multifunction display.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the first timedoes not activate the HOLD function, waitbriefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automaticallyif:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Rthe transmission is in position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-tain amount of pressure until: disappearsfrom the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park-ing brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-mission is shifted automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if the HOLD function is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction occurs, then the transmissionmay be shifted into position P automatically.

RACE START

Important safety notesi RACE START must not be used on normalroads. RACE START must only be activatedand used on dedicated road circuits, outsideof public road use.

i RACE START is only available inMercedes‑AMG vehicles.

RACE START enables optimal acceleration froma standing start. For this, a suitably high-griproad surface is required, along with the tires andvehicle being in proper operating condition.

G WARNINGIf you use RACE START, individual tires maystart to spin and the vehicle could skid.Depending on the selected ESP® mode, thereis an increased risk of skidding and having anaccident. Make sure that no persons, animalsor obstacles are within range of the vehicle.

i Observe the safety notes on driving safetysystems (Y page 68).Be sure to read the safety notes and informa-tion on ESP® (Y page 73).

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors are closed.Rthe engine is running and it has reached anoperating temperature of approximately160 ‡ (71 †). This is the case when the oiltemperature gauge in the multifunction dis-play is shown in white.Rthe drive program S, S+ or Race is selected.(Y page 154)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadposition.

Driving systems 195

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal isdepressed (left foot).Rthe transmission is in position D.

Activating RACE STARTi When manual mode (Y page 161) is active,the transmission automatically shifts up toRACE START in the drive program. This func-tion supports maximum acceleration withRACE START. After going through an acceler-ating process once from a stationary position,this function is automatically deactivated.

X Depress the brake pedal with your left footand keep it depressed.

X Pull and hold both steeringwheel paddle shift-ers (Y page 161).The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UPCancel: Paddle DOWN message appears inthe multifunction display.

X Release both steering wheel paddle shifters(Y page 161).i If the activation conditions are no longer ful-filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACESTART Canceled message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 161).

orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheel pad-dle shifter (Y page 161).The RACE START Available Depress gaspedal.message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.i If you do not depress the accelerator pedalfully within two seconds, RACE START is can-celed. The RACE START Not Possible SeeOperator's Manualmessage appears in themultifunction display.

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed rises to approximately3,500 rpm.The RACE START Release brake to startmessage appears in themultifunction display.i If you do not release the brake pedal withinfive seconds, RACE START is canceled. The

RACE START Canceled message appears inthe multifunction display.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-ation.The RACE START Activemessage appears inthe multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Can-ada: 50 km/h).RACE START is deactivated immediately if yourelease the accelerator pedal during RACESTART or if any of the activation conditions areno longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐sible See Operator's Manual or RACESTART Canceled message appears in the mul-tifunction display.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly within ashort period of time, it is only available againafter the vehicle has been driven a certaindistance.

AIRMATIC

General notesAIRMATIC is an air suspension with variabledamping for improved driving comfort. All-roundlevel control ensures the best possible suspen-sion and constant ground clearance, evenwith aladen vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle islowered automatically to improve driving safetyand to reduce fuel consumption. There is alsothe option to manually adjust the vehicle level.AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level controland the Adaptive Damping System ADS.


G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.


i If one of the doors is open, the vehicle is notlowered.

Vehicle level

Setting the raised vehicle level

It is possible to choose between the "Normal"and "Raised" vehicle levels below a speed of50 mph (80 km/h). Select the "Normal" settingfor normal road surfaces and "Raised" for drivingwith snow chains or on particularly poor roadsurfaces. Your selection remains stored even ifyou remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Start the engine.If indicator lamp; is not lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicle israised by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to thenormal level.The Vehicle Risingmessage appears in themultifunction display.i The message disappears after ten seconds,irrespective of the level reached. If necessary,the vehicle is raised further.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:Rdrive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h).Rdrive for approximately three minutes at aspeed over 50 mph (80 km/h).

The "Raised level" remains active when you arenot driving within these speed ranges.

Setting the normal vehicle levelX Start the engine.If indicator lamp; is lit:X Press button:.

Suspension settings

General notesThe Adaptive Damping System automaticallycontrols the calibration of the dampers.The damping is tuned individually to each wheeland depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-fort

Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuningIn the "Sport" and "Sport Plus" drive programs,the firmer suspension setting ensures even bet-ter contact with the road. Select thismodewhenemploying a sporty driving style, e.g. on windingcountry roads.X The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15mm) com-pared to the normal level.

Comfort tuningIn the "Economy" and "Comfort" drive programs,the driving characteristics of your vehicle aremore comfortable. Therefore, select thismode ifyou favor a more comfortable driving style.Select comfort mode also when driving fast onstraight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of high-way.X The vehicle is raised to the normal level.When driving at speeds above 80 mph(125 km/h), the vehicle is automatically low-ered by 0.6 in (15 mm) in the E and C drive pro-grams. When driving at speeds below 50 mph(80 km/h) the vehicle is raised again.

AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-tem

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.

Driving systems 197

Drivingandparking

Z

The damping is tuned individually to each wheeland depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection of Sport, Sport + orComfort

The suspension setting is adjusted using thecorresponding button in the center console.

i The mode can also be set using theDYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 154).This is only possible if:Rusing the AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem button on the center console, andRusing the DYNAMIC SELECT switch, thesamemode is selected for the chassis. Thisis the case, for example, when both are setto Comfort mode.

Each time you start the engine with the ignitionkey or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode isactivated. For further information about startingthe engine, see (Y page 148).

Sport mode

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning inSport mode ensures even better contact withthe road. Select this mode when employing asporty driving style, e.g. on winding countryroads.X Press button:.Indicator lamp= lights up. You have selectedSport mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes-sage appears in the multifunction display .

Sport + modeThe very firm setting of the suspension setting inSport + mode ensures the best possible contactwith the road. Select this mode only when driv-ing on race circuits.If indicator lamps; and= are off:X Press button: twice.Indicator lamps; and= light up. You haveselected Sport + mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT +mes-sage appears in the multifunction display .

If indicator lamp= lights up:X Press button: once.Second indicator lamp; lights up. You haveselected Sport + mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT +mes-sage appears in the multifunction display .

Comfort modeIn Comfort mode, the driving characteristics ofyour vehicle are more comfortable. Select thismode if you favor a more comfortable drivingstyle, but also when driving fast on straightroads, e.g. highways.X Press button: repeatedly until indicatorlamps; and= go out.You have selected Comfort mode.The AMG Suspension System COMFORTmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma-nently driven. Together with ESP®, it improvesthe traction of your vehicle whenever a drivewheel spins due to insufficient grip.If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC canneither reduce the risk of accident nor overridethe laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic conditions.4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.


! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.This may damage the transfer case. Damageof this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels mustremain either on the ground or be fully raised.Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-cle with all wheels in full contact with theground.

i In wintry driving conditions, the maximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if youuse winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chainsif necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area aroundyour vehicle using six sensors in the frontbumper and six sensors in the rear bumper.PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly thedistance between your vehicle and an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediate sur-roundings. You are always responsible for safemaneuvering, parking and exiting a parkingspace. When maneuvering, parking or pullingout of a parking space, make sure that there areno persons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, such asflower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONICdoes not detect such objects when they are inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle or the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic carwash, the compressed-air brakes on a truckor a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONICto malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or N

PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhangingloads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side(example)

Driving systems 199

Drivingandparking

Z

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.They can otherwise not function correctly. Cleanthe sensors regularly, taking care not to scratchor damage them (Y page 339).Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-evant warning displays light up and a warningtone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-cle

; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-cle

= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is in the instru-ment cluster. The warning display for the rear

area is located on the headliner in the rear com-partment.The warning display for each side of the vehicleis divided into five yellow and two red segments.PARKTRONIC is operational if operational read-iness indicator= lights up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-mine which warning display is active when theengine is running.

Transmission posi-tion

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle isrolling backwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-mittent warning tone for approximately twoseconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two seconds.This indicates that you have now reached theminimum distance.


Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

d Switch on the dashboarde Switch in the center console: Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC; Indicator lampIf indicator lamp; lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock.

Driving systems 201

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC


Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit. Youalso hear a warning tonefor approximately twoseconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and the indi-cator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 339).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-sound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parking aidwith ultrasound. It measures the road on bothsides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicatesa suitable parking space. Active steering inter-vention and brake application can assist youduring parking and when exiting a parkingspace. You may also use PARKTRONIC(Y page 199).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safe maneuvering, parking and exiting aparking space. Make sure that no persons, ani-mals or objects are in the maneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park-ing Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This could

result in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharpangle. Otherwise, you may damage thewheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may also display spacesnot suitable for parking, e.g.:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfacesParking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parkingspace as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or overgrownmight be identified or measured incorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupied bytrailer drawbars might not be identified assuch or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.


RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 200) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active Parking Assistwill then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not use ActiveParking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures are alwayscorrect. This has a direct influence on theparking characteristics of the vehicle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. noton the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range of ActiveParking Assist will not be detected when theparking space is measured. These are not takeninto account when the parking procedure is cal-culated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections orloading ramps of goods vehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of theseobjects

You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop and deactivate Active ParkingAssist.

For further information on the detection range(Y page 199).

Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces at right angles to the direction oftravel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directly nextto one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsActive Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces that are parallel or at right anglesto the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space as beingblocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-ing blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-ver intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightActive Parking Assist is switched on automati-cally when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys-tem independently locates and measures park-ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 59 in (1.5 m) wide

Driving systems 203

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-cleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider thanyour vehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannotmeasure the size of a parking space if it is atright angles to the direction of travel. You willneed to judge whether your vehicle will fit intothe parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as astatus indicator in the instrument cluster. Whena parking space has been detected, an arrowtowards the right or the left also appears. Bydefault, Active Parking Assist only displays park-ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parkingspaces on the driver's side are displayed assoon as the turn signal on the driver's side isactivated. When parking on the driver's side,this must remain switched on until you acknowl-edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press-ing thea button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel. The system automatically determineswhether the parking space is parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel.A parking space is displayed while you are driv-ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft(15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGIf you leave the vehicle when it is only beingbraked by Active Parking Assist it could rollaway if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always secure itagainst rolling away.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallyduring the parking process. You are respon-sible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-bol shows the desired parking space in theinstrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist?Yes: OKNo:%message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist: pressthea button on themultifunction steeringwheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at alltimes. When backing up, drive at a speedbelow approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill when the vehicle approaches therear border of the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight parkingspaces.

The Park Assist Active Select D ObserveSurroundingsmessage appears in the multi-function display.X Shift the transmission to position D while thevehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill when the vehicle approaches thefront border of the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight parkingspaces.


The Park Assist Active Select R ObserveSurroundingsmessage appears in the multi-function display.As soon as the parking procedure is complete,the Park Assist Switched Off messageappears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicleis now parked.The vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal. The brakingeffect is canceled when you depress the accel-erator pedal.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions and brake applica-tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished,you must steer and brake again yourself.PARKTRONIC is still available.Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-ing space after parking is dependent on vari-ous factors. These include the position andshape of the vehicles parked in front andbehind it and the conditions of the location. Itmay be the case that Active Parking Assistguides you too far into a parking space, or notfar enough into it. In some cases, it may alsolead you across or onto the curb. If necessary,you should cancel the parking procedure withActive Parking Assist.RYou can also select preselect transmissionpositionD. The vehicle redirects and does notdrive as far into the parking space. Should thetransmission change take place too early, theparking procedure will be canceled. A sensi-ble parking position can no longer be ach-ieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can supportyou when you exit the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must be highenough at the front and the rear. A curb is toosmall, for example.Rthe border of the parking space must not betoo wide, as the position of the vehicle mustnot exceed an angle of 45° to the startingposition as it is maneuvering into the parkingspace.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked the

vehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.

i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, ActiveParkingAssist brakes automaticallywhilst thevehicle exits the parking space. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

X Start the engine.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the turn signal in the direction youare pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To exit a parking space using Active Park-ing Assist: press thea button on themul-tifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Donot exceed a maximum speed of approx-imately 6mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assistwill be canceled.

X Depending on the message or as required,shift the transmission to position D or R.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistActive Accelerate and Brake ObserveSurroundings message appears in the mul-tifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone and thePark Assist Switched Offmessage appearsin the multifunction display. You will then haveto steer and merge into traffic on your own.

Driving systems 205

Drivingandparking

Z

PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take overthe steering, before the vehicle has exited theparking space completely. This is useful, forexample when you recognize that it is alreadypossible to pull out of the parking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistX Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once.The Park Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 201).PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park-ing Assist is immediately canceled. The ParkAssist Canceled message appears in themultifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automaticallyif:Rthe electric parking brake is engagedRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is no lon-ger possibleRyou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷warning lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-appears and themultifunction display shows thePark Assist Canceled message.When Active Parking Assist is canceled, youmust steer and brake again yourself.If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behind yourvehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-tem.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the multimedia systemdepends on the language setting. The follow-ing are examples of rear view camera displaysin the multimedia system.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safemaneuvering andparking.Whenmaneu-vering or parking, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area in whichyou are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will function ina limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-ter


Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedObserve the notes on cleaning(Y page 339)Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rearview camera may be restricted due to additionalaccessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.license plate holder, bicycle rack).

i The rear view camera is protected from rain-drops and dust by means of a flap. When therear view camera is activated, this flap opens.The flap closes again when:Ryou have finished themaneuvering processRyou switch off the engineRyou open the trunkObserve the notes on cleaning (Y page 339).For technical reasons, the flap may remainopen briefly after the rear view camera hasbeen deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate: make sure that the SmartKey isin position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected in the multimedia system(see the separate operating instructions).

X Engage reverse gear.The rear view camera flap opens. The multi-media systemshows the area behind the vehi-cle with guide lines.The image from the rear view camera is avail-able throughout the maneuvering process.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission to P or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Multimedia displayThe rear view cameramay show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.The rear view camera does not show objects inthe following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin close range above the handle on the trunklid

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steeringwheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)

Driving systems 207

Drivingandparking

Z

C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicleswithPARKTRONIC: if PARKTRONIC isoperational (Y page 200), an additional opera-tional readiness indicator will appear inCOMAND display;. If the PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are active or light up, warning dis-plays: and= are also active or light up cor-respondingly in the COMAND display.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

? Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 207).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, carefullyback up until you reach the end position.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost parallelin the parking space.


Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 207).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the parkingspace until yellow guide line; reaches park-ing space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that position andback up carefully.

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.The white lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possible.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center positionwhile the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reached thefinal position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel in theparking space.

Driving systems 209

Drivingandparking

Z

"Wide-angle" function

: Symbol for the wide-angle view function; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysYou can also use the rear view camera to selecta wide-angle view.When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 200),a symbol for your own vehicle appears in thedisplay of the multimedia system. If thePARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warn-ing displays= light up in themultimedia systemdisplay in yellow or red respectively.

Object detectionThe rear view camera helps detect moving andstationary objects. If an object (person, vehicleor other obstacle) is detected, this object ismarked with a bar. Objects located some dis-tance from the vehicle away are marked with ayellow bar. If the distance to the object is verysmall, the bar is displayed in red.Object detection only works in wide-angle view.To ensure that you can use the function, it mustbe switched on in the multimedia system (seethe separate operating instructions).

360° camera

General notesThe 360° camera is a system consisting of fourcameras.The system processes images from the follow-ing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrors

The cameras capture the immediate surround-ings of the vehicle. The system supports you, forexample when parking or if vision is restricted atan exit.You can show images from the 360° camera infull-screen mode or in six different split-screenviews on the multimedia system. A split-screenview also includes a top view of the vehicle. Thisview is calculated from the data supplied by theinstalled cameras (virtual camera).The six split-screen views are:Rtop view and picture from the rear view cam-era (130° viewing angle)Rtop view and image from the front camera(130° viewing angle without displaying themaximum steering wheel angle)Rtop view and enlarged rear viewRtop view and enlarged front viewRtop view and images from the rear-facing sidecameras (rear wheel view)Rtop view and images from the forward-facingside cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission from D or R to N, the guide linesare hidden in the multimedia system.When you change between transmission posi-tions D and R, you see the previously selectedfront or rear view.Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will alsobe optically displayed:Rin split screen view as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle icon in the top view, orRat the bottom right as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle symbol in full-screenmode

The line thickness and color of the bracketsshow how far the vehicle is from an object.Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONICis activeRyellow brackets with normal lines: an object ispresent in close range of the vehicleRred line: an object is present in the immediateclose range of the vehicle

Important safety notesThe 360°camera is only an aid and may show adistorted view of obstacles, show them incor-rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not asubstitute for attentive driving.You are always responsible for safe maneuver-ing and parking. When maneuvering or parking,


make sure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you are maneuver-ing.You are always responsible for safety, and mustalways pay attention to your surroundings whenparking and maneuvering. This applies to theareas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-ers.The 360° camera will not function or will func-tion in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when drivinginto a heated garage in winter, causing a rapidchange in temperatureRif the camera lenses are dirty or coveredRif the vehicle components in which the cam-eras are installed are damaged. In this event,have the camera position and setting checkedat a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damage toobjects or the vehicle.The guide lines in the COMANDdisplay show thedistances to your vehicle. The distances onlyapply to road level.The camera in the rear area is protected bymeans of a flap. This flap opens when the 360°camera is activated. Observe the notes oncleaning (Y page 339). For technical reasons,the flap may remain open briefly after the 360°camera has been deactivated.On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,depending on technical conditions, leaving thestandard height can result in:Rinaccuracies in the guide linesRinaccuracies in the display of generatedimages (top view)

Activation conditionsThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:Rthe multimedia system is switched onRthe 360° Camera function is switched oni If you are driving faster than at a moderatespeed and you turn on the 360° camera, awarning message appears.The warning message disappears if:Ryou are again driving at a moderate speedThe 360° camera is then activated.Rthe message is confirmed with the%button.

Switching the 360° camera on and offusing the button

X To switch on: press button:.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and the imagefrom the front camera orRa split screen with top view and the imagefrom the rear view camera

X To switch off: press button:.

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can be automaticallydisplayed by engaging reverse gear.

Driving systems 211

Drivingandparking

Z

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected in the multimedia system(see the Digital Operator's Manual).

X To show the 360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The multimedia system shows the areabehind the vehicle in split-screen mode. Yousee the top view of the vehicle and the imagefrom the rear view camera.

Selecting the split-screen view or fullscreen modeSwitching between split screen views:X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:slide5 the controller.

X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.Switching to full screen mode:X 180° View Turn and press the controller.i The full screen option is only available in thefollowing views:RTop view with picture from the rear viewcameraRTop viewwith picture from the front camera

Multimedia display

Important safety notesThe camera system may show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.Obstacles are not shown by the system in thefollowing locations:Runder the front and rear bumpersRvery close to the front and rear bumpersRin close range above the handle on the trunklidRvery close to the exterior mirrorsRin the transitional areas between the variouscameras in the virtual top view

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

Rthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and rear view camera image

= Guide line for the maximum steering angle? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steering

wheel angle (dynamic)A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

D BumperE Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.


The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front cam-era

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steeringwheel angle (dynamic)

A Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and rear view camera image enlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating the distanceto the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Top view with image from the side cam-eras

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facingside camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (right side ofvehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

i You can also select the side camera settingfor the rear-facing view.

180° view

: Symbol for the full screen setting with rearview camera image

; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displays

i 180° view can also be selected as frontview.

Select this view when you are driving out of anexit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,for example.

Driving systems 213

Drivingandparking

Z

i If you select the% symbol in the displayand confirm with the controller, the split-screen view appears.

Exiting 360° camera display modeThe 360° camera display is stoppedRwhen you select transmission position P, orRwhen you are driving at moderate speedsThe viewwhich was active before the 360° cam-era was displayed appears in the Audio 20 orCOMAND display. You can also stop the 360°camera display split-screen view by selectingthe% symbol in the display and then con-firming with the COMAND controller.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It isactive in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSISTdetects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-ing lapses in concentration on the part of thedriver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. Itmight not always recognize fatigue or increasinginattentiveness in time or fail to recognize themat all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed or notoccur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-imately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surfaceis uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-erationRif you are predominantly driving slower than37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph(200 km/h)Rif you are driving with the active Steer Assistof DISTRONIC PLUS

Rif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when youchange lanes or change your speed

The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessmentis deleted and restarted when continuing thejourney, if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open the driv-er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or totake a break

Displaying the attention level

You can have current status information dis-played in the assistance menu (Y page 247) ofthe on-board computer.X Select the Assistance display for AttentionAssist using the on-board computer(Y page 246).

The following information is displayed:Rlength of the journey since the last break.Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTIONASSIST (Attention Level), displayed in abar display in five levels from high to low.RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot issue a warn-ing, the System Suspended messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 248).The system determines the attention level ofthe driver depending on the setting selected:


Selection Standard: the sensitivity with whichthe system determines the attention level is setto normal.Selection Sensitive: the sensitivity is sethigher. The attention level detected by AttentionAssist is adapted accordingly and the driver iswarned earlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunction dis-play in the assistance graphic display.WhenATTENTIONASSIST has been deactivated,it is automatically reactivated after the enginehas been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-responds to the last selection activated (stand-ard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentrationare detected, a warning appears in the multi-function display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take aBreak!.In addition to the message shown in the multi-function display, you will then hear a warningtone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If you donot take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST stilldetects increasing lapses in concentration, youwill be warned again after 15 minutes at theearliest. This will only happen if ATTEN-TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators offatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.If a warning is output in the multifunction dis-play, a service station search is performed inCOMAND. You can select a service station andnavigation to this service station will then begin.This function can be activated and deactivatedin COMAND.

Traffic Sign Assist

General notesTraffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speedpermitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.The data and general traffic regulations stored inthe navigation system are used to determine thecurrent speed limit.

Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, andfor this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily(e.g. near roadworks) are not detected.If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle ispassed, the display of the speed limits is upda-ted.Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by anadditional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are alsoshown.The traffic signs are only displayed with therestrictions if:Rthe regulation must be observed with therestriction, orRTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determinewhether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine amaximumpermitted speed from any of the avail-able sources, no speed limit is displayed in theinstrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-tries. In this case, symbol: is shown in theassistance graphic display (Y page 246).

Important safety notesTraffic SignAssist is only an aid and is not alwaysable to correctly display speed limits. Trafficsigns always have priority over the Traffic SignAssist display.The system may be either functionally impairedor temporarily unavailable if the information inthe digital streetmap of the navigation system isincorrect or out of date.

Driving systems 215

Drivingandparking

Z

Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphicX Call up the assistance graphics display func-tion using the on-board computer(Y page 246).

X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.Detected traffic signs are displayed in theinstrument cluster.

Speed limit with unknown restriction

: Maximum permitted speed; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for

which the restriction in the additional sign isrelevant

= Additional sign for unknown restrictionA maximum permitted speed of 80 mph(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 km/h(60 mph) with an unknown restriction apply.

i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)depends on the country in which you are driv-ing. It is generally neither shown on the trafficsign nor on the instrument cluster butmust betaken into account when observing the max-imum permitted speed.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 216) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 218).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist monitors the areas on eitherside of the vehicle that are not visible to thedriver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrorsdraws your attention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on the cor-responding turn signal to change lane, you willalso receive an optical and audible warning.Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radarsystem only. Removing, tampering with, oraltering the device will void any warranties,and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-per with, alter, or use in any non-approvedway.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that thebumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. Thesensors must not be covered, for example by


cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following asevere impact or in the event of damage to thebumpers, have the function of the radar sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain, snow or sprayRthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles orbicyclesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next toyour vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if there are vehicles driving at the inneredge of their lanes.

Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, such astrucks.

Warning display

: Warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning is alwaysemitted when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle, the warning onlyoccurs if the difference in speed is less than7 mph (12 km/h).If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assistis not operational.The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-roundings.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring range ofBlind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-sponding turn signal, a double warning tonesounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. If the turnsignal remains on, vehicles detected are indica-ted by the flashing of red warning lamp:.There are no further warning tones.

Driving systems 217

Drivingandparking

Z

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist(Y page 248) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red until the engine is started.

Display in the assistance graphic

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radarwaves propagating backwards appear next tothe vehicle in the assistance display in the mul-tifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph(30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in theassistance display changes to green:. BlindSpot Assist is then ready for use.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

LaneKeepingAssistmonitors the area in front ofyour vehicle by means of multifunction cam-era: which is attached behind the top of thewindshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detectslane markings on the road and can warn youbefore you leave your lane unintentionally.

This function is available in the range between40mph and 120mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).A warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel forup to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. LaneKeeping Assist cannot take into account theroad, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-ing in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-cle in the lane.The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflections (e.g. when the road surfaceis wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the camera


Rthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the road

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssist

X To activate: press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The Lane Keep‐ing Assist Onmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display. If all conditions have beensatisfied, there may be a warning.If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 246) are shown in green. Lane Keep-ing Assist is ready for use.

X To deactivate: press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. Lane KeepingAssist is deactivated. The Lane KeepingAssist Off message appears in the multi-function display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive settingX In the DriveAssist menu on the on-boardcomputer, select the Lane Keeping Assistfunction (Y page 248).

X Select Standard or Adaptive.StandardWhen Standard is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:

Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveWhen Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanesRyou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving Assistance PLUS package

General notesThe Driving Assistance PLUS package consistsof DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186), Active BlindSpot Assist (Y page 219) and Active Lane Keep-ing Assist (Y page 222).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle,to monitor the area to the sides of the vehiclewhich the driver is unable to see. A warning dis-play in the exterior mirrors draws your attentionto vehicles detected in the monitored area. If

Driving systems 219

Drivingandparking

Z

you then switch on the corresponding turn sig-nal to change lane, you will also receive an opti-cal and audible warning. If a risk of lateral colli-sion is detected, corrective braking may helpyou avoid a collision. Before a course-correctingbrake application, Active Blind Spot Assist eval-uates the space in the direction of travel and atthe sides of the vehicle. For this, Active BlindSpot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sen-sors.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is nota substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approved bythe FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Theradar sensor is intended for use in an auto-motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-ing, or altering of the device will void any war-ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Donot tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.

Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

Radar sensorsThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpers andbehind a cover in the radiator trim. Make surethat the bumpers and the cover in the radiatorgrill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensorsmust not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks oroverhanging loads. Following a severe impact orin the event of damage to the bumpers, have thefunction of the radar sensors checked at a quali-fied specialist workshop. Active Blind SpotAssist may otherwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.


The detection of obstacles can be impaired inthe case of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or sprayVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrowvehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, ormay only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if there are vehicles at the inner edge ofyour lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

Warning display

: Warning displayActive Blind Spot Assist is not operational atspeeds below approximately 20mph (30 km/h).Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning is alwaysemitted when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle, the warning onlyoccurs if the difference in speed is less than7 mph (12 km/h).

If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind SpotAssist is not operational.The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-roundings.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, grayradar waves propagating backwards appearnext to the vehicle in the assistance display inthe multifunction display. Above a speed of20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar wavesin the assistance display changes to green;.Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to change lanesand a vehicle is detected in the side monitoringrange, you receive a visual and acoustic collisionwarning. You will then hear a double warningtone and redwarning lamp: flashes. If the turnsignal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-ted by the flashing of red warning lamp:.There are no further warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat-eral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. Thisis meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

G WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou ormakes a course-correcting brake appli-cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

Driving systems 221

Drivingandparking

Z

If a course-correcting brake application occurs,red warning lamp: flashes in the exterior mir-ror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition,display; underlining the danger of a side col-lision appears in the multifunction display.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. A course-cor-recting brake application may be interrupted atany time if you steer slightly in the oppositedirection or accelerate.The course-correcting brake application is avail-able in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Either no braking application, or a course-cor-recting brake application adapted to the drivingsituation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 248).

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds. Grayradar waves propagating backwards appearnext to the vehicle in the assistance display inthe multifunction display.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of multifunctioncamera: at the top of the windshield. Variousdifferent areas to the front, rear and side of yourvehicle are also monitored with the aid of theradar sensor system. Active Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, alane-correcting application of the brakes canbring the vehicle back into the original lane.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, Active LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics. ActiveLane Keeping Assist cannot take account ofroad and weather conditions. It may not recog-nize traffic situations. Active Lane KeepingAssist is only an aid. You are responsible for thedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuouslykeep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.


Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflections (e.g. when the road surfaceis wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpersor the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured bysnowRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadIf no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane andbroken lanemarkings are detected, no lane-cor-recting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel forup to 1.5 seconds.

Lane-correcting brake applicationIf you leave your lane, under certain circumstan-ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.This ismeant to assist you in bringing the vehicleback to the original lane.

G WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunction display.The brake application also slightly reduces vehi-cle speed.This function is available in the range between40mph and 120mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).A lane-correcting brake application can bemadeafter driving over a lane marking detected asbeing solid or broken. Before this, a warningmust be given bymeans of intermittent vibrationin the steering wheel. In addition, a lane withlane markings on both sides must be recog-nized.In the case of a broken lane marking beingdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has been detectedin the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, over-taking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanescan be detected.

i A further lane-correcting brake applicationcan only occur after your vehicle has returnedto the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-erate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have switched on the turn signal.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Driving systems 223

Drivingandparking

Z

Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-eration.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire hasbeen detected and displayed.Ran obstacle in the lane inwhich you are drivinghas been detected.

Active Lane Keeping Assistmay not detect otherroad users or traffic situations. An inappropriatebrake applicationmaybe interrupted at any timeif you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite directionRswitch on the turn signalRclearly brake or accelerateA lane-correcting brake application is interrup-ted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.

Activating/deactivating Active LaneKeeping Assist

X To activate: press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The Lane Keep‐ing Assist Onmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display. If all conditions have beensatisfied, a warning or steering interventionmay be made.If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 246) are shown in green. Active LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.

X To deactivate: press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. The Active LaneKeeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane

Keeping Assist Off message appears inthe multifunction display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive settingX In the DriveAssist menu on the on-boardcomputer, select the Active Lane Keep‐ing Assist function (Y page 248).

X Select Standard or Adaptive.When Standard is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

When Adaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation

Points to remember

General notesHybrid technology combines a fuel efficientinternal combustion engine with a powerfulelectric motor. In HYBRID mode, the hybrid

224 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

drive systemautomatically selects themost effi-cient operating mode for every driving situation.Drive the vehicle in the usual manner.To save fuel in HYBRID mode, the hybrid drivesystem switches off the combustion engine asoften as possible during the journeywhen poweroutput requirements are low. When power out-put requirements are low, the electric motorpowers the vehicle. When power output require-ments are high, the combustion engine is auto-matically switched on. The engine is usuallyswitched off when the vehicle is stationary. Con-sequently, there is usually no engine idling aswith combustion engine vehicles.For pulling away and accelerating, the electricmotor supports the internal combustion engineusing the power stored in the high-voltage bat-tery. In addition, the power is used for partiallyelectric driving, operation of the electric coolantcompressor and to support the 12 V on-boardelectrical system. In this way the hybrid drivesystem helps to reduce your vehicle's fuel con-sumption.Observe the driving tips on plug-in hybrid oper-ation (Y page 230).

Recuperative Brake SystemIf you release the accelerator pedal when thevehicle is in motion, overrun recuperation is ini-tiated. The electric motor is operated as a gen-erator when in overrun mode and when youbrake. Hybrid technology converts the kineticenergy of the vehicle into electricity and storesit in the high-voltage battery.Observe the important safety notes for theRecuperative Brake System (Y page 45).

Important safety notesIf the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function and you open the driver's door:Ra message appears in the multifunction dis-play andRa warning tone soundsFurther information (Y page 272).All of the vehicle's systems remain active, if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe combustion engine is switched off andRthe READY indicator in the instrument clusterlights up

If you remove your foot from the brake pedalwhile in transmission position D or R, the vehiclemay pull away automatically.Observe the notes on the READY display of theECO start/stop function (Y page 231).Vehicles with an electric motor generate muchless driving noise than vehicles with internalcombustion engines. As a result, your vehiclemay not be heard by other road users in certainsituations. This is the case, for example, whenyou are parking and your vehicle is not seen byother road users.This requires you to adopt a particularly antici-patory driving style, as it is necessary to allowfor the possibility that other road users maybehave erratically.

Displays and operation

Electric motor performance display

The power display for the electric motor is loca-ted on the right-hand side of the instrumentcluster.RArea: to; (E-DRIVE):This shows the electric output from the elec-tric motor, e.g. during electric operation or inboost mode.When the motor is switched on, the display isat limit:. With increasing pressure on theaccelerator pedal the display fills up from:to;.Driving with the electric motor: when thedisplay reaches limit;, the combustionengine is switched on. If the display isapproaching limit; and you remove yourfoot from the accelerator pedal, the displayempties again. The combustion engine is notswitched on. At low speeds, you can thereby

PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation 225

Drivingandparking

Z

control the electric operation usage so thatyou only drive in electric mode.Driving with the combustion engine: theelectric motor supports the combustionengine by providing additional torque (boostmode) until the display reaches limit;.You can also select the operating mode of thehybrid drive system (Y page 226).RArea= to? (CHARGE):This shows the recuperated energy which isstored in the high-voltage battery as electricalenergy.When the display reaches limit?, the maxi-mum recuperative braking power has beenexhausted. The mechanical brake is activa-ted.

Selecting the operating mode

Button: allows you to choose between differ-ent operating modes.X Press button: to change the operatingmode.The operating mode selected appears in theinstrument cluster.If it is not possible to change operatingmodes, the display message Change thecurrent drive program before chang‐ing the operating mode. or Exit man‐ual drive program M before changingthe operating mode. appears in the multi-function display. Further information on "Dis-play messages" (Y page 272).

: Operating mode selected; Operating mode unavailable= Operating mode available

HYBRID RElectric mode or drivingwith the internal combus-tion engine is possibleRAutomatic selection ofdrive mode with electricmode as often as possi-bleRThe high-voltage batteryis discharged to approx-imately 20%RTo subsequently main-tain the condition ofcharge of the high-volt-age battery, the electricoutput is reduced. Allvehicle functions such aselectric operation mode,energy recuperation orboost mode, for example,are still available.

E-MODE RElectric-only driveRElectrical power outputallotted using the hapticaccelerator pedal(Y page 230)RInternal combustionengine activation usingthe haptic acceleratorpedal


E-SAVE RElectric mode or drivingwith the internal combus-tion engine is possibleRAutomatic selection ofdrive mode with electricmode as often as possi-bleRThe current condition ofcharge of the high-volt-age battery is maintainedso the electrical energycan be used at a latertime

CHARGE RElectric drive is not pos-sibleRCharging the high-volt-age battery while drivingusing the combustionengine

In automatic drive program S (Y page 229) andduring manual gearshifting (Y page 229), onlyHYBRID operating mode is available.If you switch from automatic drive program S toautomatic drive program E, HYBRID operatingmode continues to be selected.If manual drive program M is deactivated, theautomatic transmission shifts:Rinto the automatic drive program thatwas lastselectedRinto the driving mode that was last selectedEach time the engine is started, HYBRID modeis automatically selected.

Operating the on-board computerYou can display the current operating conditionof the hybrid drive system in the multifunctiondisplay and on the display of the multimediasystem (Y page 227).In the multimedia system display, you can alsocall up a graphic display of the fuel consumptionand generated electricity (Y page 228).

Menus and submenus

Selecting displays in the display of themultimedia systemX Press theØ button on the controller.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Energy Flow: turn and press thecontroller.The energy flow is displayed.

orX To select Consumption: turn and press thecontroller.Fuel consumption and the generated electricenergy are displayed.

X To exit the display: press the% button onthe controller.

Selecting the energy flow display in themultifunction displayX UseÑ on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Travel menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Select Energy Flow with: or9 .The active hybrid components are highlightedin the energy flow display.

Energy flow display

Overview energy flow display

: Internal combustion engine; Electric motor= High-voltage battery condition of charge? High-voltage batteryA Energy flow


Drivingandparking

Z

The active hybrid components are highlighted.The energy flow is indicated by arrows. Thearrows have a different color depending on theoperating state.

Displaying the total range and electricalrange

The approximate range is based on the currentdriving style.X UseÑ on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Travel menu.


X Press: or9 to select the approximatetotal range and electrical range.

Displaying fuel consumption and gen-erated electricity

: Fuel consumption; Electrical energy generatedEvery bar of the graph displays the averagevalue for one minute.Fuel consumption indicator: may differ fromthe indicator in the From Start trip computer inthe Trip menu.

To reset the values: the values are reset alongwith the From Start trip computer(Y page 240).X To select Consumption: turn and press thecontroller.The display of the multimedia system showsfuel consumption: and electrical energygenerated; for the past 15 minutes of driv-ing.

Starting the engineThe vehicle starts in electric mode without theinternal combustion engine (noiseless start).The internal combustion engine starts only afterthe power demanded by the driver exceeds theavailable power that the electric motor can cur-rently provide.Noiseless start operation is dependent on theoutside temperature and the operating temper-ature of the internal combustion engine. If not allconditions for noiseless start operation are ful-filled, the vehicle starts with the internal com-bustion engine.

X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal.X Observe the notes on starting the engine(Y page 148).

X Start the vehicle (Y page 148).The vehicle is operational when READY indi-cator: lights up.

Pulling awayX Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X If the Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'display message appears in the multifunctiondisplay, depress the brake pedal more firmlyand select the desired transmission position.


X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.For further information on pulling away(Y page 149).

Driving

DYNAMIC SELECT switch

Drive programsUse the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change thedrive program. Depending on the drive programselected the following vehicle characteristicswill change:Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-ment)Rthe suspensionRthe steeringRthe climate control:

- the climate control settings- the rear window defroster operation period- the performance of the seat heatingRthe availability of the Eco AssistantEach time you start the engine using the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button, drive programC isactivated. For further information about startingthe engine, see (Y page 148).

X Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch: forwardsor backwards until the desired drive programis selected.The status icon of the selected drive programis shown in the multifunction display.In addition, the current drive programsettingsare displayed briefly in themultimedia systemdisplay.i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-tion is deactivated at the factory due to the

available fuel grade. In this case, the ECOstart/stop function is not available in anydrive program, regardless of the display in themultimedia system display.

Available drive programs:


S+ Sport Plus RExtremely sporty drivingstyle with boost modeRElectric-only operation isnot possible

S Sport RSporty driving style withboost modeRElectric-only operation isnot possible

C Comfort RComfortable, economicaldriving styleRElectric-only drive is pos-sible

E Economy RParticularly economicaldriving styleRElectric operation modeis used as often as possi-bleRDouble pulses in the hap-tic accelerator pedal, asan indication to releasethe accelerator pedal(Y page 230)RAfter the acceleratorpedal has been released,the coasting characteris-tics of the vehicle areadapted to the trafficconditions.

Additional information for drive programs(Y page 159).Using the steering wheel paddle shifters, youcan temporarily change gears yourself. For fur-ther information on the manual drive program(Y page 229).

Manual gear shiftingUsing the steering wheel paddle shifters, youcan temporarily change gears yourself. Thetransmissionmust be in positionD. Duringman-ual gearshifting, the combustion engine isalways switched on.


Drivingandparking

Z

Activating when driving with the electric motor:X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 161).The combustion engine is switched on. Man-ual gearshifting is activated temporarily. Theselected gear andM appear in the multifunc-tion display.

Activating when driving with the combustionengine:X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 161).Manual gearshifting is activated temporarily.The selected gear andM appear in the multi-function display.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen manually changing gear.For further information on the manual drive pro-gram (Y page 161).

Haptic accelerator pedal

General notesThe haptic accelerator pedal helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissions ofyour vehicle.There are two different functions available forthis purpose:Ran additional point of resistance in E-MODEoperating mode (Y page 226)Ra double pulse in drive program E(Y page 229)

Additional point of resistance in the hap-tic accelerator pedalThe maximum available electric performance isindicated by a tangible point of resistance in thehaptic accelerator pedal.The additional point of resistance is available inE-MODE operating mode (Y page 226).If you depress the haptic accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point, the combustionengine is switched on.

Double pulses in the haptic acceleratorpedalA tangible double pulse in the haptic acceleratorpedal gives you a recommendation to releasethe accelerator pedal. By this means, inHYBRID, E-MODE or E-SAVE operating modethe combustion engine can be switched off and

disconnected from the power train (overrunmode).The double pulse is available in drive program E(Y page 229).After the accelerator pedal has been released,the coasting characteristics of the vehicle areadapted to the traffic conditions.To avoid getting too close to the vehicle in front,you must apply the brakes manually when nec-essary.

Driving tips

General driving tipsDrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Avoid frequent andsudden acceleration as well as abrupt braking.During partial electric driving, pulling away andacceleration, the electric motor supports theinternal combustion engine.During overrun in transmission position D andbraking, the electric motor will operate as a gen-erator.Further information on the ECO start/stop func-tion (Y page 231).Additional driving tips (Y page 179).

Stationary vehicleIf the vehicle is stopped, the combustion engineis, for the most part, switched off. Automaticclimate control continues to function. The elec-tromechanically assisted steering gear allowsyou to use the power steering without reducedcomfort.

AccelerationDepending on the operating mode, pulling awayand driving under low load conditions are per-formed:Rentirely by electric propulsionRin combination with the internal combustionengine

When accelerating at an increased or full load,boost mode is utilized. The electric motor sup-ports the internal combustion engine by provid-ing additional torque when the accelerator isdepressed rapidly.


Overrun mode or brakingThere are three possible operating modes whenthe hybrid vehicle is decelerating:Renergy recovery takes place even when thevehicle is decelerating purely in overrunmode(Y page 225). The electric motor operates asa generator and stores the recovered energyin the high-voltage batteryRwhen the brakes are applied lightly, the vehi-cle is slowed down further by the electricmotor This increases the energy recovery tak-ing place (Y page 225) The electric motoroperates as a generator and stores the recov-ered energy in the high-voltage battery.Rwhen the brakes are applied with greaterforce, the service brakes are also used to slowthe vehicle down. The two systems worktogether

Urban drivingEnergy is recuperated during frequent deceler-ation and stopping in city traffic.The vehicle can be driven by the electric motoralone up to a speed of approximately 120 km/h.The vehicle is driven by the electric motor aloneonly when all conditions for the automaticengine switch-off are fulfilled.Further information on the automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 231).

Driving on inter-urban roadsThe following phases are possible when drivingon inter-urban roads:Rrapid acceleration (boost mode)Rconstant energy consumptionRenergy recuperationRelectric operation modeA great deal of recovered energy may be avail-able, depending on the route profile. Thisreduces consumption and emissions.

Highway drivingDuring highway driving, fuel consumption andemissions are favorably influenced in particularby reduced power losses.If the driver removes his foot from the acceler-ator pedal in drive program E and a speed of160 km/h is not exceeded, the combustionengine is automatically switched off.Further information on the automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 231).

ECO start/stop function

General notesThe ECO start/stop function switches the inter-nal combustion engine off automatically whenthe vehicle stops moving and at high speeds(Y page 232).All vehicle systems remain active, e.g. the auto-matic climate control.The ECO start/stop function is only available indrive programs C and E. Electric-only operationis only possible in drive programs C and E. Addi-tional information for drive programs(Y page 229).

Automatic engine switch-offThe engine is switched off automatically, includ-ing when:Rthe driver removes his foot from the acceler-ator in drive program E and a speed of160 km/h is not exceeded (Y page 232)Rthe engine has reached its operating temper-atureRthe driver’s seat belt is fastened and thedriver’s door is closedRthe driver only slightly depresses the accel-erator pedal in order to, for example, maintainthe current speed for a limited distanceRthe hood is closed and engaged properlyRthe high-voltage battery is charged suffi-cientlyRno malfunctions are present in the hybriddrive system

The internal combustion engine will not beswitched off automatically, if:Rthe self-diagnosis function of the engine con-trol unit is still activeRthere is a malfunction in the hybrid drive sys-temRthe climate control of the vehicle requires itRthe high-voltage battery is being charged(Y page 227)Rautomatic emissions tests are running


Drivingandparking

Z

Automatic engine startThe automatically switched-off internal combus-tion engine starts automatically in certain situa-tions, if:Rthe power demand from the driver via theaccelerator pedal is greater than the electricmotor alone can provideRthe driver switches to drive program S or MRthe condition of charge of the high-voltagebattery has reached the lower limitRthe settings of the automatic climate controlrequire it, e.g. at external temperatures above30 †

Overrun modeIn overrun mode, the combustion engine isswitched off and is disconnected from the drivetrain. The electric motor:Rgenerates low thrust, which corresponds tothe overrun mode of an active combustionengineRfunctions as a generator and produces thenecessary energy for the auxiliary consumersand charges the high-voltage battery

Overrun mode is available in drive program Ebelow 160 km/h.In drive program E, after the accelerator pedalhas been released the coasting characteristicsof the vehicle are adapted to the traffic condi-tions. Further information about the hapticaccelerator pedal (Y page 230).

Route-based energy managementFor route-based energy management, the sys-tem factors in information about the expectedroute when route guidance is active.The information on the route is provided by themultimedia system and includes the following:Rroad categoriesRspeed limitationsRdata on downhill gradientsThe use of electric energy is automatically opti-mally distributed from the beginning to the endof the journey, using information about theroute. The distribution is pre-emptive and takesinto consideration:Rthe sections of the journey aheadRthe energy consumption on the whole route

The condition of charge of the high-voltage bat-tery is thus systematically controlled. In addi-tion, the control function takes into accountthat:Rthe fuel savings through the use of electricalenergy can vary, depending on the route (e.g.urban, interurban or highway)Rthe use of electrical energy is held available inparticular for electric operation (e.g. urbanroutes)

The vehicle thus automatically selects the opti-mum driving mode for the respective section ofthe route.Route-based energy management is availableunder the following conditions:Rdrive program E is selectedRHYBRID driving mode is selectedRactive route guidance is activatedRsuitable map data is availableWhen route-based energy management is inoperation, the area in front of the vehicle isshown as green in the multifunction display.

ParkingX Apply the electric parking brake.The red! indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift theautomatic transmission to P.

X Switch the ignition off.The READY indicator in the instrument clustergoes out.

Further information on parking and switching offthe internal combustion engine (Y page 177).


Problems with PLUG-IN HYBRID operation

Internal combustion engine


You cannot start theinternal combustionengine. The multifunc-tion display shows nodisplay messages. TheREADY indicator in themultifunction display isoff.

For example, self-diagnosis is not yet complete or the hybrid drivesystem is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Try to start the internal combustion engine again.If the internal combustion engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

You wish to pull away,but the ECO start/stopfunction does not startthe internal combustionengine. The READY indi-cator in the multifunc-tion display is off.

The ECO start/stop function has failed. The warning and indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster light up.X Shift the transmission to P.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Start the engine.

The hybrid drive system is malfunctioning.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Recuperative Brake System


Braking resistance isreduced and brake pedaltravel is longer thanusual.

G Risk of accidentThe Recuperative Brake System is malfunctioning.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play (Y page 255).

X Observe the information regarding indicator and warning lamps inthe instrument cluster (Y page 288) .


Drivingandparking

Z

Hybrid drive system


The hybrid drive systemhas been switched offautomatically.

You have been in an accident.The hybrid drive system remains switched off if:Rthe internal combustion engine cannot be restarted after a fewseconds.Rthe red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument clus-ter is lit.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The hybrid drive systemhas been switched offautomatically. The multi-function display alsoshows a display mes-sage.

An electrical short circuit has occurred in the hybrid drive systemor anelectrical connection has been disconnected.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play (Y page 255).





Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the on-board computer.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles only:

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so andconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

All vehicles, except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-cles:

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.Contact a qualified specialist workshop.The on-board computer only showsmessages orwarnings from certain systems in the multifunc-tion display. You should therefore make sureyour vehicle is operating safely at all times.

For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-tration (Y page 36).


Instrument cluster lighting

The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-plays and the controls in the vehicle interior canbe adjusted using brightness control knob:.X Turn brightness control knob: up or down.If you turn the light switch (Y page 118) to theT,Ã or L position, the brightnesswill depend upon the brightness of the ambi-ent light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness of themultifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are illuminated. A dimming function isnot possible in daylight.

Speedometer with segmentsThe speedometer is divided into segments onMercedes-AMG vehicles or vehicles withDISTRONIC PLUS.The segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 185):The segments light up from the stored speedto the type-tested maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 186):One or two segments in the set speed rangelight up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in frontthat is driving at a slower speed than thestored speed:

Displays and operation 235

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

The segments between the speed of the vehi-cle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as thiscould damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-play indicates the temperature measured anddoes not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in the multi-function display (Y page 237).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The enginewill otherwise be damaged.

All vehicles except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:the coolant temperature display is in the lowersection of the tachometer (Y page 36).

PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles: themultifunction dis-play shows the coolant temperature in theCoolant submenu (Y page 246).Under normal operating conditions and with thespecified coolant level, the coolant temperaturemay rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Operating the on-board computer

: Multifunction display; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer using thebuttons on the multifunction steering wheel.Left control panel

ò ROpens the menu list

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a menu or functionRIn the Radio or Media menu:opens the track or station list andselects a station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the Telephone menu: switchesto the phone book and selects aname or a telephone number

236 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

9

:

Press and hold:RScrolls quickly through all listsRIn the Radio or Media menu:selects a station, audio track orvideo scene using rapid scrollingRIn the Telephone menu: startsrapid scrolling if the phone book isopen

a RIn all menus: confirms the selectedentry in the listRIn the Radio or Media menu:opens the list of available radiosources or mediaRIn the Telephone menu: switchesto the phone book and starts dial-ing the selected number

ñ RVehicles with Audio 20:Switches off voice-operated con-trol for navigation (see manufac-turer's operating instructions)RVehicles with COMAND:Switches off the Voice ControlSystem (see the separate operat-ing instructions)

% Press briefly:RBackRIn the Radio or Mediamenu: dese-lects the track or station list or listof available radio sources ormediaRHides display messagesRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

ó RVehicles with Audio 20:Switches on voice-operated con-trol for navigation (see manufac-turer's operating instructions)RVehicles with COMAND:Switches on the Voice Control Sys-tem (see the separate operatinginstructions)

Multifunction display

: Drive program (Y page 157); Transmission position (Y page 158)= All vehicles, except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-

cles: additional speedometer(Y page 251)

? DisplayA TimeB PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: outside temper-

ature or additional speedometer(Y page 251)

Display panel? shows the selected menu orsubmenu and display messages.X To open the menu list: press theò but-ton on the steering wheel.Display panel? appears in the menu list.

Displays and operation 237

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Possible displays in the multifunction dis-play:RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shiftingmanually (Y page 161)Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 202)RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 185)RPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: READY PLUG-INHYBRID operation activated (see the DigitalOperator's Manual)RPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: HYBRID operatingmode, additional operating mode displays(see the Digital Operator's Manual)RPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:è electricrange (see the Digital Operator's Manual)R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist(Y page 120)Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 150)Rë HOLD function (Y page 194)Ra DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot (Y page 192)

Head-up display

General notesThe head-up display projects information fromthe navigation system and the driver assistancesystem above the dashboard into the driver'sfield of vision.A requirement for the display of the contents isthat the following functions are available in thevehicle and are switched on:RCruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRTraffic Sign AssistRNavigationThe head-up display allows the driver to see allof the information without having to take hiseyes off the road.

Important safety notesThe head-up display is only an aid and is not asubstitute for attentive driving.The visibility of the head-up display is influencedby the following conditions:Rthe driver's seat positionRthe positioning of the display imageRthe general ambient light

Rsunglasses with polarization filtersRwet roadsRblocking of sunlight by objects on the displaycover

In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of thedisplay may fade. This can be reversed byswitching the head-up display off and on again.

i Vehicles with the head-up display are equip-ped with a special windshield. Should repairsbe necessary, have thewindshield replaced ata qualified specialist workshop.


Switching the head-up display on/off

X Press button:.When the head-up display is switched on, thedisplay appears in the driver's field of vision.

Standard displays in the head-up display

The head-up display shows the followingcontents and information:

: Navigation messages; Current speed= Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS set

speed? Detected traffic signs

238 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

AMG displays in the head-up displayAMG displays are available in Mercedes-AMGvehicles.

The head-up display shows the followingcontents and information:

: Current engine speed; Current speed= Upshift indicator? Currently selected gear, gearshift options

when shifting manuallyA RACETIMERB Lap

Setting optionsYou can adjust the following settings in thehead-up display submenu:Radjust the position of the head-up display onthe windshield (Y page 250)Radjust the brightness of the displays in thehead-up display (Y page 250)Rselect desired displays in the head-up display(Y page 249)Using the Display Content function, youcan, depending on your vehicle's equipment,choose between four standard displays. Theselected contents then appear in the head-updisplay.In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can alsochoose between two AMG displays. If youselect an AMG display, the head-up displayshows AMG-specific contents.If you select a display with traffic signs, detec-ted traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assistappear in the head-up display.

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress theò button on the steering wheel toopen the menu list.Operating the on-board computer (Y page 236).Depending on the vehicle equipment, you canselect the following menu:RTrip menu (Y page 239)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 241)RRadio menu (Y page 243)RMedia menu (Y page 243)RTelephone menu (Y page 245)RAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 246)RService menu (Y page 246)RSettings menu (Y page 247)RAMG menu in Mercedes-AMG vehicles(Y page 252)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steer-ing wheel until the Tripmenu with trip odom-eter: and odometer; appears.

Menus and submenus 239

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis-plays approximate range:.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the menu displayscurrent fuel consumption;. In the subsequentmessage, the multifunction display shows theapproximate electrical range as well as the totalrange (Y page 228).X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Trip menu.

X Press9 or: to select the display withapproximate range: and current fuel con-sumption;.Approximate range: that can be covered iscalculated according to your current drivingstyle and the amount of fuel in the tank. Ifthere is only a small amount of fuel left in thefuel tank, a vehicle being refueledCappears instead of approximate range:.Recuperation display= shows you if energyhas been recuperated from the kinetic energyin overrun mode and saved in the battery.Recuperation display= depends on theengine installed and is therefore not availablein all vehicles.

ECO displayThe ECO display is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.


X Press the: or9 button to select ECOdisplay.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For more information on the ECO display, see(Y page 180).

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

: Odometer; Driving time= Average speed? PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: emission-free

trip distanceA Average fuel consumptionX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Press: or9 to select From Start orFrom Reset.The values in the From Start submenu are cal-culated from the start of a journey, while thevalues in the From Reset submenu are calcu-lated from the last time the submenu was reset(Y page 241).In the following cases the trip computer is auto-matically reset From Start:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.

240 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have beenexceeded, the trip computer is automaticallyreset From Reset.Digital speedometerX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.



X Press the: or9 button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting valuesX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Press the: or9 button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.X Press: to select Yes and pressa toconfirm.

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO displayIf you reset the values in the ECO display, thevalues in the "From Start" trip computer are alsoreset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"trip computer, the values in the ECO display arealso reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. You can find fur-ther information on navigation instructions inthe separate operating instructions.

X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Navi menu.


Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the next destination; Estimated arrival time= Distance to the next change of direction? Current road


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to the change of direction= Change-of-direction symbol? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white)A Possible laneB Lane not recommended (dark gray)On multilane roads, new lane recommendationscan be displayed for the next change of directionif the digital map supports this data. During thechange of direction, new lanes may be added.Lane not recommendedB: you will not be ableto complete the next change of direction if youstay in this lane.Possible laneA: you will only be able to com-plete the next change of direction in this lane.Recommended lane?: in this lane you will beable to complete the next change of directionand the one after that.

Change of direction without lane recom-mendation


; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is to be made, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indicatorshortens towards the top of the display as youapproach the point of the announced change ofdirection. The change of direction starts oncethe distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction with lane recommen-dation


; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbol? Lane recommendation


-board

computerand

displays

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

: Additional informationOther possible additional information:RNew Route... or Calculating Route...A new route is calculated.RRoad Not MappedThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigitalmap but the road is not recognized, e.g.newly built streets, car parks or private land.RNo RouteNo route could be calculated to the selecteddestination.RO

You have reached the destination or an inter-mediate destination.

Radio menu

: Frequency range; Station frequency with memory position= Name of artist? Name of trackThe multifunction display shows station; withstation frequency or station name. The preset

position is only displayed alongwith station; ifthis has been stored. You can store TV chan-nels; in the multimedia system.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).


X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Radio menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.Currently set station; appears in the multi-function display.

X To open the station list: press: or9briefly.

X To select a station in the station list:press: or9 briefly.

X To select a station in the station list usingrapid scroll: press and hold: or9.

X To select the frequency range or stationmemory: pressa briefly.

X Press: or9 to select the frequencyrange or station memory.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.Further information on radio operation can befound in the multimedia system (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

Media menu

Changing the media sourceYou can change the media source and playbackmode (audio or video) at any time in the Mediamenu.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).


X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Media menu.


X To open/close the media sources list:pressa briefly.The list shows the following media sources,for example:


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

RDisc (CD/DVD) (DVD COMAND only)RSD cardRMedia Register (COMAND)RUSB storage deviceRBluetooth® capable audio device

Please observe further information on mediasupport and media operation in the multimediasystem (see separate operating instructions).

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

: Media source, e.g. name of USB memorystick

; Current title= Name of artist? Name of albumA Folder nameAudio data from various audio devices or mediacan be played, depending on the equipmentinstalled in the vehicle.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).




X To select an audio player or media: pressa briefly. The list containing the mediasources appears.

X Press: or9 to select the correspond-ing audio player or media.

X Pressa to confirm.X To open the track list: press: or9briefly.

X To select to next or previous track in thetrack list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select a track in the track list usingrapid scroll: press and hold: or9until you reach the desired track.If you press and hold the button, the speed ofrapid scroll increases after a short time. Notall audio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If the corresponding track information is storedon the audio drive or audio media, the multi-function display may display the following:Rtrack numberRtrack nameRartistRalbumThe track information does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operation





X To select a DVD single drive or disc: pressa briefly. The list containing the mediasources appears.

X Press: or9 to select the correspond-ing DVD single drive or disc.

X Pressa to confirm.X To open the scene list: press: or9briefly.


-board

computera

nddisplays

X To select the next or previous scene in thescene list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select a scene in the scene list usingrapid scroll: press and hold: or9until desired scene: has been reached.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.

Telephone menu

Introduction


When telephoning, you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-facturer’s operating instructions).


X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to Audio20 or COMAND, see the separate operatinginstructions.


X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Telephone menu.


You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found a net-work and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searching fora network.

Accepting a callIf someone calls you when you are in the Tele‐phone menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display.You can accept a call at any time, even if you arenot in the Telephone menu.X Press the6 button on the steering wheelto accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a callYou can end or reject a call at any time even ifyou are not in the Telephone menu.X Press the~ button on the steering wheelto reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone bookX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Telephone menu.


X Press the:,9 ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Using: or9, select the names oneafter the other.

orX To start rapid scrolling: press and hold:or9 for longer than one second.The names in the phone book are displayedquickly one after the other.If you press and hold the: or9 buttonfor longer than five seconds, the nameappears with the next or previous letter initialletter in the alphabet.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored fora name: press the6 ora button tostart dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the: or9 button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

orX To exit the phone book: press the~ or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last names ornumbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Telephone menu.


X Press the6 button to switch to the redialmemory.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the redial memory: press the~or% button.

Assistance graphic menu


X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Assistance Graphicmenu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic.The assistance graphic displays the status ofand information from the following drivingsystems or driving safety systems:

RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186)RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 215)RDistance warning and the autonomousbraking function COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS (Y page 70)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 77)RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 216) or ActiveBlind Spot Assist (Y page 219)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 214)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 218) or ActiveLane Keeping Assist (Y page 222)

X Press: to display the ATTENTION ASSISTassessment.

Service menu

IntroductionDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theService menu:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 255)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 369)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 334)RDisplaying the coolant temperature (PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles) (Y page 246)

Displaying the coolant temperatureThe Coolant menu is only available in PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles.Observe the notes on coolant temperature(Y page 236).X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu.


X Press: or9 to select the Coolantsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.The coolant temperature is shown in a bardisplay.


-board

computerand

displays

Settings menu

IntroductionDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theSettings menu:RChanging assistance settings (Y page 247)RChanging HYBRID settings (PLUG-IN HYBRIDvehicles) (Y page 248)RChanging head-up display settings(Y page 249)RChanging the light settings (Y page 250)RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 251)RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 252)

Assistance submenu

Deactivating/activating ESP®Observe the "Important safety notes" section inthe description of ESP® (Y page 73).


It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelDeactivating/activating ESP® in Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74).For further information about ESP®, see(Y page 73).X Start the engine.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.


X Press: or9 to select the DriveAs‐sist submenu.X Pressa to confirm.

X Press: or9 to select ESP.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.If the å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the vehicle is ready todrive, ESP® is deactivated.

If the ÷ and å warning lamps light upcontinuously, ESP® is not available due to amal-function.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 290).Observe the information on display messages(Y page 256).

Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUSX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Settings menu.


X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssistsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press9 or: to select CollisionPrevention.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSis deactivated, theæ symbol appears inthe multifunction display in the AssistanceGraphic menu.

For further information about COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 70).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®BrakePRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.




On-board

computerand

displays

Z


X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select PRE-SAFEBrake.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theæ symbol appears in themultifunction dis-play in the Assistance Graphic menu.

For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see(Y page 77).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot AssistX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.




X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select Blind SpotAssist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

For further information about Blind Spot Assist,see (Y page 216).For further information about Active Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 219).

Setting ATTENTION ASSISTX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.




X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select ATTENTIONASSIST.X Pressa to confirm.

X Press: or9 to select Off, Standardor Sensitive.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the AssistanceGraphic menu in the multifunction display.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 214).

Setting Lane Keeping AssistX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.




X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select Lane KeepingAssist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection, Standard or Adap‐tive, appears.

X To change the setting: pressa again.For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 218).For further information about Active Lane Keep-ing Assist, see (Y page 222).

HYBRID submenu (PLUG-IN HYBRIDvehicles)

Setting the maximum charge currentUsing the Max. Charge Current function, youcan limit the charge current value at which thehigh-voltage battery should be charged.If there are no charge current settings on thecharging cable, set themaximumcharge currentin the on-board computer.If there are no charge current settings on thecharging cable, set themaximumcharge currenton the charging cable (Y page 172).X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.




-board

computerand

displays

X Use: or9 to select the Hybrid sub-menu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Max.Charge Current function.You will see the selected setting.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Before charging the high-voltage battery, checkthemaximumpermissible charge current for therelevant power socket.The maximum charge current values in the on-board computer may deviate from the chargingcable values.Further information on charging the high-volt-age battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)(Y page 169).

Setting the departure timeUsing the "Setting departure time" function youcan:Rclimatize the vehicle interior before depar-ture. Further information on pre-entry climatecontrol (Y page 142).Rcharge the high-voltage battery at minimumcost before departure at an intelligent charg-ing station.

The vehicle will calculate an optimal loadingplan. The charging process starts when the elec-tricity is at the best price possible. As a result,the high-voltage battery is charged with elec-tricity at a favorable rate.Please note that the high-voltage battery maynot be fully charged by the time of departure.Depending on the condition of charge of thehigh-voltage battery and the selected departuretime, the necessary charge timemay not be suf-ficient.If you would like to charge the high-voltage bat-tery for a short period of time, please use thesetting "set no departure time and charge imme-diately".The charging process will start immediatelywhen you charge the high-voltage battery at anormal charging station and have already selec-ted the departure time.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Press: or9 to select the Hybridsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the DepartureTime function.You will see the selected setting.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X To set no departure time and chargeimmediately: press the: or9 toselect No Pre-selection.

X Pressa to confirm.orX To set a departure time: press: or9A, B or C to select the desired preset.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.

X Press: or9 to set the hours.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to set the minutes.X Pressa to confirm.If the selector lever is shifted to positionP andthe charging cable connector is plugged in,the multifunction display will show the com-plete charging prediction after a fewmoments.

Further information on charging the high-volt-age battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)(Y page 169).

Head-up display submenu

Selecting other displays

: Vehicle speed display; Vehicle speed and navigation instruction

display= Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign AssistUsing the Display Content function, you canchoose from up to four display options depend-


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

ing on the vehicle's equipment. The selectedcontents appear in the head-up display.InMercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choosebetween two AMG displays. If you select anAMG display, the head-up display shows AMG-specific contents.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Press: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select Display Con‐tent.X Pressa to confirm.A graphic selection list appears.

X Press: or9 to select the desired dis-play.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.

You can find further information on navigationdisplays in themultimedia system (see separateoperating instructions).Information on displays of Traffic Sign Assist(Y page 215).

Setting the positionYou can adjust the position of the head-up dis-play on the windshield. You can compensate forheight differences if the seat positions arechanged, for example.X Switch on the head-up display (Y page 238).X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Use: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the Positionfunction.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

X Press the: or9 button to adjust theposition to a level from Level +5 to Level-5.

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Using the Memory function, you can save andcall up the set position of the head-up display asa single memory preset (Y page 116).

Setting the brightnessThe brightness of the head-up display is auto-matically adjusted to the surrounding ambientlight. You can also individually adjust the bright-ness of the head-up display.X Switch on the head-up display (Y page 238).X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Use: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the Brightnessfunction.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to a level from Level +5 (bright) toLevel -5 (dark).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Light submenu

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offThis function is not available in Canada.X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.



X Press: or9 to select the Lightssubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.


-board

computerand

displays

X Using: or9, select the DaytimeRunning Lights function.If the Daytime Running Lights function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light and theW symbol are shown in white in the multi-function display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime running lampsDaytime Running Lights (Y page 118).

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the distance unitThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer functionallows you to choose whether certain displaysappear in kilometers or miles in the multifunc-tion display.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Use: or9 to select the InstrumentCluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the DisplayUnit Speed-/Odometer function.The current setting km or Miles appears.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for distanceapplies to:RDigital speedometer in the Trip menuROdometer and the trip odometerRTrip computerRCurrent consumption and the rangeRRangeRNavigation instructions in the Navi menuRCruise ControlRDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go PilotRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting permanent displayThis function is only available on PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles.The Permanent Display function allows you tochoose whether the multifunction display

always shows the outside temperature or thespeed.The speed display is inverse to the speedome-ter.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Use: or9 to select the InstrumentCluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the PermanentDisplay function.X Pressa to confirm.The current setting Outside Temperatureor Speedometer[inverseHardwareSpeedUnit] appears.

X To change the setting: pressa again.

Switching the additional speedometeron/offThis function is not available in PLUG-IN HYBRIDvehicles.If the additional speedometer is switched on,the speed is shown in the status bar in the mul-tifunction display instead of the outside tem-perature.The speed display is inverse to the speedome-ter.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Press: or9 to select the Instru‐ment Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the AdditionalSpeedometer [km/h] function.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Restoring the factory settingsX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Use: or9 to select the FactorySettings submenu.X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings? functionappears.

X Press: or9 to select No or Yes.X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you have selected Yes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningLights function in the Lights submenu is onlyreset when the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

WARMUP

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Charge-air pressure? Engine oil temperatureA Transmission fluid temperatureX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.Engine and transmission oil tempera-tures: when the engine and transmission areat normal operating temperature, oil temper-

atures? andA are displayed in white in themultifunction display.If the multifunction display shows oil temper-ature? orA in blue, the engine or thetransmission are not yet at normal operatingtemperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-put during this time.

G-Meter

The G-Meter shows you the forces working onthe driver in longitudinal and lateral directionwhile driving.Maximumvalues aremarked red in the guidelinesystem.X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.


X Press the9 button repeatedly until the G-Meter appears.The G-Meter's maximum values are stored.

X To reset the G-Meter: pressa again.X Using: or9, select Yes on the steer-ing wheel.

X Pressa to confirm.The G-Meter's maximum values are deleted.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the G-Meter will be automati-cally reset.


-board

computera

nddisplays

SETUP

: Drive Comfort/Sport/Sport +/ Race; Chassis Comfort/Sport/Sport += Transmission D/M? Exhaust system Comfort/Sport +A ESP® On/Off or SPORT handling modeSportSETUP displays the following information andfunctions:Rthe gear indicatorRthe digital speedometerRthe drive system settingRthe suspension settingRthe transmission positionRthe exhaust flap positionRthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) statusX Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.



X Press the9 button repeatedly until SETUPis displayed.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER

: Lap; RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.You can start theRACETIMERwhen the engine isrunning or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.



X Press the: or9 button repeatedlyuntil the RACETIMER is shown.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Starting a new lap

: Lap; RACETIMER= Quickest lap time


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press the: or9 button to select NewLap.X Pressa to confirm.A maximum of 32 laps may be stored.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press: or9 to select Stop.X Pressa to confirm.

Continuing the RACETIMER

X Press: or9 to select Continue.X Pressa to confirm.

Resetting the RACETIMER

X Press: or9 to select Stop.The RACETIMER is stopped.

X Press: or9 to select Reset.X Pressa to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthThis function is only available if you have storedat least two laps and have stopped the RACE-TIMER.X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.



X Press the: or9 button to select LapList.X Pressa to confirm.The lap statistics are displayed.

X Press the9 or: button to select a dif-ferent lap evaluation.The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-bol:.


-board

computerand

displays

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manualand may therefore differ from the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory.Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 194)RParking (Y page 177)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel.The multifunction display hides the display message.

High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-prioritydisplay messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messageshave been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in themessage memory. You can call upthe display messages:X Press theò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.X Press the: or9 button to select the message memory.If there are no display messages, the No Messages display appears in the multifunction display.When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 255

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) are temporarily not available.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), ÷ and ! warninglamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

256 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays


÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ESP® is temporarily unavailable.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z


T!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc-tioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lockif you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐tion to Release theParking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignitionwas switched off.X Switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please Release Park‐ing Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of theelectric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 178).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 178).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 178).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.If the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-tinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 380).X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten secondsafter the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It thengoes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 178).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to applythe electric parking brake manually.X Shift the selector lever to P, as the electric parking brake is notapplied automatically.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 178).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake Inop‐erative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten secondsafter the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It thengoes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.USA only: the$ red brake system warning lamp is lit while theengine is running.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

GInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Restart the engine.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusInoperativeCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative dueto a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inopera‐tive See Operator'sManualImportant functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE FunctionsCurrently LimitedSee Operator's Man‐ual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.RMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivatedRthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Restart the engine.X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP® on again (Y page 74).

PRE-SAFE FunctionsLimited See Opera‐tor's ManualPRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a mal-function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


-board

computerand

displays


Radar Sensors DirtySee Operator's Man‐ualAt least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systemsis temporarily restricted or inoperative:RPRE-SAFE® PLUSRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSRActive Lane Keeping AssistRActive Blind Spot AssistRDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go PilotIf the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist willnot perform a course-correcting brake application.Possible causes are:Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirtyRthe function of the driving system or driving safety system isimpaired due to heavy rain or snow

A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears. All driving systems or driving safety systems are operativeagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Switch off the engine.X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 339):Rin the radiator trimRin the front bumperRin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper

X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

6SRS Malfunction Ser‐vice Required

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up inthe instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 46).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


6Front Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or FrontRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system hasmalfunctioned at the front on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or RearRight MalfunctionService Required

The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunctioned.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.


6Rear Center Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired

The rear center restraint systemhasmalfunctioned. The6warninglamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.


6Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionService Required orRight Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionService Required

There is amalfunction in the left-hand or right-handwindow curtain airbag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


-board

computerand

displays


Front Passenger Air‐bag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualThe front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, eventhough:Ran adultorRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seatIf additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpretthe occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-neously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 54)Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-function display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-pant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see(Y page 54).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Front Passenger Air‐bag Enabled SeeOperator's ManualThe front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system'sweight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe systemmay detect objects or forces applying additional weight onthe seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-neously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 54)Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-function display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-pant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.


-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsX Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see(Y page 54).

Lights


bCheck Left Low Beam(Example)

The corresponding bulb is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.orX Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 122).

i LED light sources: the display message for the correspondinglamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.

bActive HeadlampsInoperative

The active light function is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeOperator’s Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp FunctionInoperative

The light sensor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tonealso sounds.X Turn the light switch to theÃ position.

bSwitch On Headlamps

You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.X Turn the light switch to the L orÃ position.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Adaptive HighbeamAssist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Availablemessage is displayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine


+Check Coolant LevelSee Operator's Man‐ual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 333).

If you have to add coolant frequently:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine coolingsystem checked.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248‡ (120†), drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain and stop-start traffic.


-board

computera

nddisplays


?Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catchfire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhichcan occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Donot start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out andthe coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, theengine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.If the temperature increases again:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

#See Operator's Man‐ual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRdefective power electronics (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)Ra torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


#Stop Vehicle SeeOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level istoo low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Observe the instructions in the# See Operator's Manualdisplay message.


#Stop Vehicle LeaveEngine Running

The battery charge level is too low.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Leave the engine running.X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

#Start Engine SeeOperator's Manual

The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster and interior lighting.

X Leave the engine running for a fewminutes or drive a long distance.The battery is being charged.

4Check Engine Oil AtNext Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 332).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 332).If the engine oil needs topping up more often:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the enginechecked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualifiedspecialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.


-board

computerand

displays


4Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 quart)

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 332).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 332).If the engine oil needs topping up more often:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the enginechecked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualifiedspecialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Engine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleTurn Engine Off

Mercedes-AMG vehicles:The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 332).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 332).

8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap Loose

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Hybrid drive system


dVehicle OperationalSwitch the IgnitionOff Before Exiting

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:You are exiting the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. TheREADY indicator in themultifunction display is on. A warning tone alsosounds.If you leave the vehicle:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Switch off the ignition and remove the SmartKey.If you do not leave the vehicle:X Switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. automatic climate control,seat heating.

Please note the following: The electrical consumers are supplied bythe 12 V battery. If the vehicle is left in a ready-to-drive state for anextended period, it will switch off once the 12 V battery is almostempty. It will then only be possible to start the vehicle using a secondbattery (jump-starting).

Change the currentdrive programbefore changing theoperating mode. orExit manual driveprogram M beforechanging the operat‐ing mode.

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:You have attempted to change the operating mode in the automaticdrive program S (Sport), S+ (Sport Plus) or in the manual drive pro-gram M.X Activate drive program C (Comfort) or E (Economy) (Y page 229).X Select the preferred operating modeHYBRID, E-MODE, E-SAVE orCHARGE (Y page 226).

E-MODE CurrentlyUnavailablePLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery has dropped to thelower limit and the E-MODE operating mode has been switched off.Driving with the internal combustion engine is activated and the oper-ating mode switches to the basic HYBRID setting.X Continue driving using the internal combustion engine.You can switch to the E-SAVE or CHARGE operating mode asrequired (Y page 226).If you select CHARGE, the high-voltage battery is charged.Once the charge level display for the high-voltage battery hasincreased slightly, you can switch to the E-MODE operating modeagain.


-board

computera

nddisplays


Only E-MODE Availa‐ble Power LimitedRefuel ImmediatelyPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The fuel tank has been run dry and the combustion engine has beenswitched off.A warning tone also sounds.The vehicle will be powered by electrical energy only. Performance isrestricted and the vehicle may accelerate more slowly than normal.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.In the "Total range and electric range" menu, you can display theapproximate range of the vehicle (Y page 228).

Engine will notrestart ServicerequiredYou cannot start the engine again due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is running:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If you switch off the engine:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

áTowing Not Permit‐ted See Operator'sManual

The hybrid drive system is faulty.X Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer to the near-est qualified specialist workshop.

ÛMalfunction ServiceRequired

The hybrid drive system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÛMalfunction

The hybrid drive system is faulty.X Have the vehicle towed away by a professional recovery company tothe nearest qualified specialist workshop.

dMalfunction

The drive system is malfunctioning.The ECO start/stop function may be malfunctioning.The drive power is restricted.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ïCharger Cable Con‐nected

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The charging cable connector is still connected to the vehicle socket.You cannot drive off as long as the charging cable connector is stillconnected.Before you drive off:X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket(Y page 173).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


6Please WaitDepressurizing Tank

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The fuel filler flap unlocking button has been pulled. The fuel tankmustbe depressurized before refueling.X Wait until the fuel tank is depressurized and the fuel filler flap isunlocked.The opening process for the fuel filler cap may take up to 15minutes.

6Tank is Depressur‐ized Ready for Refu‐eling

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The fuel tank is now depressurized. The vehicle may now be refueled.X Observe the information on refueling on the fuel filler flap.X Open the fuel filler cap and remove it (Y page 166).

6Tank VentilationMalfunction ServiceRequired

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:There is a malfunction in the fuel system.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ãAcoustic VehicleIndication Inopera‐tive

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The sound generator is not working. The vehicle can still be driven;however, no vehicle sounds can be generated. As a result, your vehiclemay not be heard by other road users until it is very close to them, orit may not be heard at all.X Drivewith particular care, allowing for the possibility that other roadusers may behave unpredictably.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems


ÀATTENTION ASSIST:Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue ora lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone alsosounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀATTENTION ASSISTInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨Vehicle Rising

Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.


-board

computerand

displays


¨Vehicle RisingPlease Wait

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warningtone also sounds.X Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

¨Stop Vehicle Vehi‐cle Too Low

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fenderor the tires could be damaged if the steeringmovement is too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehi-cle.


¨Malfunction

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling charac-teristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Lane Keeping AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual or ActiveLane Keeping AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated andtemporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period.Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Clean the windshield.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Lane Keeping AssistInoperative orActive Lane KeepingAssist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual or ActiveBlind Spot AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.


Blind Spot AssistInoperative orActive Blind SpotAssist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open.X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with thedriver's door closed.

You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter-vention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 202).

Park Assist Inoper‐ative PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems withPARKTRONIC" section (Y page 202).

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (thej symboldoes not appear in the multifunction display):X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park AssistSwitched Off The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

Traffic Sign AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic Sign AssistInoperative Traffic Sign Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 194).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function(Y page 194).

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 186).If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS NowAvailable DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarilyunavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.RThe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.


DISTRONIC PLUS Inop‐erative DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.The following may have also failed:RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic AssistRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRSteering Assist and Stop&Go PilotA warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐pended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186).


-board

computerand

displays


DTR+: SteeringAssist. CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: SteeringAssist. Inoperative Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty.However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Inop‐erative Cruise control is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control- - - mphRA condition for activating cruise control has not been met.You have tried to store a speed below 20mph (30 km/h), for exam-ple.RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and storethe speed.

orX Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 185).orX Reactivate ESP®.Rall vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74)RMercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74)


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check Tire PressureSoon Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant lossin pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installednew wheels and tires.Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 343).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-sure is correct (Y page 367).

Check Tire PressureThen Restart RunFlat IndicatorCanada only:The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display messageand has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 367).

Run Flat IndicatorInoperative Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Please Correct TirePressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 367).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 369).


-board

computerand

displays


Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Thewheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.



X Check the tire pressure (Y page 367).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire Mal‐function The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheelposition is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.



Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavaila‐bleBecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, nosignals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressuremonitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the mul-tifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Tire Pressure Moni‐tor Inoperative NoWheel SensorsThe wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. Thetire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving fora few minutes.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle


Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-tion R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Apply Brake toShift from 'P' You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi-tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N,Depress Brake andStart EngineWith the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans-mission out of position P or N into another transmission position.X Depress the brake pedal.X Start the engine.

Transmission Not inP Risk of VehicleRolling AwayThe driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is inposition R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle is Sta‐tionaryThe vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.


-board

computerand

displays


Service Required DoNot Shift GearsVisit DealerYou cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-mission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possi‐ble Service Required You cannot shift into the transmission positionR due to amalfunction.The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐function Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-nents.A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi-tion N.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Stop Vehicle LeaveEngine Running WaitTransmission Cool‐ing

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarilyimpaired or not possible.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Leave the engine running.X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles only:The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch offthe engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

_Rear Left BackrestNot Latched or RearRight Backrest NotLatched

The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-hand side.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

_Rear Center Back‐rest Not Engaged

The center rear seat backrest is not engaged.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

&Pre-Entry ClimateCtrl. (Via Smart‐Key) AvailableAgain After EngineStart

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:With the engine switched off, you have attempted to switch on the pre-entry climate control more than twice.X Let the engine run for ten seconds.After running the engine, the pre-entry climate control is opera-tional again.

&Pre-Entry ClimateCtrl. (Via Smart‐Key) Inoperative HVBattery Low

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:The on-board voltage is too low. The pre-entry climate control cannotbe switched on.X Drive for a longer distance.The battery is being charged. When the condition of charge of thehigh-voltage battery is over the specified minimum, pre-entry cli-mate control is operational again.


-board

computerand

displays


ÐPower Steering Mal‐function See Opera‐tor's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.If you are able to steer safely:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If you are unable to steer safely:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiverrange.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appearsin the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped belowthe minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 333).

SmartKey


ÂKey Does Not Belongto Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key fromIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 84).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


ÂDon't Forget YourKey

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver'sdoor with the engine switched off.This display message is displayed for amaximum of 60 seconds and issimply a reminder.X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not Detected(white display message)

The SmartKey is currently undetected.X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

ÂKey Not Detected(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-trally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Locate the SmartKey.X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, thekey is not detected whilst the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.

ÂRemove 'Start' But‐ton and Insert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected.The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or isfaulty. A warning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.


Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicatorand warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicatorand warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine orwhilst driving.

286 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten theirseat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, awarning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50).The warning tone ceases.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as thedriver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15mph(25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven fasterthan 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 287

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems



é N The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running orthe ECO start/stop function is activated.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow brake system warning lamp is shown in theREADY driving status.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow RBS (Recuperative Brake System) warninglamp is shown in the READY driving status.

G WARNINGThe brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affec-ted.There is a risk of an accident.X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

$J N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is litwhile the engine is running.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the red brake system warning lamp is shown in theREADY driving status.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect ismalfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay beaffected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.


-board

computerand

displays



$J N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is litwhile the engine is running.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the red brake system warning lamp is shown in theREADY driving status.A warning tone also sounds.There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The multifunction display also shows a display message with the# symbol.The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow ABS warning lamp is shown in the READYdriving status.ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, suchas the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z



$J÷!

N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brakewarning lamp and the yellowESP® and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the red brake warning lamp, yellow ESP® warning lampand ABS are shown in the READY driving status.ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or atleast one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases it may be better to deactivate ESP®:Rall vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74)RMercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74)Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 73).


-board

computera

nddisplays



÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow ESP® warning lamp is shown in the READYdriving status.ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECOstart/stop function is activated.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is shown in theREADY driving status.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. ActiveBlind Spot Assist. The system does not perform braking actions.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases it may be better to deactivate ESP®:Rall vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74)RMercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74)Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 73).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z



M NOnlyMercedes-AMG vehicles: the yellow SPORT handlingmodewarning lamp islit while the engine is running.SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handlingmode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (Y page 74).

F! NF (USA only),! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electricparking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electricparking brake is lit.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 46).


-board

computera

nddisplays

Engine



; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)Rin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergencymode.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.In some states, youmust immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soonas the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or thefuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and thecoolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z



? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked orthe electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 333).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrainand stop-start traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engineradiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids whichmay have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occurjust by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 333).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.


-board

computera

nddisplays



X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrainand stop-start traffic.

Driving systems



· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is inmotion. A warningtone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line oftravel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or takeevasive action.

Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 77).For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 70).


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Tires


N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h N The yellow tire pressuremonitorwarning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.The tire pressuremonitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-tion.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Payattention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire(Y page 343).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 367).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


-board

computera

nddisplays

Vehicle


N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.If you are able to steer safely:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If you are unable to steer safely:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

General notes

The multimedia system section in this manualdescribes the basic principles for operation.More information can be found in the DigitalOperator's Manual.



Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.The multimedia system calculates the route tothe destination without taking the following intoaccount, for example:Rtraffic lightsRstop and yield signsRparking or stopping restrictionsRroad narrowingRother road and traffic rules and regulationsThe multimedia system may give incorrect nav-igation recommendations if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with thedigital map's data.For example:Ra diverted routeRthe road layout or the direction of a one-waystreet has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe roadand traffic rules and regulations during yourjourney. Road and traffic rules and regulationsalways have priority over multimedia systemdriving recommendations.Navigation announcements are intended todirect you while driving without diverting yourattention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of con-sulting the map display for directions. Lookingat the icons ormap display can distract you fromtraffic conditions and driving, and increase therisk of an accident.This equipment complies with FCC radiationexposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels of RF energythat is deemed to comply without maximumpermissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it isdesirable that it should be installed and oper-ated with at least 8 inches (20cm) and morebetween the radiator and a person's body(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet andlegs.)

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restric-ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.You will notice this, for example, because eitheryou will not be able to select certain menu itemsor a message will appear to this effect.

298 Function restrictionsMultim

ediasystem

Operating system

Overview

General notes! Do not use the space in front of the displayfor storage. Objects placed here could dam-age the display or impair its function. Avoidany direct contact with the display surface.Pressure on the display surface may result inimpairments to the display, which could beirreversible.

Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair yourability to read the display.The display has an automatic temperature-con-trolled switch-off feature. The brightness isautomatically reduced if the temperature is toohigh. The display may temporarily switch offcompletely.

Cleaning instructions! Do not touch the display. The display has avery sensitive high-gloss surface; there is arisk of scratching. If you have to clean thescreen, however, use a mild cleaning agentand a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and havecooled down before you start cleaning. Do notapply pressure to the display surface whencleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-age to the display.

Switching the multimedia systemon/offX Press theu button on the center consoleto the right of the controller.

Adjusting the volumeX Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con-troller.

The volume is adjusted:Rfor the currently selected media sourceRduring traffic or navigation announcementsRin hands-free mode during a phone call

Switching the sound on/offX Press the thumbwheel to the right of the con-troller.If the audio output is switched off, the statusline will show the8 symbol. If you switchthemedia source or set the volume, the soundis automatically switched on.i Navigation announcements will be heardeven if the sound is muted.

FunctionsThe multimedia system has the following func-tions:RRadio modeRMedia mode with media searchRSound systemsRNavigation systemCOMAND: navigation via the hard driveAudio 20: navigation via SD cardRCommunication functionsRSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)RVehicle functions with system settingsRFavorites functions

ControllerThe controller in the center console lets you:Rselect menu items on the displayRenter charactersRselect a destination on the mapRsave entriesThe controller can be:Rturned3Rslid left or right1Rslid forwards or back4Rslid diagonally2Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7

Back buttonYou can use the% button to exit amenu or tocall up the basic display of the current operatingmode.

Operating system 299

Multim

ediasystem

Z

X To exit the menu: briefly press the%button.The multimedia system changes to the nexthigher menu level in the current operatingmode.

X To call up the basic display: press the%button for longer than two seconds.The multimedia system changes to the basicdisplay of the current operating mode.

Touchpad

Switching the touchpad on/offMultimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQActivate Touchpad.The touchpad is switched on O or off ª.

Operating the touchpad

: Touch-sensitive surface; Favorites button= Calls up audio and telephone menu (quick

access)? Returns to the previous displayNavigating in menus and lists can be done viatouch-sensitive surface: by swiping withyour finger.X To select themenu item: swipe up, down, tothe left or right.

X Press the touchpad.X To move the digital map: swipe in all direc-tions.

Swiping with two fingers, e.g. using this func-tion:X To show or hide the audio menu: swipe upor down with two fingers.

X To zoom in and out of the map: move twofingers together or apart.

X To increase or reduce the vehicle andsound settings: turn two fingers to the rightor left.

Character entry with handwriting rec-ognition

Entering charactersX Use one finger to write characters on the sur-face.The character is entered in the input line. Ifthe character that you have entered can beinterpreted in different ways, these charactersuggestions are displayed.

X If character suggestions are shown, turn andpress the controller.

X Resume the character entry on the touchpad.

Handwriting recognition

: Active input line; Inserts a space= Character entered on the touchpad? Deletes charactersX To display the menu: press the touchpad.

300 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

: Exits the menu; Returns to handwriting recognition= Uses the phone book or text templates

(COMAND)? Selects the input line or changes the posi-

tion of the cursorA Switches the languageB Finishes character entryX To select the input line: selectp.X Swipe up or down.X To move the cursor within the input line:selectp.

X Swipe to the left or right.X To delete characters: swipe to the left if aninput line is selected.

X To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.

Switching the text reader function of thehandwriting recognition on/offMultimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQRead Out Handwriting Recog‐nition.The read-aloud function is switched on O oroff ª.

Quick access for audio

Changing the station/music track

Depending on the audio source that is currentlyactivated, you can use this function to select thenext station or music track.X Swipe upwards with two fingers on the touch-pad.The current audio source is displayed.

X To select the previous or next station/music track: glide to the right or left.The selected station/music track is played.

Switching the character entry betweentouchpad and controllerPrerequisite: an input line for text, numbers orcharacters has been selected.X To switch to the controller: press the con-troller.Character entry using the controller is active.

X To switch to the touchpad: press the touch-pad with your finger.Handwriting recognition on the touchpad isactive.

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favoritesX To call up: press theò button on the con-troller or on the touchpad.

X Select a favorite, e. g. Vehicle.The favorites are displayed.

X To exit: press theò button again.


Multim

ediasystem

Z

Adding favorites

Adding a predefined favorite

: Adds a new favorite; Renames a selected favorite= Moves a selected favorite? Deletes a selected favoriteX Press theò button.X Slide6 the controller.The menu bar is shown.

X Select Reassign.The categories are displayed.

X Select a category.The favorites are displayed.

X Select a favorite.X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Adding your own favoriteX Select VehicleQClimate Control.X Press and hold theò button until thefavorites are displayed.

X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Climate control settings

General notesYou can adjust the climate control settingsusing the climate control bar or the climate con-trol menu.You can set the most important climate controlfunctions such as temperature, airflow and airdistribution using the climate control bar. Theclimate control bar is visible in most displays.

You can find all available climate control func-tions in the climate control menu. You can usethe climate control bar to switch to the climatecontrol menu.

Overview

Example: COMAND: Adjusts temperature and air distribution on

the left and displays the current setting; Calls up the climate control menu, displays

the current cooling and climate mode set-ting

= Adjusts temperature and air distribution onthe right and displays the current setting

There may be fewer settings or none dependingon your vehicle's equipment.

Calling up the climate control menuMultimedia system:X Select Vehicle.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until theclimate control bar is activated.

X To select from climate control bar;: turnand press the controller.The menu for selecting climate control func-tions is activated.

X To select the desired climate control function:turn and press the controller.The selected climate control functionappears.

Calling up the climate control barMultimedia system:X Select Vehicle.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until theclimate control bar is activated.


ediasystem

Settings in the climate menu

Adjusting the climate mode settingsBy setting the climate mode you determine thetype of airflow. The setting is activewhen the air-conditioning system is set toÃ(Y page 133).X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 302).

X To select Climate Mode: turn and press thecontroller.

X To change the setting: turn the controller.Exiting a menu:X Press the% button.The current airflow setting is shown in the cli-mate control bar: DIFFUSE, MEDIUM or FOCUS.Starting/stopping the perfume atomizerThe perfume atomizermakes it possible to scentthe air in individual compartments in the vehicleinterior. Further information (Y page 138).X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 302).

X To select Air Freshener: turn and press thecontroller.The setting element is active.

X To start/stop the perfume atomizer: pressthe controller.

X To set the intensity: turn the controller whenthe atomizer is switched on.

Exiting a menu:X Press the% button.

Switching the ionization on/offThe ionization has a cleansing effect on the air inthe vehicle interior. Further information(Y page 140).X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 302).

X To select Ionization: turn and press thecontroller.The setting element is active.

X To switch the ionization on/off: press thecontroller.


Activating or deactivating pre-entry cli-mate control via the SmartKeyThis function is available for PLUG‑IN HYBRIDvehicles.PLUG-INHYBRID: before getting in, the driver'sseat area can be briefly warmed or ventilated inadvancewith the air from the air vents being pre-cooled.X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 302).

X To select Pre-entry Climate Controlvia Key: turn and press the controller.

X To activate or deactivate: turn the control-ler.


Activating or deactivating pre-entry cli-mate control at departure timeThis function is available for PLUG‑IN HYBRIDvehicles.You can climatize the driver's seat and the vehi-cle interior in time for the departure time set.X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 302).

X To select Pre-entry Climate Ctrl. atDeparture Time: turn and press the control-ler.A rotary menu appears.

X To select the desired setting: turn the con-troller.The menu symbol, text and image show theselected setting.

X To exit a menu:Press the% button.

Settings in the bottom bar of the cli-mate control menu

Switching cooling with air dehumidifica-tion on/offX Call up the climate control menu(Y page 302).

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until thebottom bar is activated.

X To select O A/C: turn and press the control-ler.

X Switch cooling with air dehumidification onO or off ª.


Multim

ediasystem

Z

i The current status of the cooling function isdisplayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON– activated, A/C OFF – deactivated.

i Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidi-fication function reduces fuel consumption.

Synchronizing the climate control set-tingsUse O Sync (synchronization) to select the cli-mate control setting for all zones together O orseparately ª.X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 302).

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until thebottom bar is activated.

X To select O Sync: turn and press the con-troller.

X Switch the synchronization function on O oroff ª.

For further information on synchronizing climatecontrol settings, see (Y page 135).

Navigation mode



Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the navigation system.

General notesAmong other things, correct functioning of thenavigation systemdepends onGPS reception. Incertain situations, GPS reception may beimpaired, there may be interference or theremay be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels orparking garages.

Audio 20 is equipped with MARGIN®MAP PILOT(see themanufacturer's operating instructions).The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructionsare stored on the SDmemory card as a PDF file.The SD card box contains a quick guide.The following descriptions apply to navigationwith COMAND. Further information can befound in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route optionsMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.Notes for route types:REco RouteRDynamic Traffic RouteTraffic reports on the route for the route guid-ance are taken into account.RCalculate Alternative RoutesDifferent routes are being calculated. Insteadof Start select the Continue menu item.

Notes for route options:RUse Toll RoadsThe route calculation includes roads whichrequire you to pay a usage fee (toll).RUse Vignette Roads (not available in allcountries)The route calculation includes roads whichrequire you to pay a time-based fee (vignette).A vignette allows temporary use of the routenetwork, e. g. 10 days or 1 year.RUse Carpool Lanes (only available in theUSA)Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the accessconditions for carpool lanes.Carpool lanes will be included if the carpoollanes option is activated.

Entering an addressMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select DestinationQAddress Entry.


ediasystem

Enter an address, e.g. as follows:Rtown or zip code, street, house numberRcountry, town or zip codeRcity or zip code, centerRstreet, city or zip code, intersectionX Select City.The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.Below this, you will see locations for whichroute guidance has already been carried out.

X Enter the city.TheG symbol: the location is contained onthe digital map multiple times.

X To switch to the list: slide the5 control-ler.

X Select the location.If available, the zip code is shown. If there aredifferent zip codes available for the location,the corresponding digits are displayedwith anX.

X Enter the street and house number.The address is in the menu.

Further options for destination entry:Rsearch for a keywordThe keyword search finds destinations usingfragments of words.Rselect the last destinationRselect a contactRselect a POIYou can search for a POI by location, name ortelephone number.Rselect destination on the mapRenter intermediate destinationYou can map the route to the destinationyourself with up to four intermediate destina-tions.Rselect destinations from Mercedes-BenzAppsRselect geo-coordinates

Calculating the routePrerequisite: the address has been entered andis in the menu.X Select Start or Continue.The route is calculatedwith the selected routetype and the selected route options.

If route guidance has already been activated,a prompt will appear asking whether you wishto end the current route guidance.

X Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Des‐tination.Yes cancels the current route guidance andstarts route calculation to the new destina-tion.Set as Intermediate Destination addsthe new destination in addition to the existingdestination and opens the intermediate des-tinations list.

Connecting a mobile phone

PrerequisitesFor telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, yourequire a Bluetooth®-capablemobile phone. Themobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile1.0 or above.Multimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQActivate Bluetooth.X Activate Bluetooth® O.Mobile phone:X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue-tooth® visibility for other devices (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth® device names for all of oneman-ufacturer's products might be identical. Tomake it possible to clearly identify your mobilephone, change the device name (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (PhoneBook Access Profile) and MAP (MessageAccess Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-ing information will be transmitted after youconnect:Rphone bookRcall listsRmessages

i Further information on suitable mobilephones can be obtained on the Internet athttp://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.


Multim

ediasystem

Z

i In the USA you can also contact theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing a mobilephoneBefore using your mobile phone with the multi-media system for the first time, you will need tosearch for the phone and then authorize (con-nect) it. Depending on themobile phone, author-ization either takes place by means of SecureSimple Pairing or by entering a passkey. Themultimedia system automatically makes theprocedure that is relevant for yourmobile phoneavailable. The mobile phone is always connec-ted automatically after authorization. Furtherinformation on using a mobile phone with themultimedia system (see the Digital Operator'sManual).If the multimedia system does not detect yourmobile phone, this may be due to particularsecurity settings on your mobile phone (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).Only one mobile phone can be connected to themultimedia system at any one time.Searching for a mobile phoneAudio 20:X Select Tel/®QConnectDeviceQSearch for PhonesQStartSearch.The available mobile phones are displayed.

COMAND:X Select PhoneQConnectDeviceQSearch for PhonesQStartSearch.The available mobile phones are displayed.

Symbols in the device list

Sym-bol

Explanation

Ï New mobile phone found, not yetauthorized.

Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but isnot connected

# Mobile phone is authorized andconnected

Connecting a mobile phoneAuthorization using Secure Simple Pairing:X Select mobile phone.A code is displayed in the multimedia systemand on the mobile phone.

X If codesmatch: select Yes on themultimediasystem.

X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-ing on the mobile phone used, confirm theconnection to the multimedia system and forthe PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. Theprompt to confirm may take up to twominutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-er's operating instructions).

X If the codes are different: select No on themultimedia system.The process is canceled.Repeat authorization.

Authorization by entering a passkey:X Select Bluetooth® name of the mobile phone.The input menu for the passkey is displayed.

X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-nation as a passkey.

X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.X Press ¬ to confirm.X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobilephone. Depending on the mobile phone used,confirm the connection to themultimedia sys-tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®profiles. The prompt to confirm may take upto two minutes to be displayed (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).

Switching between mobile phonesIf you have authorized more than one mobilephone, you can switch between the individualphones.Multimedia system:X Select Connect Device.X Select a mobile phone from the device list.

Media mode

General notesIf you wish to play external media sources, thedefault display must already be turned on. Fur-


ediasystem

ther information on media mode (see the DigitalOperator's Manual).The following external media sources can beused:RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)RCDRDVD (COMAND)RSD memory cardsRvia devices connected by Bluetooth®

i Information on single CD/DVD drive (seethe Digital Operator's Manual).

Activating media modeMultimedia system:X Select MediaQDevices.The available media sources will be shown.The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the media source.Playable files are played.

Inserting and ejecting an SD memorycard

Important safety notesG WARNINGSDmemory cards are small parts. They can beswallowed and cause asphyxiation. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Keep SD memory cards out of the reach ofchildren. If an SD memory card is swallowed,seek immediate medical attention.

! If you are no longer using the SD memorycard, you should remove it and take it out ofthe vehicle. High temperatures can damagethe card.

Inserting an SD memory cardThe SD card slot is located in the stowage com-partment under the armrest.X Insert the SD memory card into the SD cardslot until it engages. The side with the con-tacts must face downwards.

X Select the media source (Y page 307).

Ejecting an SD memory cardX Press the memory card.The memory card is ejected.

X Remove the memory card.

Connecting USB devicesThere are two USB ports in the stowage spaceunder the armrest.X Connect the USB device to the USB port.X Select the media source (Y page 307).


Multim

ediasystem

Z

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicleare dependent on the distribution of the loadwithin the vehicle. For this reason, you shouldobserve the following notes when transporting aload:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle mass or the gross axle weightrating for the vehicle (including occupants).The values are specified on the vehicle iden-

tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver'sdoor.RThe trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the trunk as possible.RThe load must not protrude above the upperedge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges forprotection.

Stowage spaces


G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Inaddition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308).

308 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards untilit engages.

Objects in A4 format or an iPad®, for example,can be stored in the glove box. For vehicles witha perfume atomizer (Y page 138) the storagespace of the glove box is restricted.

The glove box can only be locked and unlockedusing the mechanical key.X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise toposition1.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.The eyeglasses compartment opens down.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment isalways closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartment in the front centerconsole

X Briefly press trim; in the direction of thearrow.Cover: swings upwards.

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: press button: at the front.The stowage space opens.

Stowage areas 309

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-lowing may be in the stowage space:Ra multimedia connector unit with 2 USB portsand a SD card slot, e.g. for use with an iPod®,iPhone® or MP3 player, see the separateOperator's ManualRa small stowage space in the upper front sec-tion

Stowage compartment in the doors

You can store items such as a rolled-up fluores-cent jacket (driver's door) and the vehicle docu-ment wallet (front-passenger door) in stowagecompartment: in the doors.In doors; you can store bottles with a capacityof up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear seatarmrest! Do not sit on or support your body weight onthe rear seat armrest when it is folded down,as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cover of the stowage compart-ment before folding the rear seat armrestback into the seat backrest.

X To open: fold down the seat armrest.X Press on the front of release catch: and foldthe cover of the armrest upwards.

Additional stowage spaceDepending on the equipment, the followingadditional stowage areas are available in thevehicle:Rcard and coin holder in the dashboard abovethe light switch (not suitable for holding thinobjects such as shopping tokens)Rthe open stowage compartment in the centerconsoleRstowage net in front-passenger footwellRthe map pockets on the back of the driver'sand front-passenger seatRthe parcel nets on the left and right-hand sidein the trunk

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308)and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces(Y page 308).

Ski and snowboard bag


G WARNINGThe skibag in conjunction with the lashingstraps cannot restrain any objects other thanskis.Vehicle occupants could be struck in theevent of sudden braking or an accident, forinstance, if you:Rtransport other heavy or sharp-edgedobjects in the skibagRdo not secure the skibag with the lashingstraps

There is a risk of accident and injury.Store only skis in the skibag. Always securethe skibag with the lashing straps so that itcannot move around.

A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snow-boards can be transported in the ski and snow-board bag.


ageandfeatures

Securing the ski and snowboard bag inthe trunk

X Fold the middle rear seat backrest forwards(Y page 311).

X Slide the ski and snowboard bag between thetwo outside rear seat backrests. Ensure thatthe wheels of the ski and snowboard bag arein the trunk.

X Open the ski/snowboard bag with zip: andplace the skis or snowboards inside it.

X Close the ski and snowboard bag.X Pull tensioning strap; tight by the loose enduntil the skis or snowboards are held firmlyinside the ski/snowboard bag.

X Engage tensioning strap= in a diagonal pat-tern on hooks? in cargo tie-down ringsA asshown.

Rear bench seat through-loading fea-ture


G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot berestrained by the seat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308).The outside and the middle rear seat backrestscan be folded down separately to increase thetrunk capacity. The division ratio is 40% to 20%to 40%.

Folding the rear seat backrests forwardX Vehicles without memory function: if neces-sary, move the driver's or front-passengerseat forward.

X Vehicles with memory function: when one orboth parts of the rear seat backrest are foldedforward, the respective front seat movesforward slightly, when necessary, in order toavoid contact.

X Open the trunk.X Fully insert the rear seat backrest headrestraints.

Stowage areas 311

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Left and right seat backrestX Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrestrelease handle:.The corresponding rear seat backrest isreleased.Vehicles with memory function: when one orboth parts of the rear seat backrest are foldedforward, the respective front seat movesforward slightly, when necessary, in order toavoid contact.

Middle rear seat backrestX Pull release lever= forwards.Rear seat backrest; is released.

X Fold corresponding rear seat backrest;forward.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Folding the rear seat backrest back! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-aged.

Left and right seat backrestX Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Fold rear seat backrest: back until itengages.If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in the multifunctiondisplay in the instrument cluster. A warningtone also sounds.

Middle rear seat backrestX Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Fold seat backrest: back until it engages.Red lock status indicator; is no longer visi-ble.


ageandfeatures

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 107).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

You should always engage the rear seat backr-ests if you do not need the through-loading fea-ture. This will prevent unauthorized access tothe trunk from the vehicle interior.

Locking the center rear seat backrest

In order to prevent the trunk from beingaccessed by unauthorized persons, the centerseat backrest can be locked using a catch. Thecenter seat backrest can only be folded forwardtogether with the left seat backrest.X To lock: fold the left and center seat backr-ests forward. Make sure that the center andleft seat backrests are engaged and joinedtogether.

X Slide catch: upwards.The release mechanism of the center seatbackrest is locked.

X To unlock: fold the left and center seat backr-ests forward.

X Slide catch: downwards.

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down ringsObserve the following notes on securing loads:RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 308).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.

RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure aload, as these are only intended as an anti-slipprotection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges orcorners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

Vehicles with the through-loading feature in therear bench seat:X Fold up the cargo tie-down rings next to therear seat backrest and put them through theslots in the carpet.

Bag hook

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-gage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to securea load.

Stowage areas 313

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

: Bag hook

EASY-PACK trunk box


G WARNINGWhen the load surface moves up, your handsmay become trapped on the frame of theEASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury.When the load surface moves up, make surethat your hands are not within the sweep ofthe load surface. If someone becomes trap-ped, carefully push the center of the load sur-face downward.

! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is pulledout, no objects may be placed on the frame ofthe box, nor should the frame be pushed fromabove. Otherwise, the box could be damaged.

! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects candamage the EASY-PACK trunk box and thenbe thrown out. There is a risk of injury.Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed orfragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box.Always store and secure these or similarobjects in the trunk outside of the EASY-PACKtrunk box.

! If you exceed the maximum permitted loadof the EASY-PACK trunk box, objects can bethrown out of the EASY-PACK trunk box andstrike vehicle occupants. There is a risk ofinjury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.Always observe the maximum permitted loadof the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always storeand secure heavy objects in the trunk outsideof the EASY-PACK trunk box.

The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACKtrunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a load of aboveapproximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bottom of thebox moves downward until it rests on the mat ofthe trunk floor. Thus, overloading of the box isavoided.

Adjusting the height to any position

ExampleX Pull the box out by handle: in the directionof the arrow all the way to the stop.

X Lowering the load surface: push the centerof load surface; down by hand in the direc-tion of the arrow until load surface; hasreached the desired position and the box isthe desired size.

X To raise the load surface: press switch=.Load surface; of the box moves up auto-matically.

X To stow the box: push the box in by han-dle: all the way to the stop.

Removing and installing

ExampleX To install: insert retainer; of box: intoslots=


ageandfeatures

X Raise box: and press hooksA into anchor-age? as far as they will go.

X Turn left-hand rotating catchB counter-clockwise and right-hand rotating catchBclockwise by 90°.

X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catchBclockwise and right-hand rotating catchBcounter-clockwise by 90°.

X Move box: downwards and pull it out fromanchorages?.

Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flat surfaceafter removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf.

Stowage well under the trunk floor! Unhook the handle before again before clos-ing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to pre-vent the handle flap from protruding. Other-wise, you could damage the handle.

The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. arelocated in the stowage compartment.X To open: pull handle: up.

X Hook handle: into rain trough;.

Roof carrier


G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roofload in the "Technical data" section(Y page 394).

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse roof carriers that have been tested andapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Thishelps to avoid damage to the vehicle.Position the load on the roof carrier in such away that the vehicle will not sustain damageeven when it is in motion.Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensurethat when the roof carrier is installed you can:Rraise the sliding sunroof/panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel fullyRopen the trunk lid fully

! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers,do not use metallic or hard objects to openthem.

An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof loadmay become detached from the vehicle. You

Stowage areas 315

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

must therefore ensure that you observe the roofcarrier manufacturer's installation instructions.Vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel: the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened if aroof carrier is installed. The panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel can still be raised toallow ventilation of the vehicle interior.If the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel makes contact with a roof carrierapproved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof willlower slightly but remain raised at the rear.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Open covers: carefully in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Fold covers: upwards.X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchoragepoints under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Features

Cup holder


G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Inaddition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.

RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. The drinkscould otherwise spill.

! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cupholder in the center console to continuous,strong and direct sunlight. The passengercompartment in the area of the center con-sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-centrated and reflected sunlight.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308).

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

If you remove the cup holder insert, you can usethe resulting compartment for stowage.X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 309).

X To remove: slide catch= forwards and pullout cup holder;.

X To insert: insert cup holder; and slide backcatch=.

X To close: push cover: of the stowage com-partment closed.

You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat forcleaning. Cleanwith clear, lukewarmwater only.

316 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest! Do not sit on or support your body weight onthe rear seat armrest when it is folded down,as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding the rearseat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holdercould be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press the front of cup holder:or;.Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To fold out: place a container in the cupholder.The cup holder folds down automatically.

X To fold in: remove the container.The cup holder folds in automatically.

X To close: slide cup holder: or; back untilit engages.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visor isclipped into bracket; and mirror coverA hasbeen folded up.

Rear side window roller sunblinds! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Donot let it snap back suddenly as this woulddamage the automatic roller mechanism.

! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sun-blind hooked in and the side windows openedsimultaneously. The roller sunblind can jumpout of the retainers and spring back suddenlywhen driving at high speeds, e.g. when drivingon the freeway. This could damage the inertiareel. Therefore, either close the side windowor retract the roller sunblind before driving athigh speeds.

Features 317

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out bytab: and hook it onto retainers; at the topof the window.

Rear window roller sunblind


G WARNINGParts of the body could be trapped in thesweep of the roller sunblind when the rollersunblind is extended or retracted. There is arisk of injury.When extending or retracting make sure thatno parts of the body are in the sweep of theroller sunblind. Briefly press the button againif someone becomes trapped. The opening orclosing process is briefly stopped. The rollersunblind then returns to its initial position.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind can movefreely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or otherobjects could be damaged.

Extending/retracting the roller sun-blind


X To extendor retract: briefly press button:.The roller sunblind fully extends or fullyretracts.

X To stop: briefly press button: again.The roller sunblind stops briefly and movesback into the out-of-use position.

Ashtray

Front ashtray! The stowage space under the ashtray is notheat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes inthe ashtray, make sure that the ashtray isproperly engaged. Otherwise, the stowagespace could be damaged.

ExampleX To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 309).

X Push the cover of the ashtray upwards at itsright side=.

X To remove the insert: hold the sides ofinsert?, push it forward and lift it up; andout.

X To install the insert: press insert? into theholder until it engages.

X To close: close the cover of the ashtray.X Push cover: of the stowage compartmentclosed.

i You can remove the ashtray insert and usethe resulting compartment for stowage.

Rear-compartment ashtray

318 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To open: pull cover; out by its top edge.X To remove the insert: push ribbing= fromthe left side and pull insert: upwards.

X To install the insert: install insert: fromabove into the holder and press down into theholder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighterwhen road and traffic conditions permit.

ExampleX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 309).

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter;will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: push cover: of the stowage com-partment closed.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

The sockets can be used for accessories with amaximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessoriesinclude such items as chargers for mobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods when theengine is switched off, the battery may dis-charge.An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-ets is automatically cut. This ensures that thereis sufficient power to start the engine.If you have connected a device to the 12 Vsocket, leave the cover of the stowage com-partment open. This prevents the cover frombeing blocked.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsoleX To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 309).

X Lift up the cover of the socket.X To close: push the cover of the stowage com-partment closed.

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsoleX Pull the cover out by the top of its handleedge.

X Lift up the cover of the socket.

Features 319

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

mbrace

General notesThe mbrace system is only available in the USA.You must have a license agreement to activatethembrace service. Make sure that your systemis activated and operational. To log in, press theï MB Info call button. If any of the stepsmentioned are not carried out, the system maynot be activated.If you have questions about the activation, con-tact one of the following telephone hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password will besent to you by mail. You can use this passwordto log onto the mbrace area under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableDetermining the location of the vehicle on amapis only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to theCustomer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the multi-function steering wheel.

orX Use the volume control on the multimediasystem.

The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callYou can find information and a description of allavailable features under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, the sys-tem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detectedif one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does notcome on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diagnosisof the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-lowing buttons continues to light up red afterthe system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRThe Inoperative or the Service NotActivated message appears in the multi-function display after the system self-diagno-sis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. In theevent of an emergency, help will have to besummoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearest author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the fol-lowing service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

320 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notesObserve the notes on system activation(Y page 320).An emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been initi-ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, the CallConnected message appears in the multifunc-tion display.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determinedby the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been initi-ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-lished between theCustomer AssistanceCenterand the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerattempts to get more information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-pants, an ambulance is immediately sent tothe vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,the system has been unable to initiate an emer-gency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. The indi-cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-ously.

The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press and hold SOS button; for at least onesecond.The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashesuntil the emergency call is concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.If the mobile phone network is unavailable,mbrace will not be able to make the emergencycall. If you leave the vehicle immediately afterpressing the SOS button, you will not knowwhether mbrace placed the emergency call. Inthis case, always summon assistance by othermeans.

Roadside Assistance button

Features 321

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To call Roadside Assistance: press Road-side Assistance button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears in themultifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on the multimedia system, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 325).The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz tech-nician or makes arrangements for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such as repairwork and/or towing.You can find more information in the separatembrace manual.The system has not been able to initiate a Road-side Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistancecall button F is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

MB Info call button

X To call MB Info: pressMB Info call button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in MB Info call button:flashes while the connection is being made.The Connecting Call message appears inthe multifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.

322 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

You can find further information on the mbracesystem under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.The system has not been able to initiate an MBInfo call, if:Rthe indicator lamp inMB Info call button ïis flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergency callcan still be initiated. In this case, an emergencycall will take priority and override all other activecalls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steeringwheelRthe corresponding button in the multimediasystem to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system ismuted.The mobile phone is no longer connected to themultimedia system.However, if you want to use your mobile phone,do so only when the vehicle is stationary and ina safe location.

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you access to adatabase with over 15 million points of interest(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-

gation system in your vehicle. If you know thedestination, the address can be downloaded.Alternatively, you can obtain the location ofPoints of Interest (POIs)/important destinationsin the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes with upto four way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidance tothe address entered.X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.

The destination download function is availableif:Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-tem.Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-ble and data transfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of thembrace PLUS Packageand cannot be purchased separately.You can use the route assistance function evenif the vehicle is not equipped with a navigationsystem.Within the framework of this service, you receivea professional and reliable form of navigationsupport without having to leave your vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-rent position and the desired destination. Youwill then be guided live through the current routesection.

Search & Send

General notesTo use "Search & Send", your vehicle must beequipped with mbrace and a navigation system.Additionally, an mbrace service subscriptionmust be completed."Search & Send" is a destination entry service. Adestination address which is found on GoogleMaps® can be transferred via mbrace directly toyour vehicle's navigation system.

Features 323

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://maps.google.comand enter a destination address into the entryfield.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on theweb-site.Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address willbe sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specified whensetting up your mbrace account into the cor-responding field.

X Click "Send".Information on specific commands such as"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on thewebsite.

Calling up a transmitted destinationaddressX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).The transmitted destination address is loadedinto the vehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, asking whethernavigation should be started.

X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.If you have sent more than one destinationaddress, each individual destination must beconfirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the sameorder as the order in which they were sent.If you ownmultipleMercedes-Benz vehicleswithmbrace and activated mbrace accounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination will besent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle and areplacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlockingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-able and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed uponwith the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Vehicle remote closingThe vehicle remote-closing feature can be usedwhen you have forgotten to lock the vehicle andyou are no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately remotely lockedwithin four days of the ignition being turned off.After this time, remote closing may be delayedby 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehiclecan no longer be locked remotely.The vehicle remote closing feature is available ifthe relevant mobile phone network is availableand a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:

324 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and youswitch on the ignition, the Doors LockedRemotelymessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centertogether with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercontacts you and the local law enforcementagency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agency isinformed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated forlonger than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center is automaticallynotified.

Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problems with your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center.The customer service representative can usethe received data to decide what kind of assis-tance is required. You are then, for example,guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred during anMB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this isinitiated by the Customer Assistance Center.

The Roadside Assistance Connected mes-sage appears in the display. If the Vehicle HealthCheck can be started, the Request for Vehi‐cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐cle diagnostics? message appears in thedisplay.X Press the Yes button to confirm themessage.X When the Vehicle Diagnostics PleaseStart Ignition message appears: turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 146).

X If the Please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehi‐cle to a safe position. messageappears: please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehicle to asafe position.The message in the display disappears.The vehicle operating state check begins.During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐cle Diagnostics Active message.If you select Cancel, the Vehicle HealthCheck is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐nection may be interrupted duringdata transfer)message appears. The vehicledata can now be sent.X Press the OK button to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ring Data... message appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-tion is re-established after the transfer is com-plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at alater time by another means, e.g. by e-mail orphone.Another function of the Vehicle Health Check isthe transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistanceCenter. If a service is due, the displayshows a message to this effect together withinformation about any special offers at yourworkshop.This information can also be called up under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 32).

Features 325

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 29).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transfer andsave predefined routes in the navigation sys-tem.A route can be prepared and sent by either acustomer service representative or under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Each route can include up to four way points.Once a route has been received by the naviga-tion system, you will see the External routeICON_POI_Category Name_1 has beensaved to "Previous destinations".Would you like to start navigation?message on the multimedia system display.The route is saved.X To start route guidance: select Yes.An overview of the route is shown in the dis-play.If you select No, the saved route can be calledup later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Starting route guidance.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called upagain.You can find further information in the separatemultimedia system operating instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-tance Center. The Customer Assistance Centerthen forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-dedRthe time at which the speed limit was excee-dedRthe selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areaswhich thevehicle should not enter or leave. You will beinformed if the vehicle crosses the boundariesof the selected areas. You can select the way inwhich you receive this information beforehand.Possible options include textmessage, e-mail oran automated call.The area can be determined as either a circle ora polygon with a maximum of ten corners. Youcan specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-ferent settings are possible for each area.These settings can be called up under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger anMB Info call andinform the customer service representative thatyou wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated by textmessage.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehicle'spanic alarm via text message. An alarm soundsand the exterior lighting flashes. Depending onthe setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notesThe HomeLink® garage door opener integratedin the rear-view mirror allows you to operate upto three different door and gate systems.Use the integrated garage door opener only ongarage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operating instruc-tions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage. Do not run theengine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integrated garage

326 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free ofcharge)

More information on HomeLink® and/or com-patible products is also available online athttp://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 31).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4


G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.


Programming

Programming buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 327).

Garage door remote controlA is not includedwith the integrated garage door opener.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to con-trol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the integratedgarage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon asbutton;,= or? is stored for the first time.If the selected button has already been pro-grammed, indicator lamp: will only light upyellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towards but-tons; to? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code (Y page 328).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.

Features 327

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 327).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror. To do this youwillneed to use the programming button on the doordrive control panel. The programming buttonmay be located in different places depending onthe manufacturer. It is usually located on thedoor drive unit on the garage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage door driveoperating instructions, e.g. under "Program-ming additional remote controls", before carry-ing out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of the garagedoor or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects arepresent within the sweep of the door or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiatethe next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programmed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openerrepeatedly and in quick succession until thedoor closes.The rolling code synchronization is then com-plete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a "break"(or interruption) of the transmission signalsafter broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,these signals may not last long enough for theintegrated garage door opener. The signal is notrecognized during programming. Comparablewith Canadian law, someU.S. garage door open-ers also feature a "break".

Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of where youlive) when using the programming steps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on theintegrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lights upyellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote con-trolA for two seconds, then release it for twoseconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of remotecontrolA until indicator lamp: lights upgreen.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA of thegarage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprogramming process for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instruc-tions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitter fre-quency can usually be found on the back ofthe garage door drive remote control.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units which

328 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

operate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage door remotecontrolA. This increases the likelihood thatgarage door remote controlA will transmit astrong and precise signal to the integratedgarage door opener.RWhen programming, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles from the but-ton which you are programming. Try variousangles at a distance between 2and 12 inches(5to 30 cm) or at the sameangle but at varyingdistances.RIf another remote control is available for thesame garage door drive, repeat the same pro-gramming steps with this remote control.Before performing these steps, make surethat new batteries have been installed ingarage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only transmitfor a limited amount of time (the indicatorlamp on the remote control goes out). PressbuttonB on remote controlA again beforetransmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function of thegarage door system remote control. Please alsoread the operating instructions for the garagedoor system.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-cator lamp: flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal as longas the button is pressed. The transmission ishalted after a maximum of ten seconds andindicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if necessary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before selling thevehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 146).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats


X Slide the relevant seat back.X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers;.X Remove the floormat.

Features 329

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Engine compartment

Hood


G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation area

Rremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshield wip-ers or the hood.

330 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle;up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a height ofapproximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and close itwith a little more force.

RadiatorDo not cover up the radiator, such as with athermal mat or insect protection cover. Thereadings of the on-board-diagnostic systemmayotherwise be inaccurate. Some of these read-ings are required by law andmust be accurate atall times.

Engine oil



G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption maybe higher than this when the vehicle is new or ifyou frequently drive at high engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstickmay bein a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-imately five minutes if the engine is at normaloperating temperature.Rall vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG C 63/C63S): the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was only star-ted briefly, wait approximately 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

The oil level of the Mercedes-AMG C 63/C63 Smust only be checked when the engine is atnormal operating temperature.

Engine compartment 331

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

ExampleX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide dipstick: into the guide tube tothe stop, and take it out again after approx-imately 3 seconds.If the level is between MIN mark= and MAXmark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= orbelow, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Adding engine oil

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that havebeen approved for vehicles with a service sys-tem. You can obtain a list of the engine oilsand oil filters tested and approved in accord-ance with the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products at any Mercedes-BenzService center.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have notbeen specifically approved for the servicesystemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters after theinterval for replacement specified by theservice system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. adding too muchengine oil can result in damage to the engineor to the catalytic converter. Have excessengine oil siphoned off.

ExampleX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engineoil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick(Y page 332).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 391).

Additional service products



G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurized, particularlywhen the motor is warm. If you open the cap,you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.There is a risk of injury.

332 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowlyopen the cap to relieve pressure.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Checking coolant level

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.


orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 146).

X Check the coolant temperature display in theinstrument cluster (Y page 236).The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).


orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 146).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clock-wise to allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) abovemarker bar= in the filler neckwhenwarm, there is enough coolant in expan-sion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far asit will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 392).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab andopen.

X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appearsin the multifunction display prompting you toadd washer fluid (Y page 285).Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 393).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messageThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.

ASSYST PLUS 333

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-let).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on the engineoil level. Observe the notes on the engine oillevel (Y page 331).

The multifunction display shows a service mes-sage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in XX DaysRService A DueRService A Overdue by XX DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance until thenext service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, indicates the type ofservice. A stands for a minor service and B for amajor service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval display doesnot take into account any periods of time duringwhich the battery is disconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-ule:X Note down the service due date displayed inthe multifunction display before disconnect-ing the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract thebattery disconnection periods from the ser-vice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press thea or% button on the steeringwheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu and confirm witha.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the ASSYST PLUS submenu and con-firm witha.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval displayhas been inadvertently reset, this setting canbe corrected at a qualified specialist work-shop.Have service work carried out as described intheMaintenance Booklet. This may otherwiselead to increased wear and damage to themajor assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset theASSYST PLUS service interval display after theservice work has been carried out. You can alsoobtain further information on maintenancework, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditions orincreased load on the vehicle, maintenancework must be carried out more frequently, forexample:Rregular city drivingwith frequent intermediatestopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel shortdistancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long periodsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires must becheckedmore often. Further information can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

334 ASSYST PLUSMaintenance

andcare

Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network isalso available in other countries. You can obtainfurther information from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ofthe following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protective filmswith hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.You could otherwise scratch or damage thesurfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after cleaning.Braking heats the brake discs and the brakepads/linings, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.


! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (theOFF button has been pressed).Rthewindshield wiper switch is at position0.Rthe 360° camera or rear view camera isswitched off.

The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.


! Make sure that the automatic transmissionis in neutral position N when washing yourvehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehiclemay otherwise be damaged.ROperating with the SmartKey:Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock. Do not open the driver's door

Care 335

Maintenance

andcare

Z

when the engine is switched off or at verylow speeds. Otherwise, when in transmis-sion position D or R the automatic trans-mission will automatically switch to parkposition P and block the wheels.ROperating with the Start/Stop button:Do not open the driver's door when theengine is switched off or at very lowspeeds. Otherwise, when in transmissionposition D or R the automatic transmissionwill automatically switch to park position Pand block the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in positionN neu-tral:Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stopbutton:X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.Operating with the Start/Stop button only:X Engage park position P.X Release the brake pedal.X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock(Y page 146).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stopbutton:X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake, if neces-sary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe off waxfrom the windshield and the wiper blades. Thiswill prevent smears and reduce wiping noisescaused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in each country.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-tle jet of water.

X Do not point thewater jet directly towards theair inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the spongefrequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-work.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt assoon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information about thecorrect distance is available from the equip-ment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectors

336 CareMaintenance

andcare

RlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical components canlead to leaks or failures.


! Edition 1 special model: parts of your vehi-cle are covered with a decorative foil. Main-tain a distance of at least 70 cm between thefoil-wrapped parts of the vehicle and the noz-zle of the high pressure cleaner.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by inadequatecare cannot always be completely repaired. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover andrinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse offthe treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,fuels and greases by rubbing gently with acloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighterfluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recommen-ded and approved byMercedes-Benz. This is thecase approximately every three to five months,depending on the climate conditions and thecare product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if thepaint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benzshould be used.Do not use these care products in the sun or onthe hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork withunsuitable materialsRfrequent use of automatic car washesRwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishingproducts, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. Theseproducts are only suitable for high-gloss sur-faces. Their use on vehicles with matte finishleads to considerable surface damage (shiny,mottled areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clearmatte finish. This will help you to avoid damageto the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheels witha clear matte finish.The vehicle should preferably be washed byhand using a soft sponge, car shampoo andplenty of water.Use only insect remover and car shampoo fromthe range of approved Mercedes-Benz careproducts.

Care 337

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after cleaning.Braking heats the brake discs and the brakepads/linings, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. Thereis otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals andpollen may under certain circumstances pre-

vent water from draining away. This can leadto corrosion damage and damage to elec-tronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windowswith a damp cloth and a cleaning product thatis recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and donot rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-ite coating could be damaged. This couldcause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from thewindshield (Y page 126).

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a dampcloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothswhich are suitable for plastic light lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning clothscould scratch or damage the plastic light len-ses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaningagent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

338 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothsthat are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths couldscratch or damage the plastic lenses of themirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wetsponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning AIRPANEL! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a distanceof at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicleand the power washer nozzle. Informationabout the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.

Vehicles with AIRPANEL have shutters in theradiator trim. If the vehicle is very dusty, theadjustment range of the shuttersmay be restric-ted. The actuation mechanics of the radiatortrimmust then be cleaned with a power washer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Shutters: open automatically after approx-imately 120 seconds.

X Clean the location points of shutters; in theradiator trim with a power washer.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a distanceof at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicleand the power washer nozzle. Informationabout the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems withwater, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear viewcamera and360°camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera or 360°camerawith a high-pressure water jet.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Open the camera cover for cleaning via themultimedia system (see separate operatinginstructions).

X To clean the camera: use clean water and asoft cloth to clean camera lens:.

360°camera: if you drive at speeds above20 mph (30 km/h) or with the key in position 0or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360°camera closes automatically.

Care 339

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as bathroomcleaner or wheel cleaner.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with black exhaustpipes: the black-chrome tailpipe finishersshould not be polished with a chrome polish.Theywill otherwise lose their black sheen. Foroptimal care, the faceplates should be rubbedwith a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash.Commercially available engine and care oilsare suitable for this.For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paint-work polish with a microfiber cloth. Removethe excess polish residue after polishing.

Impurities combined with the effects of road gritand corrosive environmental factors may causeflash rust to form on the surface. You canrestore the original shine of the exhaust pipe bycleaning it regularly, especially in winter andafter washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household cleaningagents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surface whencleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-age to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that itis switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCDdisplay cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibercloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent orsunscreen to come into contact with the plas-tic trim. Thismaintains the high-quality look ofthe surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes

340 CareMaintenance

andcare

or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-ing the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum and canlose their shine if chrome polish is used. Usea damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaningthe trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you areunsure as to whether the trim pieces arechrome-plated or not, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Trim elements with piano black finish:clean with a soft, damp cloth and a commer-cially available soap solution.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Donot use amicrofiber cloth to clean coversmade out of real leather, artificial leather orDINAMICA. If used often, these can damagethe cover.

Note that regular care is essential to ensure thatthe appearance and comfort of the covers isretained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully witha damp cloth and then wipe the coversdown with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwise becomerough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:

Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning resultsdepend on the type of dirt and how long ithas been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts byheating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80†)or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarmwater and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush ordry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaningagents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Care 341

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Where will I find...?

Reflective safety jacket

Removing/stowing the reflectivesafety jackets

The reflective safety jackets are located in thesafety jacket compartments in the stowagecompartments of the front doors. There are alsosafety jacket compartments in the stowagecompartments of the rear doors, in which reflec-tive safety jackets can be stowed.X To remove: pull out safety jacket bag:withthe reflective safety jacket by loop;.

X Open safety jacket bag: and pull out thereflective safety jacket.

X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, rollit up and stow it in safety jacket bag:.

X Slide safety jacket bag: along the loweredge of the armrest into the safety jacketcompartment. Meanwhile, ensure thatloop; hangs out well within reach.i Remove a new reflective safety jacket fromits packaging material before sliding it intothe safety jacket compartment. The packag-ingmaterial may otherwise cause it to slip outor make removing it difficult.

Observe the legal requirements in each country.

Notes on the reflective safety jackets

: Maximum number of washes; Maximum wash temperature= Do not bleach? Do not ironA Do not use a laundry dryerB Do not dry-cleanC This is a class 2 vestRThe reflective safety jacketsmeet the require-ments defined by the legal standard only if:- the correct size is used, and- the reflective safety jackets are fastenedcorrectly.

REnsure before use that the reflective safetyjackets are clean and intact. The special prop-erties may otherwise be compromised.RThe reflective safety jackets should be storedin their original packaging in a dry place awayfrom sources of heat and light.RThe maximum number of washes specified isnot the only factor influencing the life span ofthe reflective safety jackets. Their life spanalso depends on use, care, storage, etc.RThe reflective safety jackets should be dis-posed of and replaced with new ones:- after 15 washes, and/or- if the reflective strips have becomescratched, and/or

- if the backing material and/or reflectivestrips have become soiled and cannot becleaned off, and/or

- the fluorescence of a reflective safety vesthas faded e.g. due to the effects of sunlight

RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an envi-ronmentally responsible manner. To do so,contact your local waste disposal company.

342 Where will I find...?Breakdow

nassistance

Vehicle tool kit

General notesIn vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics) and onPLUG-INHYBRIDvehicles, the towing eye is in a bracket under theparcel shelf.Apart from certain country-specific variations,the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-changetool kit.Some tools for changing a wheel are specific tothe vehicle. For more information on which tirechanging tools are required and approved toperform awheel change on your vehicle, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Tools required for changing a wheel mayinclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrenchRRatchet wrenchRAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Tire inflation compressor; Tire sealant filler bottle= Towing eyeX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 315).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-ties) (Y page 343)

Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-cles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 343)Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.Information on changing and mounting wheels(Y page 379).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 177).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-functionor KEYLESS‑GOX Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock (Y page 146).

X Make sure that the engine cannot be startedvia your smartphone (Y page 149).

X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-gered as they do so. Make sure that no one isnear the danger area while a wheel is beingchanged. Anyone who is not directly assistingin the wheel change should, for example,stand behind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to trafficconditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one

Flat tire 343

Breakdow

nassistance

or more tires. The affected tire must not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bear-ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 374).MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure loss warningsystem or with an active tire pressure monitor.If a pressure losswarningmessage appearsin the multifunction display:Robserve the instructions in the display mes-sages (Y page 280).Rcheck the tire for damage.Rif driving on, observe the following notes.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fullyladen it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:Rvehicle speedRroad conditionRoutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving conditionsor maneuvers, or it can be increased through amoderate style of driving.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode iscounted from the moment the tire pressure losswarning appears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).When replacing one or all tires, please observethe following specifications for your vehicle'stires:RsizeRthe type andRthe "MOExtended" markIf a tire has gone flat and cannot be replacedwith a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may beused as a temporary measure. Make sure thatyou use the proper size and type (summer orwinter tire).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.

winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.


G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.

344 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressorfor longer than ten minutes at a time withouta break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be operatedagain once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-pressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Donot remove any foreign objectswhich havepenetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflationcompressor from the stowage well under-neath the trunk floor (Y page 343).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to theinstrument cluster within the driver's field ofvision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Remove filler hoseB and connector= fromthe bottom section of the tire inflation com-pressor housing;.

X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into themounting on yellow capA of tire sealant fillerbottle: until the connector engages.

X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow capA of tire sealant filler bottle: into themounting of tire inflation compressor;. Thecap must engage in both hooks.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.X Insert connector= into a socket in your vehi-cle.Cigarette lighter socket: (Y page 319)

Flat tire 345

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

12 V socket: (Y page 319)Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter(Y page 319). Observe the notes on sockets(Y page 319).


X Press on and off switch? on the tire inflationcompressor to ON.The tire inflation compressor is switched on.The tire is inflated.First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. Thepressure may briefly rise to approximately500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximumof tenminutes. The tire should thenhave attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa(2.0 bar/29 psi).

If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-sure reached" (Y page 346).If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure not reached" (Y page 346).If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affectedareas as quickly as possible. Use plain water ifpossible.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, havethem cleaned with perchloroethylene at a drycleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) hasnot been attained after ten minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.Note that tire sealant may escape when youunscrew the filler hose.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-imately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After amaximumof tenminutes, the tire pres-sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badly

damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tiresealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must beaffixed to the instrument cluster in the driver'sfield of vision.

! Residue from the tire sealant may come outof the filler hose after use. This could causestains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) hasbeen attained after ten minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.

346 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-tion compressor.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure with thetire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentioned above,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on thetire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-sure release button: next to pressuregauge;.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew thefiller hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of thesealed tire.

X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the tireinflation compressor, press together the lock-ing tabs on the yellow cap.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-tion compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-shop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hosereplaced as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery (vehicle)

12 V battery – important safety notesPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles are equipped with a12 V battery and a high-voltage battery. The fol-lowing notes refer to the 12 V battery. Notes onthe high-voltage battery can be obtained in the"High-voltage battery – important safety notes"section (Y page 349).Special tools and expert knowledge are requiredwhen working on the battery, e.g. removal andinstallation. You should therefore have all workinvolving the battery carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the

Battery (vehicle) 347

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 68) and (Y page 73).All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery:

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms whencharging the battery as well as when jump-start-ing.Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up ofelectrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-ple:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across the car-pet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.

RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

All vehicles:

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.

348 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-nanceBooklet or contact a qualified specialistworkshop for more information.

! Always havework on batteries carried out ata qualified specialist workshop. Should it, inexceptional circumstances, be absolutelynecessary to disconnect the 12-volt batteryyourself, observe the following:Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.Rswitch off the ignition.Ralways disconnect the negative terminalclamp first, followed by the positive termi-nal clamp.

After the battery has been disconnected, thetransmission is locked in position P.After the work has been done, install the bat-tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corro-sive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes orclothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Immediately rinse electrolyte or acidsplashes off with clean water. Con-tact a physician if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which have

been tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehicleoccupants from suffering acid burns should thebattery be damaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maximumpossible service life, it must always be suffi-ciently charged.The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can dis-charge over time if you do not use the vehicle. Inthis case, have the battery disconnected at aqualified specialist workshop. You can alsocharge the batterywith a charger recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-ist workshop for further information.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked for a long period of time.Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicleand do not require any electrical consumers.The vehicle will then use very little energy, thusconserving battery power.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if the batterycharge is sufficient, the high-voltage battery canalso supply the 12 V battery. This only happensif the condition of charge of the 12 V batteryrequires this, e.g. after using electrical consum-ers for an extended period with the engineswitched off. As the on-board voltage is contin-uously monitored this can also be performedwhen the engine is switched off. The condition ofcharge of the 12 V battery and the on-boardvoltage are thereby kept stable for a longerperiod.

High-voltage battery – importantsafety notesOnly PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles are equippedwith a high-voltage battery.

G DANGERThe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may be


Breakdow

nassistance

Z

damaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident andthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIn the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed acritical value. In this case flammable gasescapes through a ventilation valve on theunderbody. The gas can ignite. There is a riskof injury.Leave the danger zone immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance, whilstobserving legal requirements.

G WARNINGIf the housing of the high-voltage battery hasbeen damaged, electrolyte and gases mayleak out. These are poisonous and caustic.There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes offwith water and seek medical attentionstraight away.

! Exhaustive discharge caused by the vehiclestanding idle for lengthy periods can damagethe high-voltage battery. If the vehicle is idlefor lengthy periods leave the high-voltage bat-tery connected to a charging station.

Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ifyou wish to leave your vehicle parked for a longperiod of time.

Charging the 12 V batteryVehicles with a lithium-ion battery:

! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.4 V.

All other vehicles:

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.8 V.

All vehicles:

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 352).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery in thejump-starting procedure (Y page 352).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do notlean over a battery. Never charge the battery if itis still installed in the vehicle, unless you use abattery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery chargerunit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the

350 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

charging of the battery in its installed position.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor further information and availability. Read thebattery charger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: if the indicator/warning lamps inthe instrument cluster do not light up at lowtemperatures, it is very likely that the dis-charged battery has frozen. In this case youmayneither jump-start the vehicle nor charge thebattery. The service life of a thawed-out batterymay be shorter. The starting characteristics canbe impaired, particularly at low temperatures.Have the thawed-out battery checked at a quali-fied specialist workshop.Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: at lowtemperatures, do not charge a batterywhich hasbeen removed using a battery charger. Allow thebattery to warm up gently first, if necessary.Otherwise, the service life can be shortened andthe starting characteristics impaired, especiallyat low temperatures.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if the batterycharge is sufficient, the high-voltage battery canalso supply the 12 V battery. This only happensif the condition of charge of the 12 V batteryrequires this, e.g. after using electrical consum-ers for an extended period with the engineswitched off. As the on-board voltage is contin-uously monitored this can also be performedwhen the engine is switched off. The condition ofcharge of the 12 V battery and the on-boardvoltage are thereby kept stable for a longerperiod.


Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery:

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up,it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge thebattery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. Thestarting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-outbattery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.All vehicles:

352 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, theengine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected fora few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clampdo not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must beoff. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 146).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-startingdevice.X Slide coverA of positive terminal: in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal: on your vehicle to positive terminal; of donor batteryB using thejumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal: on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.

Jump-starting 353

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Connect negative terminal= of donor batteryB to ground point? of your vehicle using thejumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point? and negative terminal=, then from pos-itive clamp: and positive terminal;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X Close coverA of positive terminal: after removing jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if your vehicle has been jump-started, it may not be possible to use theelectric drive for approximately 30 minutes.Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting


G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weightof your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-tification plate (Y page 387).

! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or theHOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automaticallyin certain situations. To avoid damage to thevehicle, deactivate these systems in the fol-lowing or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brake isreleased. If the electric parking brake is faulty,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towingeye only. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbecome damaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery. Thiscould damage the vehicle. If in doubt, havethe vehicle recovered using a crane.

354 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high, thevehicles could be damaged.

! Shift the automatic transmission to N anddo not open the driver's or front passenger'sdoor during towing. The automatic transmis-sion may otherwise shift to position P, whichcould damage the transmission.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Thiscould damage the vehicle.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30miles (50km). The towing speed of 30mph(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

It is better to have the vehicle transported thanto have it towed away.If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,have it transported on a transporter or trailer.The automatic transmission must be in positionN when the vehicle is being towed. If the auto-matic transmission cannot be shifted to positionN, have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lockRcannot release the electric parking brakeRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N

Disarm the automatic locking feature before thevehicle is towed (Y page 89). You could other-wise be locked out when pushing or towing thevehicle.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles may not be towedaway but must instead be transported, if:Rthe multifunction display is not working orRtheá Towing Not Permitted SeeOperator's Manualmessage appears in themultifunction display

If the vehicle is in a dangerous area, it can betowed out of that area with both axles on theground. In this case, the towing distance mustnot be greater than 165 ft (50 m) and must notexceed a towing speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). For

longer distances, have the vehicle loaded andtransported.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

The brackets for the screw-in towing eye arelocated in the bumpers. They are at the rear andat the front, under covers:.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle toolkit (Y page 343).

X Press the mark on cover: inwards andremove.

X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as itwill go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Attach cover: to the bumper and press untilit engages.

X Put the towing eye back into the vehicle toolkit.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraisedOnly vehicleswithout 4MATIC can be towedwith the rear axle raised.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: towing the vehicleaway with the rear axle raised should only becarried out by professional recovery companies.

Towing and tow-starting 355

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicleswith 4MATICmay either be towed awaywith both axles on the ground or be loaded upand transported.

! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be towed with the rear axle raised. Thevehicle/trailer combination may otherwiseswerve or even roll over.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundThe automatic transmission automatically shiftsto positionPwhen you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the Smart-Key from the ignition lock. In order to ensurethat the automatic transmission stays in posi-tion N when towing the vehicle, you mustobserve the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 120).

In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combination switchas usual. In this case, only the indicator lampsfor the direction of travel flash. After resettingthe combination switch, the hazard warninglamp starts flashing again.

Transporting the vehicle

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehiclesTransportation of the vehicle should only be car-ried out by professional recovery companies.

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with auto-matic transmission

! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, thefront and rear axlesmust be stationary and onthe same transportation vehicle. Positioningover the connection point of the transportvehicle is not permitted. The drive train mayotherwise be damaged.

All vehicles! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-poses.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

356 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Vehicleswith 4MATICmay either be towed awaywith both axles on the ground or be loaded upand transported.If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle isdamaged, have the vehicle transported on atruck or trailer.In the event of damage to the electrical sys-tem: if the battery is defective, the automatictransmissionwill be locked in positionP. To shiftthe automatic transmission to position N, youmust provide power to the vehicle's electricalsystem in the same way as when jump-starting(Y page 352).Have the vehicle transported on a transporter ortrailer.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-age the automatic transmission.i You can find information on "Jump-starting"under (Y page 352).

Fuses


G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of thesame rating, which you can recognize by thecolor and value. The fuse ratings are listed in thefuse allocation chart.The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in thetrunk (Y page 357).If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified special-ist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

! Only use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and which have thecorrect fuse rating for the system concerned.Otherwise, components or systems could bedamaged.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.

Before changing a fuseObserve the important safety notes(Y page 357)X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 177).

X Switch off the engine.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-functionor KEYLESS‑GOX Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.The driver’s door can be closed again.

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboardRFuse box in the front-passenger footwellRFuse box in the engine compartment on thedriver's sideRFuse box under the trunk floor on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in thedirection of travel

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw-driver to open the cover in the dashboard. Youcould damage the dashboard or the cover.

Fuses 357

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Open the driver's door.X To open: pull out cover: slightly at the bot-tom in the direction of arrow=.

X Fold cover: outwards in the direction ofarrow;.

X To close: fold in cover: until it engages.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well

X Open the front-passenger door.X To open: fold cover: out towards the rearand remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: at the rear.X Fold cover: forwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

X Open the hood (Y page 330).X To open: press safety clips: on the covertogether.

X Remove fuse box cover; upwards.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture fromthe fuse box.

X Loosen screws=, fold up fuse box lid? andremove it.

X To close: check whether the seal is posi-tioned correctly in the lid?.

X Insert lid? into the bracket at the rear of thefuse box.

X Fold down lid? of the fuse box and tightenscrews=.

X Insert cover; on both sides and engagesafety clips:.

X Close the hood.

358 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

Fuse box in the trunk

X Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 315).X To open: swing cover: upwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X To close: fold down cover: in the oppositedirection to the arrow.Make sure that the cover is in the recess pro-vided for it.

i The fuse allocation chart is located in arecess at the side of the fuse box. You can findthe corresponding fuse rating and fuse typeon the fuse allocation chart.

Fuses 359

Breakdow

nassistance

Z


G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-rectly can impair the operating safety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendations

Further information regarding wheels and tirescan be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"(Y page 384).You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel-tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Information on tire pressure can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 370)Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 165)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 363)

Operation

Information on drivingCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle isheavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noisesand unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-ing to one side. This may indicate that thewheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect thata tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage. Hiddentire damage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find no signs ofdamage, have the tires and wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure that thetires do not get deformed by the curb or otherobstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuseangle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheelsor tires.

Notes on high performance tires

G WARNINGDue to the special tire tread in combinationwith the optimized rubber compound, there isan increased risk of hydroplaning and skid-ding on a damp or wet road surface. tire grip isalso noticeably reduced at low outside tem-peratures and low tire operating tempera-tures. There is a risk of an accident.

360 OperationWheelsandtires

Turn on ESP® and adapt your driving styleaccordingly. When the outside temperaturefalls below 10 †, use M+S tires.

i Different driving styles may lead to high tirewear and the tires may reach the minimumtire tread depth after only a short time.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Checkwheels and tires for damage at least oncea month. Check wheels and tires after drivingoff-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheelscan cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particularattention to damage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole width ofthe tire (Y page 361). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protect thevalve against dirt and moisture. Do not mountanything onto the valve other than the standardvalve cap or other valve caps approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use anyother valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressuremonitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-sure as necessary (Y page 363).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:Rdriving styleRtire pressureRdistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tiretread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.They are visible once a tread depth of approx-imatelyá in (1.6mm) has been reached. If thisis the case, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same typeand make.

Operation 361

Wheelsandtires

Z

Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" section (Y page 343).ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto thewheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for thefirst 60 miles (100 km). They only reach theirfull performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reduces thetraction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure loss warningsystem or with an active tire pressure monitorand on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with aflat tire (Y page 343).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 379).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehicle

to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause cracks to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility forthis type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7†), use wintertires or all-season tires. Both types of tire areidentified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking providethe best possible grip in wintry road conditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety systemssuch as ABS and ESP® to function optimally inwinter. These tires have been developed specif-ically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on allwheels to maintain safe handling characteris-tics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 366).X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system(Y page 367).

X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-sure loss warning system (Y page 367).

X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 369).

362 Winter operationWheelsandtires

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you mountsnow chains on steel wheels, you may dam-age the hub caps. Remove the hub caps fromthe relevant wheels before mounting thesnow chains.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains that havebeen specially approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality. For more information,please contact a qualified specialist workshop.If you intend to mount snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 384).ROnly use snow chains when driving on roadscompletely covered by snow. Remove thesnow chains as soon as possible when youcome to a road that is not snow-covered.RLocal regulationsmay restrict the use of snowchains. Observe the appropriate regulations ifyou wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive atraised vehicle level if snow chains have beeninstalled (Y page 196).RWhen snow chains are installed, never useActive Parking Assist (Y page 202).

You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pullingaway with snow chains installed:RAll vehicles (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)(Y page 74)RMercedes‑AMG vehicles (Y page 74)

You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in acontrolled manner, achieving an increased driv-ing force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications


G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard and tire pressure table shown here areexamples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-cle-specific and may deviate from the datashown here. The tire pressure specificationsthat are valid for your vehicle can be found onthe Tire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure 363

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 370).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires. The recommended tire pressures are validfor the maximum permissible load and up to themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuelfiller flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tirespermitted at the factory for this vehicle; seeillustration (example).

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-lowing tire pressure information is only valid forthat tire size; see illustration (example).

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fullyladen" are defined in the table for different num-bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. Theactual number of seats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.The rim diameter is part of the tire size and canbe found on the tire sidewall (Y page 374).If the tire pressures have been set to the lowervalues for lighter loads and/or lower roadspeeds, the pressures should be reset to thehigher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speedsThe tire pressures for increased loads and/orhigher road speeds, shown in the tire pressuretable, may have a negative effect on drivingcomfort.If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this canlead to an excessive build-up of heat and a sud-den loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

364 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tirepressure. The outer appearance of a tire doesnot permit any reliable conclusion about the tirepressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressurecan be checked in the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is dependenton the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on theoutside temperature, the vehicle speed and thetire load. If the tire temperature changes by18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Takethis into account when checking the pressure ofwarm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is

too low for the current operating conditions. Ifyou check the tire pressure when the tires arewarm, the resulting value will be higher than ifthe tires were cold. This is normal. Do notreduce the tire pressure to the value specifiedfor cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwisebe too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap(Y page 165)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Tire pressure 365

Wheelsandtires

Z

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the recom-mended tire pressure for your vehicle whenadjusting the tire pressure (Y page 363).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 363).Information on air pressure for the tires on yourvehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillarRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 165)Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pressure,proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to bechecked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to therecommended value on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure table(Y page 363).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tirepressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. Todo so, press down the metal pin in the valve,using the tip of a pen for example. Then checkthe tire pressure again using the tire pressurechecker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressureloss warning system monitors the set tire pres-sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.This enables the system to detect significantpressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation ofa wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,a corresponding warningmessage will appear inthe multifunction display.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarningby the Run Flat Indicator Active Press'OK' to Restart message which appears inthe Service menu of the multifunction display.Information on the message display can befound in the "Restarting the tire pressure losswarning system" section (Y page 367).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does not warnyou of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 363).The tire pressure loss warning does not replacethe need to regularly check the tire pressure. Aneven loss of pressure on several tires at the


same time cannot be detected by the tire pres-sure loss warning system.The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner-ing at high speeds or driving with high rates ofacceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi-cle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning system ifyou have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tires forthe respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can be foundon the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressuretable is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tirepressure loss warning system can only givereliable warnings if you have set the correcttire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure isset, these incorrect values will be monitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 363).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 146).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu.

X Press thea button.

X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres‐sure.X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActivePress'OK' to Restart message appears in themultifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press9 or: to select Yes.X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After a teach-in period, the tire pressure losswarning system will monitor the set tire pres-sures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears, press9 or: to select Can‐cel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tirepressures in all four tires. The tire pressuremon-itor warns you if the pressure drops in one ormore of the tires. The tire pressure monitor onlyfunctions if the corresponding sensors areinstalled in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed in themultifunction display. After a few minutes ofdriving, the current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the Servicemenu of themultifunctiondisplay; see illustration (example).

Tire pressure 367

Wheelsandtires

Z

For information on the message display, refer tothe "Checking the tire pressure electronically"section (Y page 369).


G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every twoweeks when cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even ifunderinflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-sure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-tem detects a malfunction, the warning lampwill flash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-minated, the systemmay not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of incom-patible replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate Tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 363). Note that the correct tire pressurefor the current operating situation must first betaught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there isa substantial loss of pressure, the warningthreshold for the warning message is aligned tothe reference values taught-in. Restart the tirepressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure ofthe cold tires (Y page 369). The current pres-sures are saved as new reference values. As aresult, a warning message will appear if the tirepressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn you ofan incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe thenotes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 363).The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.


The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warninglamp in the instrument cluster for indicatingpressure loss or a malfunction. Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tirepressure on one or more tires is significantlytoo low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-functioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Observethe information on display messages(Y page 280).It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunctionof the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-sure warning lamp flashing for approximatelyone minute and then remaining lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. Thetire pressures shown by the on-board computerrefer to those measured at sea level. At highaltitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by apressure gauge are higher than those shown bythe on-board computer. In this case, do notreduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radio transmit-ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-wayradios) thatmay be being operated in or near thevehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 146).



X Press thea button.

X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres‐sure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire is shownin the multifunction display.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than20 minutes, the following message appears:Tire pressure will be displayed afterdriving a few minutes.After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-itor automatically detects new wheels or newsensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tirepressure value to the individual wheels is notpossible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activemessage is shown instead of the tire pressuredisplay. The tire pressures are already beingmonitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning message isshown in the multifunction display. The yellowtire pressure warning lamp then lights up.RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressuremessage appears in themultifunction display,the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.The tire pressure must be corrected when theopportunity arises.RIf the Check Tires message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in atleast one tire has dropped significantly. Thetires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire Malfunctionmessageappears in the multifunction display, the tirepressure in at least one tire has dropped sud-denly. The tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in thedisplay messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 280).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,the tire pressures may be displayed for thewrong positions for a short time. This is rectifiedafter a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted and thewarning lamps go out. Themonitor uses the cur-rently set tire pressures as the reference values

Tire pressure 369

Wheelsandtires

Z

for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressuremonitor will automatically detect the new refer-ence values after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also define refer-ence valuesmanually as described here. The tirepressure monitor then monitors the new tirepressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-ded for the corresponding driving situation onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's side B-pillar (Y page 363).You can find more tire pressure values forvarious operating conditions in the tire pres-sure table inside the fuel filler flap(Y page 363).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct onall four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 146).



X Press thea button.X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres‐sure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure for each wheel orthe Tire pressure will be displayedafter driving a few minutes messagewill be displayed in the multifunction display.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐erence Valuesmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressures arewithin the specified range. The new tire pres-sures are then accepted as reference valuesand monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show themaximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tireand Loading Information placard shows themaximum permissible number of occu-pants and themaximumpermissible vehicleload. It also contains details of the tire sizesand corresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-tification plate informs you of the grossvehicle weight rating. It is made up of thevehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, thefuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-mation about the maximum gross axleweight rating on the front and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle). Never exceedthe maximum load or the maximum grossaxle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

370 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combinedweight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, loadand luggage must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specificand may differ from that in the illustration.You can find the valid maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle onthe Tire and Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown.The number of seats in your vehicle can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-suant to the "National Traffic and Motor VehicleSafety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’sTire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacity cal-culated in step 4.

Loading the vehicle 371

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varyingseating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure you are using the actual loadlimit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 370).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2


Number of people inthe vehicle (driver andoccupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

Step 3


Permissible load (maxi-mum gross vehicleweight rating from theTire and Loading Infor-mation placard minusthe gross weight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

372 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargo care-fully, you should still make sure that the grossvehicle weight rating and the gross axle weightrating are not exceeded. Details can be found onthe vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 370).Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-mum permissible weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed themaximum permissible values (gross vehicleweight and maximum gross axle weight rating),have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.government specifications. Their purpose is toprovide drivers with uniform reliable informationon tire performance data. Tire manufacturershave to grade tires using three performance fac-tors:: tread wear grade,; traction grade and= temperature grade. These regulations do notapply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold inNorth America are provided with the corre-

sponding quality grading markings on the side-wall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applicable,on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tiresmust conform to the stat-utory safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.


TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified U.S.government course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half times as wellon the government test track as a tire graded100.The relative performance of tires depends uponthe actual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practicesand differences in road characteristics and cli-mate.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage tothe drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-ured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

All about wheels and tires 373

Wheelsandtires

Z

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfaces.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum treaddepth ofã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.Observe the legally required minimum tire treaddepth (Y page 361). Winter tires can reduce thebraking distance on snow-covered surfaces incomparison with summer tires. The braking dis-tance is still much further than on surfaces thatare not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-priate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)(Y page 362).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 378)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 377)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 376)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 366)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 377)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Y page 374)D Load index (Y page 376)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe the

374 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

tire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wall maynot contain any letters or may contain one letterthat precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-ufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: these arelight truck tires according to U.S. manufacturingstandards.If "T" precedes the size description: compactemergency wheels with high tire pressure thatare only designed for temporary use in an emer-gency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominal tirewidth in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is the sizeratio between the tire height and tire width andis shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size

description, depending on the manufacturer(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diameterof the bead seat, not the diameter of the rimflange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA is anumerical code that specifies the maximumload-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 370).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.For further information on the maximum tireload in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 376).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 376).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.


Regardless of the speed rating, always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt yourdriving style to the traffic conditions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in


Wheelsandtires

Z

the size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up of load-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifications,ask the tire manufacturer in order to find outthe maximum speed.If a service specification is available, the max-imum speed is limited according to the speedrating in the service specification. Example:245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" isthe service specification. The letter "Y" rep-resents the speed rating. The maximumspeed of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifica-tion must be given in parentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-cates that the maximum speed of the tire isover 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-ufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+Smarking, winter tires alsohave thei snowflake symbol on the tirewall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association ofCanada (RAC) regarding the tire traction onsnow. They have been especially developedfor driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph(210 km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at the factorymay be higher than themaximum speed that theelectronic speed limiter permits.

Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 384).Further information about reading tire data canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex: may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. You will find this after the letter thatidentifies the speed rating (Y page 374).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standard load(SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that dependson themaximum load that the tire can carry ata certain pressure


Maximum load rating

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.


Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 370).


DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-ufacturer or retreadermust imprint a TIN in or onthe sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retreadersto inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? andmanufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol:marks that the tire complies with therequirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-portation.Manufacturer identification code: manufac-turer identification code; provides details onthe tire manufacturer. New tires have a codewith two symbols. Retreaded tires have a codewith four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 384).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be used bythe manufacturer as a code to describe specificcharacteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture: date of manufactureAprovides information about the age of a tire. Thefirst and second positions represent the week ofmanufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-endar week. Positions three and four representthe year of manufacture. For example, a tire thatis marked with "3208", was manufactured inweek 32 in 2008.


Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cordand the number of layers in sidewall: andunder tire tread;.


Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire treadand sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of theU S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehicleis designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).


Wheelsandtires

Z

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction andtemperature characteristics. The quality grad-ing assessment is made by the manufacturerfollowing specifications from the U.S. govern-ment. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall ofthe tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies to thetires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-mum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installed onthe vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tire ismounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. The grossaxle weight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identification.It specifies the speed range for which the tire isapproved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weight ofthe vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel,accessories installed, occupants, luggage andthe drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The grossvehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (theweight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable). The gross vehicle weight rating isspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure isbar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacitymore precisely.

Curb weightTheweight of a vehicle with standard equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-tem and optional equipment if these are instal-led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-gers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximum permis-sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire isapproved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculated bydividing the maximum axle load of one axle bytwo.


PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tire widthin percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying an out-ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds persquare inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.The tire pressure should only be corrected whenthe tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contact withthe road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sits securelyon thewheel. There are several steel wires in thebead to prevent the tire from coming loose fromthe wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-formance battery, are not included in the curbweight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be used bya tire manufacturer to identify tires, for examplefor a product recall, and thus identify the pur-chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-er's identity code, tire size, tire type code andthe manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is a codethat contains the maximum load bearing capa-city of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between the tiresand the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is levelwith the bars, the wear limit ofá in (1.6 mm)has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle at theirdesignated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 343) contains information and notes onhow to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flattire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" (Y page 343).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are locatedin the wheel.

Changing a wheel 379

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire-mounting tools should not be used nearthe valve. This could damage the electroniccomponents.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 380).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tires inthe center.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer'swarranty book in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km). Earlier may be necessary, depend-ing on the degree of tire wear. Do not change thedirection of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and thebrake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota-ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,restart the tire pressure loss warning system(Y page 367) or the tire pressure monitor(Y page 369).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotation haveadditional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-planing. These advantages can only be gained ifthe tires are installed corresponding to thedirection of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates itscorrect direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tiresfrom oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-aheadposition.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Make sure that the vehicle level is set to "Nor-mal" on vehicles with AIRMATIC (Y page 196).

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-functionor KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-functionor KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-ton from the ignition lock (Y page 146).

X Make sure that the engine cannot be startedvia your smartphone (Y page 149).

X If included in the vehicle equipment, removethe tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, itcan be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 343).The folding wheel chock is an additional safetymeasure to prevent the vehicle from rollingaway, for example when changing a wheel.

380 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into theopenings in base plate=.

X Place chocks or other suitable items underthe front and rear of the wheel that is diago-nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jackingup the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-wise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the followingwhen raising the vehi-cle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-cific jack that has been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold thevehicle for a short time while a wheel is beingchanged. It must not be used for performingmaintenance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-hill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-ing away by applying the parking brake and

inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,flat, load-bearing underlaymust be used. On aslippery surface, a non-slip underlay must beused, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objectsas a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jackwill notbe able to achieve its load-bearing capacitydue to the restricted height.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground does notexceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in thevehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps: thewheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before youcan unscrew the wheel bolts, you must removethe hub cap. Two different variants can be instal-led.

Vehicles with plastic hub cap:X To remove: turn the center cover of hubcap: counter-clockwise and remove.

X To install: before installing, ensure that hubcap: is in the open position. To do this, turnthe center cover counter-clockwise.

X Position hub cap: and turn the center coverclockwise until hub cap: engages physicallyand audibly.

X Make sure that hub cap: is installedsecurely.


Wheelsandtires

Z

Vehicles with aluminum hub cap:X To remove: take socket; and lug wrench= from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 343).

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Position lug wrench= on socket;.X Using lug wrench=, turn hub cap: coun-ter-clockwise and remove it.

X To install: before installing, check hub cap:and the wheel area for soiling and clean ifnecessary.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn until it is inthe right position.

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach lug wrench= to socket; andtighten hub cap:.The tightening torque must be18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

i Note that the hub cap should be tightenedto the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe hub cap installed at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Using lug wrench=, loosen the bolts on thewheel you wish to change by about one fullturn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of the rearwheel housings (arrows).Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles withAMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body,the vehicle has covers installed next to the jack-ing points on the outer sills.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicleswith AMG equipment: fold cover?upwards.

X Position jackB at jacking pointA.

382 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn crankC clockwise until jackB sitscompletely on jacking pointA. The base ofthe jack must lie evenly on the ground.

X Turn crankC until the tire is raised a maxi-mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-brake disc: during removal and repositioningof the wheel, the wheel rim can strike theceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore,you should proceed carefully and get a sec-ond person assist to you. Alternatively, youcan use a second alignment bolt.

! Do not placewheel bolts in sand or on a dirtysurface. The bolt andwheel hub threads couldotherwise be damaged when you screw themin.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for aslong as the wheels are removed, avoid applyingany external force on the brake disks. This couldimpair the level of comfort when braking.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section(Y page 379).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respectivewheel.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-brake disc: during removal and repositioningof the wheel, the wheel rim can strike theceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore,you should proceed carefully and get a sec-ond person assist to you. Alternatively, youcan use a second alignment bolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.


Wheelsandtires

Z

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-ment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwiseuntil the vehicle is once again standing firmlyon the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswisepattern in the sequence indicated (: toA).

The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft(130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle toolsin the trunk again.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicleswith AMG equipment: insert the cover intothe outer sill.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly mountedwheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 363).

When you are driving with the collapsible sparewheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warningsystemor the tire pressuremonitor cannot func-tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure losswarning system or tire pressure monitor whenthe defective wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-tem: all installed wheels must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.

Wheel-tire combination

You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel-tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tires and wheelswhich have been approved byMercedes-Benzspecifically for your vehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABS orESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires mayonly be used on wheels that have been spe-cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certaincharacteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noiseemissions or fuel consumption, may other-wise be adversely affected. In addition, whendriving with a load, tire dimension variationscould cause the tires to come into contact

384 Wheel-tire combinationWheelsandtires

with the bodywork and axle components. Thiscould result in damage to the tires or the vehi-cle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from the use of tires, wheels oraccessories other than those tested andapproved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-ous damage cannot always be detected onretreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benzcannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreadedtires are mounted. Do not mount used tires ifyou have no information about their previoususage.

The recommended pressures for various oper-ating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tire pres-sures under various operating conditions(Y page 363).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the maintenancerecommendations of the tire manufacturer inthe vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equipthe vehicle with:Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (leftand right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summertires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" section (Y page 343).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Wheel-tire combination 385

Wheelsandtires

Z

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Retrofitting two-way radios andmobile phones (RF transmitters)

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from modifiedor incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters caninterfere with the vehicle electronics. This cancompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.You should have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from incor-rectly operated RF transmitters can interferewith the vehicle electronics, for example:Rif the RF transmitter is not connected withan exterior antennaRthe exterior antenna has been installedincorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior antennamounted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permit may be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use of RFtransmitters are not observed.

In particular, the following conditionsmust becomplied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Rcompliance with the maximum permissibleoutput in these wavebands is required.Ronly approved antenna positions may beused.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and the healthof others. Using an exterior antenna takes intoaccount current scientific discussions relatingto the possible health hazards that may resultfrom electromagnetic fields.

Approved antenna positions: Front roof area; Rear roof area= Rear fender? Trunk lid

i On vehicles with panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, installing an antenna to thefront or rear roof area is not permitted.On the rear fenders, it is recommended toposition the antenna on the side of the vehicleclosest to the center of the road.

Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609when retrofitting RF transmitters (RoadVehicles- EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarketradio frequency transmitting equipment).Observe the legal requirements for retrofittings.If your vehicle has installations for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply or antennaconnections intended for use with the basic wir-ing. Be sure to observe themanufacturer's addi-tional instructions when installing.Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-mum transmission outputs or antenna positionsmust be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

386 Vehicle electronicsTechnicaldata

Themaximum transmission output (PEAK) at thebase of the antenna must not exceed the fol-lowing values:

Waveband Maximumtransmission

output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle withoutrestrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRRF transmitters with transmitter frequenciesin the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-mum transmission output of up to 2 W(trunked radio/Tetra)RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G)There is no restriction for antenna positions onthe outside of the vehicle for the following wave-bands:RTrunked radio/TetraR70 cm wavebandR2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identificationplate is used only as an example. This data isdifferent for every vehicle and can deviate

Identification plates 387

Technicaldata

Z

from the data shown here. You can find thedata applicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmostposition.

X Fold floor covering; upwards.The VIN is visible:.

The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden-tification plate (Y page 387).The VIN can also be found at the lower edge ofthe windshield (Y page 388).

Engine number

: Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)= Emission control information plate, includ-

ing the certification of both federal and Cali-fornian emissions standards

Service products and filling capaci-ties


G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. Only use products recommended byMercedes-Benz. Damagewhich is caused by theuse of products which have not been recom-mended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benzwarranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed inthis Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in theappropriate section.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approved byMercedes-Benz by the following inscription onthe containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

388 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Fuel


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capacity

C 350 e 13.2 US gal(50.0 l)

All other models 17.4 US gal(66.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx.2.6 US gal(10.0 l)

All other models Approx.1.8 US gal (7.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium gradegasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operatingthe vehicle with other fuels can lead to enginefailure.

! Do not use the following:RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDiesel

Service products and filling capacities 389

Technicaldata

Z

Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailableand you have to refuel with unleaded gasolineof a lower grade, observe the following pre-cautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regularunleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon aspossible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

You will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the labelon the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

i For further information, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

C 300 4MATIC: as a temporary measure, if therecommended fuel is not available, youmay alsouse regular unleaded gasoline with an octanerating of 88 AKI/93 RON.All other models: as a temporary measure, ifthe recommended fuel is not available, you mayalso use regular unleaded gasoline with anoctane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This mayreduce engine performance and increase fuelconsumption. Avoid driving at full throttle andsudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuelwith a lower AKI.Information on refueling (Y page 165).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Do notmix fuel additives with fuel. This does notinclude additives for the removal and preven-tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only bemixed with additives recommended byMercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructionsfor use on the product label.More informationabout recommended additives can beobtained from any authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-ded fuels that have additives.

The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue could buildup in the injection system as a result. In suchcases, and in consultation with an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may bemixed with the cleaning additive recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notesand mixing ratios specified on the container.

Flexible Fuel vehicles

Important safety notesG WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.


Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with thefollowing fuel types:Rpremium-grade unleaded gasolineRE85 fuelRa mixture of E85 fuel and premium-gradeunleaded gasoline

i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized bythe Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap.

Fuel consumptionThe energy content of E85 fuel is less than thatof the same amount of premium-grade gasoline.The amount of fuel consumed when operatingthe vehicle with E85 fuel is therefore higher thanwith premium-grade gasoline.

MaintenanceInform your authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerthat you are operating or have operated thevehicle with E85 fuel.

Low outside temperaturesIf the outside temperature is below 32 ‡ (0 †),the starting procedure can take noticeably lon-ger when operating with E85 fuel.E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside tem-peratures under -4 ‡ (-20 †).

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec-ification other than is necessary to fulfill theprescribed service intervals. Do not changethe engine oil or oil filter in order to achievelonger replacement intervals than those pre-scribed. You could otherwise cause engine

damage or damage to the exhaust gas after-treatment.Follow the instructions in the service intervaldisplay regarding the oil change. Otherwise,you may damage the engine and the exhaustgas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the importantsafety notes on service products (Y page 388).The engine oils are matched to the performanceofMercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.You should therefore only use engine oils and oilfilters that are approved for vehicles with main-tenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model MB-Freigabe orMB-Approval

Mercedes-BenzC 450 AMG 4MATIC

All other models 229.5

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor Mercedes‑AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-ers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

9.4 qt (9.0 l)

C 300C 350 e

7.4 qt (7.0 l)

All other models 6.9 qt (6.5 l)


Technicaldata

Z

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 388).The brake fluid change intervals can be found inthe Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid can beobtained at any qualified specialist workshop oron the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop in accordancewith the replacement intervals and thereplacement confirmed in the MaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant


G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the

antifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can be foundin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, evenin countries where high temperatures prevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Comply with the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 388).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol-lowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection down to-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolantduring operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection downto -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not bedissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordancewith MB Specifications for Service Products310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filledwith a coolant mixture that ensures adequateantifreeze and corrosion protection.


i The coolant is checked with every mainte-nance interval at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

C 400 4MATICMercedes-BenzC 450 AMG 4MATIC

11.5 US qt (10.9 l)


11.7 US qt (11.1 l)

All other models 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Windshield/headlamp cleaning sys-tem


G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMBWinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 388).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.

At temperatures below freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid allyear round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle is fil-led with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oilapproved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.The approved PAG oil may not be mixed withany other PAG oil that is not approved forR-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climatecontrol system may be damaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerant orreplacing components, may only be carried outby a qualified specialist workshop. All applicableregulations, as well as SAE standard J639, mustbe adhered to.Always have work on the climate control systemcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards


Technicaldata

Z

? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbol: advises you about:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop

Filling capacities

Model Refrigerant

C 350 e 23.6 ± 0.4 oz(670 ± 10 g)


21.5 ± 0.4 oz(610 ± 10 g)

All other models 22.2 ± 0.4 oz(630 ± 10 g)

Model PAG oil

C 350 eMercedes‑AMGvehicles

4.2 oz(120 g)

All other models 2.8 oz(80 g)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicle data:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:

- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model : Opening height

C 300 69.6 in (1768 mm)

C 300 e 69.5 in (1765 mm)



68.8 in (1748 mm)

All other models 69.8 in (1774 mm)

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.


Vehicle length 187.2 in (4756 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

79.5 in (2020 mm)

Vehicle height 56.1 in (1426 mm)

Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm)

Turning radius 37.0 ft (11.29 m)

Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

394 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

All other models

Vehicle length,Mercedes‑BenzC 450 AMG 4MATIC

185.1 in (4702 mm)

Vehicle length, allother models

184.5 in (4686 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

79.5 in (2020 mm)

Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm)

Turning radius 36.8 ft (11.22 m)

Maximum roof load,Mercedes‑BenzC 450 AMG 4MATIC

Maximum roof load,all other models

165 lb (75 kg)

Maximum trunkload,Mercedes‑BenzC 450 AMG 4MATIC

Maximum trunkload, all other mod-els

220 lb (100 kg)

Model Vehicle height

C 300 57.0 in (1447 mm)

C 350 e 56.9 in (1444 mm)


56.3 in (1429 mm)

All other models 57.2 in (1452 mm)

Vehicle data 395

Technicaldata

Z

c-class...c-class operator's manual order no. p205 0070 13 part no. 205 584 15 05 edition b...

Documents